WO2021132283A1 - Inkjet printer - Google Patents
Inkjet printer Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2021132283A1 WO2021132283A1 PCT/JP2020/048046 JP2020048046W WO2021132283A1 WO 2021132283 A1 WO2021132283 A1 WO 2021132283A1 JP 2020048046 W JP2020048046 W JP 2020048046W WO 2021132283 A1 WO2021132283 A1 WO 2021132283A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- ink
- inkjet printer
- printer according
- tank
- supply bottle
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
- B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
- B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
- B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
- B41J2/01—Ink jet
- B41J2/17—Ink jet characterised by ink handling
- B41J2/175—Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
- B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
- B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
- B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
- B41J2/01—Ink jet
- B41J2/17—Ink jet characterised by ink handling
- B41J2/18—Ink recirculation systems
Definitions
- the present invention relates to an inkjet printer.
- This application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2019-237201 filed on December 26, 2019, and the entire contents of the application are incorporated herein by reference. There is.
- an inkjet printer including an ink head that ejects ink toward a recording medium and an ink tank that stores ink supplied to the ink head, and prints a desired image on the recording medium by an inkjet method has been known. ing.
- Patent Document 1 discloses a printer including a printer main body having an ink head and an ink storage device having a large capacity ink tank having a capacity of 2 L.
- the ink tank of Patent Document 1 is a so-called replenishment type, and is configured so that a user can replenish ink when the ink in the ink tank is consumed.
- the printer main body and the ink storage device are separate bodies, and the printer main body and the ink tank of the ink storage device are connected by a tube or the like. Therefore, the external dimensions of the printer as a whole become large, and a large space is required for installation. Therefore, the issue is how to save the space of the printer while securing the installation space of the large-capacity ink tank.
- the present invention has been made in view of this point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a new inkjet printer that achieves both a large capacity of an ink tank and a space saving of a printer.
- the inkjet printer has an ink head for ejecting ink toward a recording medium, a cover body extending in the left-right direction to cover the ink head, and an ink replenishment port for replenishing the ink.
- An ink tank for storing the ink supplied to the head is provided. At least a part of the ink tank is arranged below the cover body in the vertical direction, and at least a part of the ink replenishment port is provided so as not to overlap the cover body in a plan view.
- the inkjet printer includes a platen that supports a recording medium, an ink head that ejects ink toward the recording medium, a cover body that extends in the left-right direction and covers the ink head, and the cover body. It is provided in front and on the side of the platen, has an ink replenishment port for replenishing ink, and includes a plurality of ink tanks for storing the ink to be supplied to the ink head.
- Each of the plurality of ink tanks has a rectangular shape having a long side and a short side in a plan view, and the short sides are arranged along the left-right direction.
- the ink tank is arranged by effectively utilizing at least a part of the space under the cover body, which has been a dead space in the past.
- a plurality of ink tanks can be made compact in the left-right direction by effectively utilizing at least a part of the space in front of the cover body and on the side of the platen, which has been a dead space in the past. Have been placed. Therefore, according to the first invention of the present application and the second invention of the present application, it is possible to suitably secure the installation space of the large-capacity ink tank while saving the space of the printer.
- FIG. 1 is a front view of an inkjet printer according to an embodiment.
- FIG. 2 is a right side view of the inkjet printer according to the embodiment.
- FIG. 3 is a front view showing the internal structure of the main body.
- FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the ink flow path.
- FIG. 5 is an enlarged plan view of the vicinity of the ink supply device.
- FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the ink supply device.
- FIG. 7 is a plan view of the ink supply device.
- FIG. 8 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the ink supply device.
- FIG. 9 is a vertical sectional view of the supply bottle.
- FIG. 10 is an enlarged vertical cross-sectional view of the vicinity of the mounting mechanism.
- FIG. 11 is a view corresponding to FIG.
- FIG. 10 showing a state in which the valve body and the ink injection port of the supply bottle are in contact with each other.
- FIG. 12 is a view corresponding to FIG. 10 showing a state in which the stopper is engaged with the supply bottle.
- FIG. 13 is a view corresponding to FIG. 10 showing a state in which the unlock switch is pressed.
- FIG. 14 is an enlarged front view of the right side portion with the supply bottle attached.
- FIG. 15 is a view corresponding to FIG. 2 showing a state in which the supply bottle is attached.
- FIG. 16 is an enlarged perspective view of the right side portion of the inkjet printer according to the modified example in a state where the supply bottle is attached.
- FIG. 17 is a part of the right side view of the state in which the supply bottle of the inkjet printer according to the modified example is attached.
- FIG. 18 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of the injection port of the supply bottle according to the modified example.
- the inkjet printer refers to a printing method by a conventionally known inkjet technique, for example, a continuous method such as a binary deflection method or a continuous deflection method, a thermal method, a piezoelectric element method, or the like. Refers to all printers that use the demand method.
- the term "printer” is a term that includes a so-called 2D printer that prints a two-dimensional image and a so-called 3D printer (three-dimensional modeling apparatus) that forms a three-dimensional modeled object.
- FIG. 1 is a front view of an inkjet printer (hereinafter referred to as a printer) 10.
- FIG. 2 is a right side view of the printer 10.
- FIG. 3 is a front view showing the internal structure of the main part (specifically, the main body part 12 described later) of the printer 10.
- left, right, top, and bottom mean left, right, top, and bottom as seen from the user (user of the printer 10) in front of the printer 10, respectively, and the user from the printer 10.
- the one that approaches is the front, and the one that moves away is the rear.
- the symbols F, Rr, L, R, U, and D in the drawing represent front, back, left, right, top, and bottom, respectively. However, these are merely directions for convenience of explanation, and do not limit the installation mode of the printer 10.
- the printer 10 is a 2D printer. As shown in FIG. 1, the printer 10 is a printing device that prints on the recording medium 5.
- the printer 10 is a so-called Roll-to-Roll type.
- the printer 10 is a large-sized printer that prints on a large-format recording medium 5.
- the recording medium 5 is a roll-shaped medium in this embodiment.
- the recording medium 5 includes not only papers such as plain paper and printing paper for inkjet, but also resin materials such as polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and polyester, fabrics such as woven fabrics and non-woven fabrics, and aluminum. It includes media made of various materials such as iron, wood and glass.
- the printer 10 has two legs 11, a casing 19 supported by the legs 11 and covering the main body 12 and the piping boxes 18L and 18R, and an ink tank 151 (see FIG. 2). 70A to 70H, and a plurality of ink supply devices 70A to 70H.
- the leg portion 11 typically contacts the floor surface and supports the main body portion 12 and the piping box portions 18L and 18R from below.
- the leg portion 11 is arranged below the main body portion 12.
- the two legs 11 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction.
- the two legs 11 sandwich the platen 14, which will be described later, from both sides in the left-right direction.
- the vertical length (height) of the leg portion 11 is between the waist height and the chest height in a standard user's standing position, and is, for example, about 70 to 110 cm.
- the two legs 11 each include a first leg 11A and a second leg 11B, respectively.
- the first leg portion 11A is in contact with the lower surface of the main body portion 12.
- the first leg portion 11A extends downward from the lower end of the main body portion 12.
- the first leg portion 11A extends vertically.
- the second leg portion 11B extends in the front-rear direction from the lower end of the first leg portion 11A.
- the second leg portion 11B extends parallel to the lower surface of the main body portion 12.
- the main body portion 12 is arranged above the leg portion 11.
- the main body 12 is supported by the legs 11.
- the main body portion 12 is arranged at a predetermined height from the floor surface by the leg portions 11.
- the main body 12 extends in the left-right direction.
- the main body 12 constitutes a printing space for printing on the recording medium 5.
- a guide rail 13 inside the main body 12, a guide rail 13, a part of the platen 14, a plurality of ink heads 20, a plurality of dampers 22, and a plurality of ink flows
- a part of the road 40 and a control device 80 are arranged.
- a part of the ink flow path 40 is arranged outside the main body 12.
- the ink supply devices 70A to 70H are arranged outside the main body 12.
- the ink head 20, the damper 22, the ink flow path 40, and the ink supply devices 70A to 70H are each eight.
- the ink head 20, the damper 22, the ink flow path 40, and the ink supply devices 70A to 70H do not necessarily have to be the same number.
- the piping box portions 18L and 18R are attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 12.
- the piping box portions 18L and 18R are provided below the main body portion 12.
- the piping box portions 18L and 18R have a box shape.
- the piping box portions 18L and 18R are provided on the left side and the right side of the platen 14.
- the piping box portions 18L and 18R sandwich the platen 14 from both sides in the left-right direction. As a result, the dead space of the printer 10 can be reduced, and the installation area of the printer 10 can be reduced.
- the lengths of the piping box portions 18L and 18R in the front-rear direction are shorter than those of the main body portion 12.
- the piping box portions 18L and 18R overlap with the main body portion 12 (see FIG. 5).
- the side view at least a part of the piping box portions 18L and 18R overlaps with the platen 14.
- a part of the ink flow path 40 and the like are arranged inside the piping box portions 18L and 18R.
- the ink supply devices 70A to 70H are arranged outside the piping box portions 18L and 18R.
- the casing 19 is a housing that covers the main body portion 12 and the piping box portions 18L and 18R. In the present embodiment, the casing 19 covers the entire guide rail 13. The casing 19 covers at least a part of the platen 14. A part of the platen 14 is arranged outside the casing 19.
- the casing 19 separates the main body portion 12 and the piping box portions 18L and 18R. In the present embodiment, the main body portion 12 that covers the ink head 20 and the piping box portions 18L and 18R that accommodate a part of the ink flow path 40 are separately partitioned by the casing 19, but the main body portion 12 And the piping box portions 18L and 18R may be integrally covered by the casing 19.
- the casing 19 is an example of a cover body.
- the casing 19 is divided into three regions in the left-right direction: a left side portion 19L, a central portion 19M, and a right side portion 19R.
- An operation panel 19C is provided on the right side portion 19R.
- the operation panel 19C is provided on the front surface of the casing 19 (specifically, the front surface of the main body 12) so that the user can easily operate the operation panel 19C.
- the operation panel 19C is inclined so as to be positioned forward toward the lower side. That is, the operation panel 19C is tilted forward.
- the operation panel 19C also serves as an input unit for the user to input information related to printing.
- the operation panel 19C is provided with a display unit 19D for displaying information related to printing.
- the guide rail 13 is provided on the main body portion 12 and extends in the left-right direction (main scanning direction).
- the guide rail 13 extends from the left side portion 19L to the right side portion 19R.
- the carriage 30 is slidably engaged with the guide rail 13.
- the carriage 30 is arranged in a predetermined standby position (not shown) in the right side portion 19R.
- the carriage 30 is arranged at a predetermined maintenance position (not shown) in the left side portion 19L, for example, when performing maintenance on the ink head 20.
- An ink head 20 and a damper 22 are mounted on the carriage 30.
- the carriage 30 may be further equipped with various devices such as a light irradiation device (for example, an ultraviolet lamp) and various members.
- the carriage 30 reciprocates in the left-right direction by the carriage moving mechanism 16.
- the carriage moving mechanism 16 is a mechanism for moving the carriage 30 in the left-right direction along the guide rail 13. As shown in FIG. 3, the carriage moving mechanism 16 has a pulley 17b and a pulley 17a arranged on the left end side and the right end side of the guide rail 13. A carriage motor 16a is connected to the pulley 17a. The carriage motor 16a is electrically connected to the control device 80 (see FIG. 1) and is controlled by the control device 80. An endless belt 15 is wound around the pulley 17a and the pulley 17b, respectively. The carriage 30 is fixed to the belt 15. When the carriage motor 16a is driven, the pulley 17a rotates and the belt 15 travels. As a result, the carriage 30 moves in the left-right direction along the guide rail 13.
- the platen 14 supports the recording medium 5 at the time of printing.
- a recording medium 5 is placed on the platen 14 at the time of printing.
- Printing on the recording medium 5 is performed on the platen 14.
- the platen 14 is provided on the main body portion 12 and extends in the left-right direction. In the left-right direction, the platen 14 is provided between the two legs 11. In the left-right direction, the platen 14 is provided between the piping box portions 18L and 18R.
- the platen 14 is provided between the ink supply devices 70A to 70D and the ink supply devices 70E to 70H. As shown in FIG. 2, the platen 14 also extends in the front-rear direction.
- the front end 14t of the platen 14 is located closer to the casing 19 (right side in FIG. 2) than the front end 11t of the second leg portion 11B. As shown in FIG. 3, the platen 14 is arranged below the guide rail 13.
- the platen 14 is provided with a pair of upper and lower grit rollers (not shown) and pinch rollers (not shown).
- the grit roller is connected to a feed motor (not shown).
- the grit roller is rotationally driven by a feed motor.
- the ink head 20 ejects a droplet of ink 59 (see FIG. 4) toward the recording medium 5.
- the ink head 20 is arranged above the platen 14.
- the ink head 20 is mounted on the carriage 30.
- the plurality of ink heads 20 are arranged in the left-right direction.
- the ink head 20 is slidably engaged with the guide rail 13 via the carriage 30.
- the number of ink heads 20 is the same as the number of ink supply devices 70A to 70H (8). However, the number of ink heads 20 does not have to be the same as the number of ink supply devices 70A to 70H.
- the lower surface 20a (see FIG. 4) of the ink head 20 faces the platen 14.
- a nozzle 21 (see FIG. 4) for ejecting ink 59 is formed on the lower surface 20a of the ink head 20.
- an actuator (not shown) made of a piezoelectric element or the like is provided inside the ink head 20. By driving this actuator, the ink 59 is ejected from the nozzle 21 of the ink head 20.
- FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an ink flow path 40.
- the plurality of (here, eight) ink flow paths 40 are the paths of the ink 59 that connect the ink tanks 151 of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H and the plurality of ink heads 20, respectively.
- the ink 59 of the ink tank 151 is supplied to the ink head 20 through the ink flow path 40, respectively.
- the ink flow path 40 of the present embodiment is configured so that the ink 59 can be circulated including the ink tank 151. Therefore, a part of the ink 59 that has flowed from the ink tank 151 to the ink flow path 40 returns to the ink tank 151 again.
- the ink 59 may be the same as that conventionally used, and there is no particular limitation.
- the ink 59 may be a solvent-based pigment ink, a water-based pigment ink, a water-based dye ink, or the like.
- the ink 59 may be, for example, a photocurable ink containing a photopolymerizable monomer and a photopolymerization initiator system and having a property of being cured by light irradiation (for example, an ultraviolet curable UV ink).
- the ink tanks 151 of the eight ink supply devices 70A to 70H are filled with inks containing different color materials, for example, cyan ink, magenta ink, yellow ink, black ink, light cyan ink, and light magenta ink. Light black ink and white ink are stored.
- the type of ink 59 (coloring material, properties, use, etc.) is not limited at all.
- the ink flow path 40 has flexibility and flexibility, and is configured to be elastically deformable.
- the ink flow path 40 is composed of, for example, a flexible tube.
- Four of the eight ink flow paths 40 extend from the ink tanks 151 of the ink supply devices 70A to 70D to the inside of the piping box portion 18L and the inside of the main body portion 12. The remaining four extend from the ink tanks 151 of the ink supply devices 70E to 70H to the inside of the piping box portion 18R and the inside of the main body portion 12. As shown in FIG.
- the ink flow paths 40 include a first flow path 40a, a second flow path 40b, a third flow path 40c, a fourth flow path 40d, a fifth flow path 40e, and a sixth flow path.
- a flow path 40f and a seventh flow path 40g are provided.
- a liquid feed pump 41, a degassing device 43, a branch member 45, a damper 22, a pressure adjusting valve 46, and so on. Is provided.
- various devices and members may be further provided in the middle of the ink flow path 40, if necessary.
- the ink flow path 40 may be provided with, for example, a filtration device for filtering the ink 59.
- the upstream end of the first flow path 40a is connected to the ink outlet 152O (see also FIG. 8) of the ink tank 151.
- the downstream end of the first flow path 40a is connected to the liquid feed pump 41.
- the upstream end of the second flow path 40b is connected to the liquid feed pump 41.
- the downstream end of the second flow path 40b is connected to the degassing device 43.
- the upstream end of the third flow path 40c is connected to the degassing device 43.
- the downstream end of the second flow path 40b is connected to the branch member 45.
- the upstream end of the fourth flow path 40d is connected to the branch member 45.
- the downstream end of the fourth flow path 40d is connected to the damper 22.
- the upstream end of the fifth flow path 40e is connected to the damper 22.
- the downstream end of the fifth flow path 40e is connected to the ink head 20.
- the upstream end of the sixth flow path 40f is connected to the branch member 45.
- the downstream end of the sixth flow path 40f is connected to the pressure regulating valve 46.
- the upstream end of the seventh flow path 40 g is connected to the pressure regulating valve 46.
- the downstream end of the seventh flow path 40g is connected to the ink inlet 153I (see also FIG. 8) of the ink tank 151.
- the first flow path 40a, the second flow path 40b, the third flow path 40c, the fourth flow path 40d, and the fifth flow path 40e are used in the ink tank during printing, cleaning of the ink head 20, and the like. It constitutes an ink supply flow path for sending the ink 59 in 151 to the ink head 20.
- the sixth flow path 40f and the seventh flow path 40g form an ink recirculation flow path for circulating the ink 59 in the ink tank 151.
- the first flow path 40a, the second flow path 40b, the third flow path 40c, the sixth flow path 40f, and the seventh flow path 40g are ink circulation flow paths that circulate the ink 59 in the ink tank 151. Consists of.
- the liquid feed pump 41 is a liquid feed device that sends the ink 59 of the ink tank 151 to the ink head 20.
- the liquid feed pump 41 is not particularly limited, and is, for example, a diaphragm pump, a tube pump, a syringe pump, or the like. In this embodiment, one liquid feed pump 41 is provided in each ink flow path 40. As shown in FIG. 2, the liquid feed pump 41 is arranged inside the piping box portions 18L and 18R. The liquid feed pump 41 is connected to the motor 42. The motor 42 is arranged inside the piping box portions 18L and 18R. The motor 42 is electrically connected to the control device 80 (see FIG. 1) and is controlled by the control device 80.
- the degassing device 43 is a device that removes air dissolved in the ink 59 and air bubbles mixed in the ink 59.
- one degassing device 43 is provided in each ink flow path 40.
- the degassing device 43 is arranged inside the piping box portions 18L and 18R, respectively.
- the degassing device 43 is connected to the vacuum pump 44.
- the vacuum pumps 44 are arranged one by one inside the piping box portions 18L and 18R.
- One vacuum pump 44 is connected to each of the four degassing devices 43.
- the vacuum pump 44 is electrically connected to the control device 80 (see FIG. 1) and is controlled by the control device 80.
- the damper 22 is provided directly above the ink head 20.
- the damper 22 relaxes the pressure fluctuation of the ink 59 during printing and stabilizes the ejection operation of the ink 59 from the nozzle 21 of the ink head 20.
- the damper 22 is mounted on the carriage 30 together with the ink head 20.
- the damper 35 is not essential and may be omitted in other embodiments.
- the pressure adjusting valve 46 is a valve body that adjusts the pressure of the ink head 20 and the ink flow path 40.
- the pressure adjusting valve 46 is a valve body that closes between the sixth flow path 40f and the seventh flow path 40g of the ink flow path 40. By opening and closing the pressure adjusting valve 46, the pressure applied to the ink head 20 and the ink flow path 40 can be adjusted.
- the pressure regulating valve 46 is a pressure reducing valve (relief valve) here. In this embodiment, one pressure regulating valve 46 is provided in each ink flow path 40.
- the pressure regulating valve 46 is electrically connected to the control device 80 (see FIG. 1) and is controlled by the control device 80.
- the pressure regulating valve 46 is arranged outside the casing 19. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, the pressure regulating valve 46 is attached to the outer surface of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H. Specifically, the pressure adjusting valve 46 is attached to the rear surface of the ink replenishing unit 190, which will be described later. In the front-rear direction, the pressure adjusting valve 46 is arranged in front of the piping box portions 18L and 18R. The pressure regulating valve 46 is arranged in front of the liquid feeding pump 41 and the degassing device 43. The pressure regulating valve 46 is arranged in front of the casing 19. The pressure adjusting valve 46 is arranged on the side closer to the casing 19 (on the right side in FIG. 2) than the ink replenishing unit 190. The pressure regulating valve 46 is arranged on the side closer to the casing 19 (on the right side in FIG. 2) than the front end 14t of the platen 14.
- the pressure adjusting valve 46 is arranged below the main body 12.
- the pressure regulating valve 46 is arranged below the lower surface 20a of the ink head 20.
- the pressure regulating valve 46 is arranged above the ink tank 151.
- the pressure adjusting valve 46 is arranged between the main body 12 and the ink tank 151.
- at least a part of the pressure adjusting valve 46 overlaps with the main body portion 12. As a result, the dead space of the printer 10 can be effectively utilized.
- At least a part of the pressure regulating valve 46 is arranged above the upper end of the liquid feed pump 41.
- At least a part of the pressure regulating valve 46 is arranged above the upper end of the deaerator 43.
- the pressure adjusting valve 46 is opened to open the space between the 6th flow path 40f and the 7th flow path 40g.
- the ink 59 in the ink tank 151 flows through the ink circulation flow path and is returned to the ink tank 151.
- the ink 59 in the ink tank 151 can be agitated, and for example, pigments and the like that tend to settle can be preferably dispersed. Therefore, the ink 59 stored in the ink tank 151 can be maintained in a homogeneous state.
- the degassing device 43 is provided in the ink circulation flow path, the degassing level of the ink 59 can be improved by circulating the ink 59.
- the pressure adjusting valve 46 When the ink 59 is circulated during printing, for example, the pressure adjusting valve 46 is opened, the liquid feeding pump 41 is driven, and the liquid feeding amount of the liquid feeding pump 41 is made larger than the amount required by the ink head 20. As a result, the ink 59 can be continuously agitated even during printing. Further, when cleaning the ink head 20, for example, the pressure adjusting valve 46 is closed, and the space between the sixth flow path 40f and the seventh flow path 40g is closed. By driving the liquid feed pump 41 in this state, the ink 59 in the ink tank 151 is concentrated in the ink supply flow path, and the ink 59 is concentratedly supplied to the ink head 20.
- the plurality of (here, eight) ink supply devices 70A to 70H are for supplying ink 59 having different color materials, properties, uses, and the like to the ink head 20.
- the ink supply devices 70A to 70H do not replace the ink tank 151 itself, but from the ink replenishment supply bottle 400 (see FIG. 9) to the ink 59.
- This is a replenishment type (non-disposable) ink supply device that is replenished and used repeatedly.
- the configuration of the supply bottle 400 will be described later.
- the ink supply devices 70A to 70H are provided on the front surface of the printer 10. Specifically, it is provided in front of the casing 19. As a result, the user can add the ink 59 from the front side of the printer 10 while checking, for example, the display unit 19D and the progress of printing. However, at least a part of the plurality of ink supply devices 70A to 70H may be provided on the side or the rear of the casing 19, for example.
- the ink supply devices 70A to 70H are not mounted on the carriage 30 and do not move in the left-right direction.
- the eight ink supply devices 70A to 70H are arranged on the left and right sides of the main body 12 by dividing them into four. Four ink supply devices 70A to 70H are arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the left side portion 19L and the right side portion 19R, respectively.
- the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are provided on the left side of the central portion 19M of the casing 19 and the platen 14.
- the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are provided outside the left leg portion 11 (the side away from the central portion 19M, the left side in FIG. 1).
- the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are provided below the main body portion 12.
- the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are provided in front of the piping box portion 18L.
- the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are arranged in a row along the left-right direction.
- the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction.
- the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are arranged alternately in the vertical direction.
- the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are arranged so that a part thereof overlaps in the vertical direction.
- the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are provided on the right side of the central portion 19M of the casing 19 and the platen 14.
- the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are provided on the outer side (the side away from the central portion 19M, the right side in FIG. 1) from the right leg portion 11.
- the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are provided below the main body portion 12.
- the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are provided in front of the piping box portion 18R.
- the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are arranged in a row along the left-right direction.
- the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction.
- the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are arranged alternately in the vertical direction.
- the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are arranged so that a part thereof overlaps in the vertical direction.
- the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are attached to the front surface of the piping box portion 18L, respectively. Specifically, the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are fixed to the piping box portion 18L so as to stand upright in the vertical direction. The four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are supported by the left side portion 19L of the casing 19, respectively, via the piping box portion 18L. Similarly, the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are attached to the front surface of the piping box portion 18R, respectively. Specifically, the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are fixed to the piping box portion 18R so as to stand upright in the vertical direction. The four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are supported by the right side portion 19R of the casing 19, respectively, via the piping box portion 18R.
- the left and right width WL1 of the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are narrower than the left and right width WL2 of the piping box portion 18L.
- the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are contained in the width WL2 of the piping box portion 18L.
- the left and right widths of the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are narrower than the left and right widths of the piping box portion 18R.
- the ink supply devices 70E to 70H are contained in the width WL2 of the piping box portion 18R.
- the left and right width WL1 of the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D and the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are the same, and the left and right width WL2 of the piping box portion 18L and the piping box portion 18R are the same. ..
- the ink supply devices 70A to 70H overlaps with the platen 14. Further, when the ink supply devices 70A to 70H are divided into a front side portion and a rear side portion by the center line CL in the front-rear direction, the front side portion of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H is arranged in front of the operation panel 19C. There is. The rear portion of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H is arranged below the operation panel 19C. Therefore, in a plan view, the front portion of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H does not overlap with the main body portion 12. In a plan view, the rear portion of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H overlaps with the main body portion 12.
- the positions of the front end and the rear end of the plurality of ink supply devices 70A to 70H are the same.
- the front ends 70t of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H are located closer to the main body 12 (on the right side in FIG. 2) than the front ends 11t of the second leg portion 11B.
- a vertical line perpendicular to the second leg portion 11B and passing through the front end 70t is shown by a virtual line TL.
- the front ends 70t of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H are located closer to the main body 12 (on the right side in FIG. 2) than the front ends 14t of the platen 14.
- the recording medium 5 is guided by the platen 14 to the front of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H. Therefore, the user can easily pick up the recording medium 5 after printing is completed by inserting his / her hands into both side surfaces of the platen 14.
- the number of ink supply devices is eight, but the number and arrangement of the ink supply devices are not limited at all.
- the ink supply devices 70A to 70H may be directly attached to the main body portion 12 without interposing the piping box portions 18L and 18R. Further, for example, when the types of ink 59 are small, the ink supply device may be attached only to the piping box portion 18L or the piping box portion 18R.
- the plurality of ink supply devices 70A to 70H all have the same configuration. Therefore, in the following, the configuration of the ink supply device will be described by taking the ink supply device 70H as an example. However, the plurality of ink supply devices 70A to 70H do not necessarily all have the same configuration, and some of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H may have different configurations from the ink supply devices 70H.
- FIG. 5 is an enlarged plan view of the vicinity of the ink supply devices 70E to 70H of the printer 10.
- FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the ink supply device 70H.
- FIG. 7 is a plan view of the ink supply device 70H.
- FIG. 8 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the ink supply device 70H.
- the ink supply device 70H includes an ink storage unit 150, an ink amount detection unit 160, and an ink replenishment unit 190.
- the ink supply device 70H includes an ink storage unit 150, an ink amount detection unit 160, and an ink replenishment unit 190.
- the ink storage unit 150 is a portion that stores ink 59.
- the ink storage unit 150 includes an ink tank 151.
- the ink tank 151 is a container in which the ink 59 is stored.
- the ink tank 151 is a container that is not disposable even when the amount of ink 59 is low and can be used continuously.
- one side surface (the right side surface of FIG. 2) of the ink tank 151 is fixed to the piping box portion 18R.
- the ink tank 151 is attached so as not to be detachable from the piping box portion 18R without a tool. As a result, poor connection between the ink tank 151 and the ink flow path 40 is less likely to occur.
- the ink tank 151 is supported by the piping box portion 18R.
- the ink tank 151 is not mounted on the carriage 30 and does not move in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 4, the ink tank 151 is arranged below the lower surface 20a of the ink head 20. In the vertical direction, the distance between the upper end of the ink tank 151 and the lower surface 20a of the ink head 20 can be approximately 50 to 200 mm, for example, 100 to 150 mm.
- the ink tank 151 has a flat box shape. As shown in FIG. 7, the ink tank 151 has a rectangular shape in a plan view. However, the ink tank 151 may have an elliptical shape, a circular shape, or the like in a plan view.
- the ink tank 151 includes a pair of short sides 151N and a pair of long sides 151W. As shown in FIG. 5, in the present embodiment, the short side 151N of the ink tank 151 extends in the left-right direction. The short side 151N extends along the main body 12 and the casing 19. The long side 151W extends along the front-rear direction. The long side 151W extends so as to be orthogonal to the main body 12 and the casing 19.
- the ink supply devices 70E to 70H are arranged side by side so that the long sides 151W face each other.
- the "rectangular shape” means, for example, the following shapes (1) to (3): (1) A shape in which a long side 151W and a short side 151N are joined to each other via a curved line. (2) A shape in which at least one of the long side 151W and the short side 151N is not straight but curved or uneven; at least one of the long side 151W and the short side 151N is bent, and a plurality of A term that includes a shape composed of a straight line or a curved line.
- the material of the ink tank 151 may be the same as that conventionally used for this type of application, and there is no particular limitation.
- the ink tank 151 is preferably provided with appropriate rigidity, gas barrier property, and water vapor barrier property.
- the surface of the ink tank 151 in contact with the ink 59 is preferably made of a material that has excellent ink corrosion resistance and does not easily deteriorate the ink 59.
- the ink tank 151 is made of, for example, a resin such as polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), polyethylene terephthalate (PET), silicon, and a fluororesin.
- the ink tank 151 may be provided with a coating layer made of resin or the like on the inner surface or the outer surface. When the ink 59 is photocurable, the ink tank 151 may have a black appearance and a light-shielding property.
- the ink tank 151 includes a tank main body 152 having an upper opening 152U opened upward, and a lid 153 covering the upper opening 152U.
- the tank body 152 is an example of a lower member
- the lid body 153 is an example of an upper member.
- the ink tank 151 may further include another member between the tank body 152 and the lid 153 in the vertical direction, for example.
- the tank body 152 and the lid 153 can be formed, for example, by injection molding of a resin material.
- the tank body 152 and the lid body 153 are each formed as one member.
- the tank body 152 and / or the lid 153 may be formed by combining and joining a plurality of members.
- the tank body 152 has a flange portion (edge portion) 152E on the peripheral edge of the upper opening 152U.
- the lid body 153 has a flange portion 153E on the outer peripheral edge.
- the flange portion 152E of the tank body 152 and the flange portion 153E of the lid body 153 are overlapped and joined by a joining member 159 such as a bolt.
- the flange joint portion 158 is formed.
- the ink tank 151 is integrated by a flange coupling portion 158.
- the upper opening 152U of the tank body 152 is hermetically sealed by the lid 153.
- the flange portion 152E is an example of the first flange portion
- the flange portion 153E is an example of the second flange portion.
- the ink supply devices 70E to 70H are arranged so that the flange coupling portions 158 are staggered in the vertical direction. In other words, the flange coupling portion 158 is displaced in the vertical direction. As a result, the large-capacity ink tank 151 can be compactly stored in the left-right direction.
- the flange coupling portions 158 of the ink supply devices 70E and 70G are arranged above the flange coupling portions 158 of the ink supply devices 70F and 70H. In the two adjacent ink supply devices 70E to 70H, at least a part of the flange coupling portion 158 is arranged so as to overlap each other with a predetermined overlap width OL.
- the tank main body 152 has a lower wall 152A, a rear wall 152B, and a front wall 152C.
- the lower wall 152A is formed with a lower opening (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction.
- the rear wall 152B extends upward from the lower wall 152A.
- the front wall 152C faces the rear wall 152B.
- the front wall 152C is inclined so as to be located rearward as it goes downward.
- the front wall 152C has a slope shape that gradually slopes downward from the front to the rear.
- the front wall 152C is inclined toward the ink outlet 152O. As shown in FIG. 2, the front wall 152C is inclined downward as it approaches the main body 12. As a result, even if the user approaches the printer 10 when replenishing the ink 59, the user's foot is less likely to hit the ink tank 151.
- the front wall 152C is an example of a tank inclined surface.
- the tank body 152 has a hollow structure.
- An ink storage chamber 154 is partitioned in the tank body 152.
- a gas-liquid interface between air and ink 59 exists in the ink storage chamber 154.
- the volume of the ink storage chamber 154 is typically larger than the volume of the supply bottle 400 (see FIG. 9).
- the capacity of the ink 59 that can be accommodated in the ink storage chamber 154 is typically 1 L or more, for example, 1.5 to 2 L. In this way, the ink tank 151 can accommodate a larger amount of ink 59 than, for example, an ink cartridge as a consumable item.
- the capacity of the ink 59 that can be stored in the ink storage chamber 154 may be approximately twice or more, for example, 3 to 5 times the capacity of the ink 59 stored in the supply bottle 400.
- an ink outflow pipe 152F is formed on the rear wall 152B of the tank body 152.
- the ink outflow tube 152F extends in a direction orthogonal to the rear wall 152B (front-rear direction in FIG. 8).
- the downstream end of the ink outflow pipe 152F that is, the end on the side away from the ink storage chamber 154 is the ink outlet 152O.
- One end of the ink flow path 40 specifically, the upstream end of the first flow path 40a is connected to the ink outlet 152O.
- the ink 59 in the ink storage chamber 154 flows out from the ink outlet 152O to the first flow path 40a of the ink flow path 40 and is supplied to the ink head 20.
- the lid body 153 is a member that covers the upper opening 152U of the tank body 152. As shown in FIG. 7, the lid body 153 has a rectangular shape in a plan view.
- the lid body 153 includes a plate-shaped portion 153B extending in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 2, at least a part of the lid 153 is arranged below the main body 12. At least a part of the lid 153 is arranged above the upper end of the liquid feed pump 41.
- the lid 153 is arranged below the lower surface 20a of the ink head 20. As shown in FIG. 5, in a plan view, at least a part of the lid 153 overlaps with the main body 12.
- the lid body 153 is provided with an atmospheric communication unit 153A.
- the atmospheric communication unit 153A is a member that maintains the inside of the ink storage chamber 154 in a state of atmospheric pressure and suppresses evaporation of the ink 59 in the ink storage chamber 154.
- the air communication unit 153A opens the ink storage chamber 154 to the atmosphere.
- the atmospheric communication unit 153A is a labyrinth structure that meanders the flow of the atmosphere.
- the atmospheric communication portion 153A is arranged in front of the piping box portion 18R in the front-rear direction.
- the air communication unit 153A is arranged on the side closer to the main body portion 12 (on the right side in FIG. 2) than the ink replenishment portion 190 of the ink supply device 70H.
- the atmospheric communication portion 153A is arranged on the side closer to the main body portion 12 (on the right side in FIG. 2) than the front end 14t of the platen 14.
- the air communication unit 153A is arranged in front of the liquid feed pump 41 and the deaerator 43 (on the left side in FIG. 2).
- the air communication unit 153A is arranged above the upper end of the liquid feed pump 41.
- the atmospheric communication portion 153A is arranged below the main body portion 12.
- the atmospheric communication portion 153A is arranged below the lower surface 20a of the ink head 20.
- a distance (for example, a distance of 1 cm or more) is secured between the air communication portion 153A and the main body portion 12 so that the atmosphere can flow.
- FIG. 5 in a plan view, at least a part (here, all) of the atmospheric communication portion 153A overlaps with the main body portion 12.
- the atmospheric communication portion 153A has a through hole 153H that penetrates the lid 153 in the vertical direction and communicates between the inside and the outside of the ink storage chamber 154, and the outer surface of the lid 153 (FIG. 7). It is provided on the upper surface) and includes a serpentine 153S that connects the through hole 153H and the atmosphere, and a resin film 153M that covers the through hole 153H and the serpentine 153S. In a plan view, the through hole 153H may overlap with the casing 19 (for example, the main body portion 12).
- the meandering path 153S meanders in an elongated manner in order to lengthen the fluid flow path from the through hole 153H to the atmosphere.
- the serpentine 153S is an example of an atmospheric communication groove.
- the resin film 153M may be, for example, a porous film having minute pores that allow the passage of gas while blocking the passage of the ink 59.
- the resin film 153M may be a film made of a fluororesin such as polytetrafluoroethylene.
- the lid body 153 further includes a lid body opening 313 and an ink inflow pipe 153F.
- the lid opening 313 is provided on the upper surface of the ink tank 151.
- the "upper surface” includes the highest surface (top surface) in the vertical direction among the wall portions constituting the lid body 153, and refers to all the surfaces facing downward in the vertical direction.
- the upper surface of the lid 153 may be a flat surface, for example, a horizontal surface, may have irregularities on the surface, may be curved, or may be inclined.
- the lid opening 313 penetrates the lid 153 in the vertical direction.
- the lid opening 313 is an example of an ink replenishment port.
- the lid opening 313 is provided between the height of the waist and the height of the chest in a standard user's standing position, for example, at a height of about 70 to 110 cm. Has been done.
- the user can replenish the ink 59 without bending the waist and bending or bending the knee and crouching. Therefore, the workload at the time of replenishing the ink of the user can be reduced.
- the "waist height in a standing state of a standard user” means the waist height position of a standard operator who operates the printer 10, and is, for example, Japanese Patent No. 5640373 and Japanese Patent No. 5640373. It is the same as the height described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 5942479.
- Japanese it can be 845.9 mm for men and 768.8 mm for women.
- foreigners for example, Americans
- it can be 934.3 mm for men and 829.9 mm for women (according to the 1998 adult average data).
- the lid opening 313 is provided in front of the casing 19. In plan view, at least a portion of the lid opening 313 does not overlap the casing 19. As a result, the user can add the ink 59 to the ink tank 151 without moving the ink tank 151, for example. Therefore, the ink 59 can be added even while the printer 10 is being used (for example, during printing).
- the entire lid opening 313 is provided in front of the casing 19. In plan view, the entire lid opening 313 does not overlap the casing 19.
- the lid opening 313 is arranged in front of the center line CL in the front-rear direction of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H. This makes it possible to improve the workability of the user when refilling ink.
- the lid opening 313 overlaps the front wall 152C in a plan view.
- the ink 59 replenished from the ink replenishment unit 190 typically moves in the ink storage chamber 154 along the front wall 152C.
- the front wall 152C functions as a guide for guiding the ink 59 from the ink replenishing unit 190.
- the ink 59 in the ink storage chamber 154 can be made to flow in one direction, and the ink 59 can be agitated. Further, even if the ink 59 is replenished vigorously, the bubbling of the ink 59 is suppressed. As a result, minute bubbles are less likely to be mixed with the ink 59, and the generated bubbles are less likely to overflow from the tank body 152.
- the ink inflow pipe 153F extends along the vertical direction.
- the lower end of the ink inflow tube 153F is the ink inflow port 153I.
- One end of the ink flow path 40 specifically, the downstream end of the seventh flow path 40g, which is a part of the ink return flow path, is connected to the ink inflow port 153I.
- the ink 59 that has flowed through the ink circulation flow path is returned to the ink storage chamber 154 from the ink inflow port 153I.
- the ink inlet 153I projects into the ink storage chamber 154.
- the ink inlet 153I is provided above the ink outlet 152O.
- the ink inlet 153I overlaps the front wall 152C in a plan view.
- the ink 59 flowing in from the ink inlet 153I moves in the ink storage chamber 154 along the front wall 152C.
- the front wall 152C functions as a guide for guiding the ink 59 from the ink inlet 153I.
- the ink 59 in the ink storage chamber 154 can be made to flow in one direction, and the ink 59 can be agitated.
- foaming of the ink 59 is suppressed, and it becomes difficult for minute bubbles to be mixed with the ink 59.
- the ink 59 containing minute bubbles is less likely to flow out into the ink flow path 40.
- the ink amount detection unit 160 is a detection mechanism that detects the amount of ink (typically, the remaining amount of ink 59) in the ink storage chamber 154 of the ink tank 151 by using the head pressure of the ink 59. By utilizing the head pressure of the ink 59, the amount of ink in the ink storage chamber 154 can be accurately detected over a long period of time.
- the ink amount detecting unit 160 includes a pressure sensitive film 161, a detected member 162, an urging member 163, a sensor unit 164, and a casing 165.
- the casing 165 is a case for accommodating the detected member 162, the urging member 163, and the sensor unit 164.
- the casing 165 is made of, for example, a metal such as aluminum, iron, or stainless steel, or a resin such as polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), or polyethylene terephthalate (PET).
- the casing 165 may have a black appearance and a light-shielding property.
- the pressure sensitive film 161 is a member whose degree of bending deformation changes according to the head pressure of the ink 59 in the ink storage chamber 154.
- the pressure sensitive film 161 is attached to the lower wall 152A of the tank body 152. Specifically, it is attached along the edge of the lower opening of the lower wall 152A.
- the pressure-sensitive film 161 constitutes a part of the lower surface (here, the bottom surface) of the ink storage chamber 154.
- the material of the pressure-sensitive film 161 may be the same as that conventionally used for this type of application, and is not particularly limited.
- the pressure sensitive membrane 161 is preferably made of a material having low gas permeability and water vapor permeability.
- the surface of the pressure sensitive film 161 in contact with the ink is preferably made of a material having excellent ink corrosion resistance.
- the pressure-sensitive film 161 is, for example, a resin film having a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure. In the present embodiment, the pressure sensitive film 161 is a flexible film having flexibility.
- the pressure sensitive film 161 is attached with a tension sufficient to bend and deform in a direction away from the lower opening 152D, in other words, in a direction away from the gas-liquid interface of the ink storage chamber 154 (lower part of FIG. 8).
- the pressure sensitive film 161 is displaced in a direction away from the ink storage chamber 154 (lower part in FIG. 8) due to the head pressure of the ink 59.
- the pressure-sensitive film 161 is displaced in the direction away from the gas-liquid interface as the head pressure of the ink 59 stored in the ink storage chamber 154 increases.
- the pressure sensitive film 161 is displaced in the direction approaching the ink storage chamber 154 (upper in FIG. 8). In other words, the pressure-sensitive film 161 is displaced in the direction closer to the gas-liquid interface as the head pressure of the ink 59 stored in the ink storage chamber 154 is lower.
- the member to be detected 162 is a member that is detected by the sensor unit 164 when the pressure sensitive film 161 bends and deforms.
- the member to be detected 162 is arranged outside and directly below the ink storage chamber 154.
- the member to be detected 162 is arranged outside the ink storage chamber 154.
- the member to be detected 162 is arranged inside the casing 165.
- the member to be detected 162 does not come into contact with the ink 59 stored in the ink storage chamber 154.
- the member to be detected 162 extends along the long side 151W of the casing 165.
- the member to be detected 162 is preferably made of a lightweight material that is harder than the pressure-sensitive film 161 and does not hinder the displacement of the pressure-sensitive film 161.
- the detected member 162 is supported on the rear surface of the casing 165.
- the detected member 162 is configured to be tiltable with the rear end portion as a fulcrum portion (tilt center).
- the detected member 162 tilts in a direction approaching the ink storage chamber 154 and a direction away from the ink storage chamber 154 (vertical direction in FIG. 8) in conjunction with the degree of bending deformation of the pressure sensitive film 161.
- the position of the member to be detected 162 changes (that is, it is displaced).
- the detected member 162 has a first shielding portion P1, a second shielding portion P2 extending upward from the upper end of the first shielding portion P1, and a third shielding portion extending upward from the upper end of the second shielding portion P2. It is provided with a unit P3.
- the positions of the front ends of the first shielding portion P1 and the second shielding portion P2 are the same.
- the positions of the rear ends of the second shielding portion P2 and the third shielding portion P3 are the same.
- the urging member 163 is a member that directly or indirectly contacts the pressure-sensitive film 161 to urge the pressure-sensitive film 161 in the direction of approaching the ink storage chamber 154 (upper part of FIG. 8). One end of the urging member 163 is fixed to the lower surface of the detected member 162, and the other end is fixed to the lower surface of the casing 165. The urging member 163 is arranged outside the ink storage chamber 154. The urging member 163 is arranged inside the casing 165. The urging member 163 does not come into contact with the ink 59 stored in the ink storage chamber 154.
- the urging member 163 may be the same as that conventionally used for this type of application, and is not particularly limited.
- the urging member 163 may be made of metal.
- the urging member 163 may be an elastic body.
- the urging member 163 is a columnar coil spring in this embodiment.
- the urging member 163 is maintained in a compressed state.
- the urging member 163 urges the pressure sensitive film 161 in the direction of approaching the ink storage chamber 154 via the detected member 162.
- the sensor unit 164 is a member that detects the position of the pressure sensitive film 161.
- the sensor unit 164 is configured to indirectly detect the position of the pressure sensitive film 161 by detecting the position of the member to be detected 162.
- the sensor unit 164 is arranged outside the ink storage chamber 154.
- the sensor unit 164 is arranged inside the casing 165.
- the sensor unit 164 does not come into contact with the ink 59 stored in the ink storage chamber 154.
- the sensor unit 164 is electrically connected to the control device 80 (see FIG. 1) and is controlled by the control device 80.
- the sensor unit 164 includes a first sensor S1 and a second sensor S2.
- the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 are fixed to the wall surface of the casing 165 so that the positions in the vertical direction are the same.
- the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 are transmission type photo sensors (photo interrupters) which are a kind of non-contact type sensors. Since the photo sensor has a fast response time, it can perform accurate detection in real time.
- the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 each have a light emitting unit (not shown) that irradiates light along an optical axis extending in the left-right direction, and a light receiving unit that receives light emitted from the light emitting unit. doing.
- the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion are arranged to face each other in the left-right direction so as to sandwich the shielding portion 162D.
- the head pressure of the ink 59 in the ink storage chamber 154 decreases.
- the bending deformation of the pressure sensitive film 161 is alleviated by the urging force of the urging member 163.
- the shielding unit 162D moves in the direction approaching the ink storage chamber 154 (upper part in FIG. 8)
- the third shielding unit P3 reaches the detection position (between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit) of the first sensor S1.
- the first sensor S1 is in the HIT state for detecting the third shielding portion P3.
- the second sensor S2 is in the UNHIT state.
- the bending deformation of the pressure sensitive film 161 is further alleviated.
- the shielding unit 162D moves further upward, the second shielding unit P2 reaches the detection positions (between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit) of the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2.
- both the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 are in the HIT state in which the second shielding portion P2 is detected.
- the shielding unit 162D moves further upward, the first shielding unit P1 reaches the detection position (between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit) of the second sensor S2.
- the second sensor S2 is in the HIT state for detecting the first shielding portion P1.
- the first sensor S1 is in the UNHIT state.
- the ink replenishment unit 190 is connected to the ink storage unit 150 via the lid opening 313.
- the ink replenishment unit 190 is configured so that the ink 59 can be replenished from the ink replenishment supply bottle 400 (see FIG. 9).
- the ink replenishment unit 190 is configured such that the supply bottle 400 can be attached and detached. Therefore, as compared with the case where the user holds the supply bottle for replenishment by hand and pours the ink, it is less likely that the ink 59 is spilled and wasted or the periphery of the printer 10 is contaminated.
- the supply bottle 400 is an example of a replenishment container containing the replenishment ink 59.
- the ink 59 contained in the supply bottle 400 is moved to the ink storage unit 150. Further, by removing the supply bottle 400 from the ink replenishment unit 190, the empty supply bottle 400 can be recovered.
- FIG. 9 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the supply bottle 400.
- the supply bottle 400 is represented in a typical market distribution state.
- the direction when the supply bottle 400 is mounted on the ink replenishment unit 190 is used unless otherwise specified.
- the supply bottle 400 at the time of market distribution is upside down from the direction when it is attached to the ink replenishment unit 190. However, this does not limit the installation mode of the supply bottle 400 and the like.
- the supply bottle 400 is attached to a container body 410 containing ink 59, a bottle-side connecting portion 420 provided at one end of the container body 410 and attached to the ink replenishing unit 190, and a container body 410, and is a bottle at the time of market distribution. It has a cap 430 that covers the side connection portion 420.
- the container body 410 has a substantially cylindrical shape in which the lower portion is thinner than the upper portion.
- the container body 410 has a hollow structure.
- the volume of the supply bottle 400 is typically smaller than the volume of the ink reservoir 154.
- the capacity of the ink 59 contained in the supply bottle 400 can be approximately 250 mL or more, typically 300 to 1000 mL, for example 500 mL.
- the container body 410 has a first straight portion 411, a tapered portion 412, a second straight portion 413, a protruding portion 414, and a front end portion 415.
- the first straight portion 411 constitutes an upper portion of the container body 410.
- the first straight portion 411 is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the vertical direction.
- the first straight portion 411 has a top surface that closes the upper end.
- a tapered portion 412 is continuous below the first straight portion 411.
- the tapered portion 412 is inclined so as to narrow in the direction of insertion into the mounting mechanism 192 (here, downward).
- the tapered portion 412 is inclined so as to narrow downward.
- the outer peripheral surface of the tapered portion 412 is formed here as a conical surface.
- the shape of the tapered portion 412 is not limited to the conical surface, and may be formed in an R shape such as a part of a spherical surface.
- the outer peripheral surface of the tapered portion 412 forms a held surface 412a held by the mounting mechanism 192.
- the second straight portion 413 is continuous below the tapered portion 412.
- the second straight portion 413 is also formed in a cylindrical shape.
- the diameter of the second straight portion 413 is smaller than the diameter of the first straight portion 411.
- a protruding portion 414 is provided below the second straight portion 413.
- the protruding portion 414 is also formed in a cylindrical shape.
- the diameter of the protruding portion 414 is larger than the diameter of the second straight portion 413.
- a front end portion 415 is provided below the protrusion 414. In the present embodiment, the front end portion 415 is formed in a cylindrical shape having the same diameter as the second straight portion 413.
- the protruding portion 414 protrudes from the second straight portion 413 and the front end portion 415 in the radial direction of the supply bottle 400.
- the container body 410 has a first stepped surface 414a formed between the second straight portion 413 and the protruding portion 414, and a second stepped surface 414b formed between the protruding portion 414 and the front end portion 415. I have.
- the first stepped surface 414a constitutes the upper surface of the protruding portion 414 and faces upward.
- the second stepped surface 414b constitutes the lower surface of the protruding portion 414 and faces downward.
- the first straight portion 411 occupies more than half the length of the entire container body 410 with respect to the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400. Therefore, the first stepped surface 414a is provided on the front side (lower side of FIG. 9) in the insertion direction with respect to the center of the supply bottle 400 in the insertion direction. As will be described in detail later, the first stepped surface 414a is an engaging portion with which the lock mechanism 290 (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is engaged.
- the lock mechanism 290 is a mechanism that regulates the upward movement of the supply bottle 400. When the supply bottle 400 is attached to the ink replenishment unit 190, the supply bottle 400 is held by the lock mechanism 290 below the half in the insertion direction.
- the first straight portion 411 does not have to occupy more than half the length of the entire container body 410, and the supply bottle 400 does not necessarily have to be held on the front side of the half in the insertion direction.
- a bottle-side connecting portion 420 is provided at the lower end of the container body 410, that is, at the lower end of the front end portion 415.
- the bottle-side connection portion 420 is a portion connected to the tank-side connection portion 300 (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, when the supply bottle 400 is mounted on the mounting mechanism 192.
- the bottle-side connecting portion 420 has an ink injection port 421 opened at an end (lower end) on the insertion direction side of the container body 410, and a sealing film 422 provided at the ink injection port 421.
- a bottle-side tapered surface 421a having an inclination corresponding to the receiving-side tapered surface 215a1 (see FIG.
- the tank-side connecting portion 300 is formed on the peripheral edge of the ink injection port 421, here, the inner peripheral surface of the ink injection port 421. Has been done.
- the horizontal positions between the bottle-side connecting portion 420 and the tank-side connecting portion 300 are aligned.
- the container body 410 has a fixed shape and is configured to maintain the above-mentioned shape regardless of the capacity of the ink 59.
- the supply bottle 400 is held and engaged by the mounting mechanism 192. Further, as will be described in detail later, the supply bottle 400 presses the valve body 210 (see FIG. 10) provided in the mounting mechanism 192. Therefore, the supply bottle 400 is not configured to have flexibility like a pouch, but is configured to have stylistic properties.
- the portion of the container body 410 that comes into contact with the ink, here the entire container body 410, is formed of resin so as not to chemically react with the ink.
- the container body 410 is formed of a resin having resistance to ink 59 and light-shielding property, for example, opaque polypropylene (PP).
- PP polypropylene
- the appearance of the container body 410 may be black or brown because it can effectively block light.
- a sealing film 422 is stretched above the tapered surface 421a on the bottle side so as to close the ink injection port 421.
- the sealing film 422 is heat-welded to the periphery of the ink injection port 421, for example.
- the sealing film 422 seals the supply bottle 400 with the ink 59 contained therein.
- the sealing film 422 airtightly seals the ink injection port 421 of the container body 410.
- the sealing film 222 is formed of, for example, a resin film such as polypropylene (PP) or polyethylene terephthalate (PET), a metal foil such as aluminum foil, or the like.
- the ink replenishment unit 190 includes a replenishment port cover 191 and a mounting mechanism 192.
- the replenishment port cover 191 covers the upper part of the mounting mechanism 192, specifically, the upper part of the insertion portion 270 and the opening portion 163O described later.
- the replenishment port cover 191 is a member that prevents dust and dirt from entering the mounting mechanism 192.
- the refill port cover 191 is also a member that prevents light from entering the mounting mechanism 192.
- the user opens the refill port cover 191 and inserts the supply bottle 400 into the mounting mechanism 192 to add the ink 59.
- the replenishment port cover 191 is arranged below the main body 12 and the operation panel 19C.
- the replenishment port cover 191 is arranged below the lower surface 20a of the ink head 20.
- the distance between the upper end of the replenishment port cover 191 and the lower surface 20a of the ink head 20 may be approximately 50 to 200 mm, for example, 100 to 150 mm.
- the replenishment port cover 191 is arranged above the front end 14t of the platen 14.
- the replenishment port cover 191 is provided in front of the casing 19.
- the replenishment port cover 191 is arranged in front of the center line CL in the front-rear direction of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H. At least a part (here, all) of the replenishment port cover 191 is located in front of the main body portion 12.
- the replenishment port cover 191 does not overlap with the casing 19.
- the replenishment port cover 191 does not overlap the casing 19 at all in a plan view and is completely exposed.
- the replenishment port cover 191 is arranged directly above the lid opening 313. Since the replenishment port cover 191 is exposed in a plan view, the ink 59 can be added to the ink tank 151 without moving the ink tank 151. Therefore, the ink 59 can be added even while the printer 10 is being used (for example, during printing).
- the mounting mechanism 192 is configured so that the user can insert the supply bottle 400. Specifically, the mounting mechanism 192 is configured so that the container body 410 of the supply bottle 400 can be inserted while being sealed with the sealing film 422. Therefore, as compared with the case where the user removes the sealing film 422 by himself / herself, it is less likely that the ink 59 is spilled and wasted or the periphery of the printer 10 is soiled.
- the mounting mechanism 192 is formed of, for example, a resin material such as polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), polyacetal (POM), or polyethylene terephthalate (PET).
- the portion of the mounting mechanism 192 that comes into contact with the supply bottle 400 may be made of a highly slidable resin, for example, POM.
- the mounting mechanism 192 is provided on the upper portion of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H.
- the mounting mechanism 192 is provided above the ink tank 151.
- the ink 59 of the supply bottle 400 is moved to the ink tank 151 via the mounting mechanism 192 by the action of gravity.
- FIG. 10 is an enlarged vertical cross-sectional view of the vicinity of the mounting mechanism 192 of FIG.
- the mounting mechanism 192 includes an insertion portion 270, a holding mechanism 280, and a tank-side connecting portion 300.
- the insertion portion 270 is a portion that first comes into contact with the supply bottle 400.
- the tank-side connection portion 300 is provided in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400 with respect to the opening 271 of the insertion portion 270.
- the tank side connection portion 300 is a portion to which the supply bottle 400 is connected.
- the holding mechanism 280 is provided on the side and above the insertion portion 270.
- the holding mechanism 280 is a mechanism for holding the supply bottle 400 in a state of being connected to the tank side connecting portion 300.
- the holding mechanism 280 supports the supply bottle 400 so that the axis of the container body 410 is along the vertical direction.
- the holding mechanism 280 may support the supply bottle 400 so that the axis of the container body 410 is tilted from the vertical direction.
- the insertion portion 270 is a tubular member into which the supply bottle 400 is inserted.
- the insertion portion 270 is formed in a cylindrical shape and has a diameter slightly larger than that of the protrusion 214 of the supply bottle 400.
- the insertion portion 270 extends in the vertical direction.
- the insertion portion 270 has an opening 271 that opens upward, and is configured so that the supply bottle 400 can be inserted from above.
- the holding mechanism 280 includes an inlet portion 281 arranged above the insertion portion 270 and a lock mechanism 290 provided on the side of the insertion portion 270.
- the inlet 281 has a holding surface 281a that is inclined so as to correspond to the held surface 412a of the supply bottle 400.
- the holding surface 281a has an inclination that widens toward the rear side (upper side in FIG. 10) of the supply bottle 400 in the insertion direction.
- the holding surface 281a is formed on a conical surface.
- the holding surface 281a is adjacent to the opening 271 of the insertion portion 270.
- the holding surface 281a extends upward from the opening 271 and opens upward.
- the holding surface 281a is made of the same material as the held surface 412a of the supply bottle 400.
- the holding surface 281a is formed of a resin material. As a result, it is possible to prevent the held surface 412a from being worn or damaged as compared with the case where the holding surface 281a is made of a material (for example, a metal material) having a hardness significantly different from that of the held surface 412a. However, the material of the holding surface 281a does not have to be the same as the held surface 412a of the supply bottle 400.
- the lock mechanism 290 is a mechanism that regulates the movement of the supply bottle 400 in a state of being connected to the tank side connection portion 300 in the direction opposite to the insertion direction.
- the lock mechanism 290 also functions as a stopper portion. That is, the lock mechanism 290 is configured to stop the supply bottle 400 from falling so that the supply bottle 400 is not connected to the tank side connection portion 300 simply by inserting the supply bottle 400 into the insertion portion 270. In other words, the lock mechanism 290 prevents the supply bottle 400 from being connected to the tank side connection portion 300 only by its own weight.
- the bottle-side connection portion 420 at the tip of the supply bottle 400 is located above the tank-side connection portion 300.
- the lock mechanism 290 is provided on the rear side (upper side in FIG. 10) of the supply bottle 400 in the insertion direction with respect to the tank side connection portion 300. If the function as a stopper is not taken into consideration, the position of the lock mechanism 290 is not limited to the rear side of the tank side connection portion 300 in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400.
- the lock mechanism 290 includes a stopper 291, a first urging member 292, and an unlock switch 293.
- the stopper 291 is inserted into a side hole 274 opened in the inner peripheral surface 273 of the insertion portion 270.
- the stopper 291 extends in a substantially horizontal direction.
- the stopper 291 is configured to be movable in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270.
- the stopper 291 protrudes inward in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface 273 of the insertion portion 270 and comes into contact with the supply bottle 400 inserted into the insertion portion 270 (hereinafter, referred to as a lock position Pr).
- an unlock position Pu A position outside the insertion portion 270 in the radial direction of the lock position Pr and allowing the supply bottle 400 inserted into the insertion portion 270 to pass laterally (see FIG. 13, hereinafter referred to as an unlock position Pu). And, it is configured to be movable. In the following, the state in which the stopper 291 protrudes inward in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface 273 of the insertion portion 270 is locked, and the state in which the stopper 291 retracts to the outside in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface 273 of the insertion portion 270. Also called unlocked state.
- the first urging member 292 urges the stopper 291 so that the stopper 291 is held at the lock position Pr.
- the unlock position Pu may be a position where the entire stopper 291 is retracted to the outside in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface 273 of the insertion portion 270, and is radially outside the inner peripheral surface 273 of the insertion portion 270. It may be a position where a part of the stopper 291 protrudes inward.
- the stopper 291 includes a spring receiving surface 291a that receives the urging force of the first urging member 292.
- the spring receiving surface 291a extends in the vertical direction.
- the first urging member 292 is, here, a coil spring.
- the first urging member 292 is provided in a compressed state.
- the first urging member 292 is not limited to the coil spring, and may be a leaf spring or the like.
- the first urging member 292 extends in the horizontal direction.
- the first urging member 292 is compressed between the spring receiving surface 291a and the vertical surface 290a provided on the mounting mechanism 192 so as to face the spring receiving surface 291a. Therefore, the first urging member 292 presses the stopper 291 inward in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270.
- the portion of the stopper 291 that protrudes into the insertion portion 270 has a receiving portion 291b that comes into contact with the supply bottle 400 when the supply bottle 400 is inserted into the insertion portion 270 while the stopper 291 is in the locked state.
- the receiving portion 291b has an inclined surface 291b1 inclined from the outward side to the inward side in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270 along the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400.
- the inclined surface 291b1 faces upward.
- the first pressing portion 215a is one of the pressing portions of the supply bottle 400 that abuts on the receiving portion 291b of the stopper 291 and presses the receiving portion 291b downward.
- the first urging member 292 urges the stopper 291 so that when the receiving portion 291b receives a predetermined force in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400, the stopper 291 shifts to the unlocked state.
- the stopper 291 is held inside the unlock position Pu.
- the predetermined force is larger than the weight of the supply bottle 400 in which the ink 59 is contained.
- the predetermined force is preferably larger than the weight of the supply bottle 400 when the ink 59 having a capacity of half or more is contained, and is larger than the weight of the supply bottle 400 when the ink 59 is contained to the full capacity. Is more preferable.
- the stopper 291 retracts radially outward of the insertion portion 270 due to the weight of the supply bottle 400, it is still maintained at a position inside the unlock position Pu and abuts on the first pressing portion 415a.
- the unlock switch 293 is formed in a rod shape and extends in the vertical direction.
- the unlock switch 293 is configured to be pushable downward in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400, here.
- the lower surface 293a of the unlock switch 293 is inclined from the outer side to the inner side in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270 along the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400.
- the inclined lower surface 293a of the lock release switch 293 is supported from below by the protrusion 291c provided on the stopper 291.
- the protrusion 291c is formed in a substantially columnar shape extending in the left-right direction.
- the upper surface 293b of the lock release switch 293 protrudes upward from the portion of the mounting mechanism 192 near the lock release switch 293.
- the upper surface 293b of the unlock switch 293 is configured to be pressed by the user.
- the unlock switch 293 is arranged side by side with the insertion portion 270. In the present embodiment, the unlock switches 293 are arranged side by side in front of the insertion portion 270.
- FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the unlock switch 293 is pressed.
- the lock release switch 293 is pushed in while the stopper 291 is located at the lock position Pr, the protrusion 291c of the stopper 291 is moved outward in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270 by the inclined lower surface 293a of the lock release switch 293. Pushed towards. As a result, the stopper 291 retracts outward in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270.
- the unlock switch 293 is pushed in by a predetermined distance or more, the stopper 291 moves to the unlock position Pu.
- the lock release switch 293 and the protrusion 291c of the stopper 291 constitute an release mechanism for moving the stopper 291 to the unlock position Pu against the urging force of the first urging member 292.
- the release mechanism converts the force that pushes the lock release switch 293 in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400 into a force that moves the stopper 291 radially outward of the insertion portion 270. As a result, the release mechanism moves the stopper 291 to the unlock position Pu.
- the inclined lower surface 293a of the unlock switch 293 and the substantially cylindrical protrusion 291c of the stopper 291 exert a force to push the unlock switch 293 in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400, and the stopper 291 is inserted into the insertion portion 270. It constitutes a direction change part that converts the force to move outward in the radial direction of.
- the configuration of the release mechanism is not limited to such a mechanism.
- the insertion portion 270 includes a protrusion 275 protruding into the insertion portion 270.
- the protrusion 275 is provided near the upper end of the insertion portion 270.
- the vertical position of the protrusion 275 is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, it is above the protrusion 214 of the supply bottle 400 mounted on the mounting mechanism 192.
- the protrusion 275 is formed of, for example, elastic rubber.
- the protrusion 275 allows the supply bottle 400 to pass through when the supply bottle 400 is inserted into the insertion portion 270, and when the supply bottle 400 is connected to the tank side connection portion 300, the protrusion 275 is viewed in the insertion direction. It is configured to overlap a part of the supply bottle 400.
- the protrusion 275 is configured to overlap the protrusion 214 of the supply bottle 400 when viewed from above when the supply bottle 400 is connected to the tank side connection portion 300.
- the method of inserting the supply bottle 400 into the insertion portion 270 despite the presence of the protrusion 275 is not particularly limited, but for example, the supply bottle 400 may be inserted into the insertion portion 270 by deforming the elastic protrusion 275. Alternatively, the protrusion 275 may be avoided by moving the supply bottle 400 to the side opposite to the protrusion 275 and inserting it into the insertion portion 270. Alternatively, the protrusion 275 may be avoided by tilting the supply bottle 400 and inserting it into the insertion portion 270. In addition, two or more of the above methods may be used in combination. When the supply bottle 400 is moved directly upward from the state of being connected to the tank side connection portion 300, the protruding portion 214 of the supply bottle 400 collides with the protrusion 275 and receives resistance from the protrusion 275.
- the portion of the supply bottle 400 that overlaps the protrusion 275 in the plan view is the protrusion 214, but the portion of the supply bottle 400 that overlaps the protrusion 275 in the plan view may be anywhere.
- the tank side connection portion 300 is provided at the bottom portion 272 of the insertion portion 270.
- the tank-side connecting portion 300 includes an ink passage 301, a valve body 310, a valve body contact portion 302, and a second urging member 303.
- the ink passage 301 is a space below the valve body 310 and above the ink storage chamber 154.
- the ink passage 301 communicates with the ink storage chamber 154.
- the ink passage 301 connects the valve body 310 to which the supply bottle 400 is connected and the ink storage chamber 154.
- the ink passage 301 is a space between the ink storage chamber 154 and the valve body 310.
- the valve body 310 is provided between the insertion portion 270 and the ink passage 301.
- the valve body 310 includes a needle portion 311 as a connection end that is connected to the supply bottle 400 when the supply bottle 400 is inserted into the insertion portion 270.
- the valve body 310 is an example of an opening / closing mechanism that opens or closes between the needle portion 311 and the ink passage 301 in response to the supply bottle 400 being attached to or detached from the attachment mechanism 192.
- the valve body 310 includes a needle portion 311 and an inflow port 312 provided in the needle portion 311 and a lid opening 313, and an internal flow path 314 connecting the inflow port 312 and the lid opening 313. ing.
- the ink 59 moves from the insertion portion 270 to the ink passage 301 via the needle portion 311 of the valve body 310 and the internal flow path 314.
- the needle portion 311 includes a sharp tip portion 311a that penetrates the sealing film 222 of the supply bottle 400 in a state where the supply bottle 400 is mounted on the mounting mechanism 192.
- the tip portion 311a has a conical shape in which the diameter decreases upward.
- the needle portion 311 is configured to be able to break through the sealing film 222.
- a plurality of inflow ports 312 that open upward are formed in the needle portion 311.
- the internal flow path 314 extends downward from the inflow port 312.
- the internal flow path 314 penetrates the valve body 310 in the vertical direction.
- a lid opening 313 is opened at the lower end of the internal flow path 314.
- the valve body 310 includes a contact portion 315a that receives a force for inserting the supply bottle 400 when the supply bottle 400 is inserted into the insertion portion 270.
- the supply bottle 400 comes into direct contact with the contact portion 315a.
- the supply bottle 400 may indirectly contact the contact portion 315a via another member.
- the contact portion 315a is provided on a disk-shaped receiving plate 315 extending in the horizontal direction from the lower end of the needle portion 311.
- the contact portion 315a is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the receiving plate 315 and is inclined with respect to the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400.
- the contact portion 315a includes a receiving side tapered surface 315a1 that is inclined from the inner side to the outer side in the radial direction along the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400.
- the receiving side tapered surface 315a1 is provided on the outer side in the radial direction with respect to the tip portion 311a of the needle portion 311.
- the receiving side tapered surface 315a1 is configured to fit into the bottle side tapered surface 421a formed in the ink injection port 421 of the supply bottle 400.
- the valve body 310 moves downward when the supply bottle 400 is pushed into the insertion portion 270 and the bottle-side tapered surface 421a presses the receiving-side tapered surface 315a1.
- the valve body 310 is configured to be movable in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400 into the insertion portion 270 and in the opposite direction.
- the receiving side tapered surface 315a1 and the bottle side tapered surface 421a of the supply bottle 400 are inclined from the inner side to the outer side in the radial direction along the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400. However, it may be inclined from the outer side to the inner side in the radial direction along the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400.
- the receiving-side tapered surface 315a1 and the bottle-side tapered surface 421a of the supply bottle 400 may be inclined so as to correspond to the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400, and the orientation and angle thereof are not limited.
- FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the stopper 291 is engaged with the supply bottle 400.
- the engagement of the supply bottle 400 with the stopper 291 will be described later, but as shown in FIG. 12, the valve body 310 is configured to move downward with respect to the insertion portion 270 when pushed downward by the supply bottle 400.
- the lid portion 316 is separated from the lid opening portion 313 in the vertical direction.
- the upper portion of the valve body 310 on which the needle portion 311, the internal flow path 314, and the receiving plate 315 are formed and the lid portion 316 are connected by a connecting portion 317.
- the upper end of the connecting portion 317 is connected to the upper portion of the valve body 310, and the lower end is connected to the lid portion 316.
- the lid portion 316 is formed in a disk shape and extends in the horizontal direction from the lower end of the connecting portion 317.
- a valve body side seal portion 316a is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the lid portion 316.
- the valve body side seal portion 316a has an inclination from the inner side to the outer side in the radial direction along the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400.
- the mounting mechanism 192 includes a tank-side seal portion 302a1 having an inclination corresponding to the valve body-side seal portion 316a.
- the tank-side seal portion 302a1 is provided on a cylindrical valve body contact portion 302 extending downward from the bottom portion 272 of the insertion portion 270.
- the tank-side seal portion 302a1 is formed on the inner peripheral edge of the lower end 302a of the valve body contact portion 302. As shown in FIG.
- valve body side seal portion 316a and the tank side seal portion 302a1 are in contact with each other.
- the lid opening 313 and the ink passage 301 are closed by the contact between the valve body side seal portion 316a and the tank side seal portion 302a1.
- the insertion portion 270 and the ink passage 301 are closed by the valve body 310.
- the closure here may be a seal to prevent the passage of ink or air, or may be merely to prevent the passage of air or light.
- the valve body 310 is provided between the insertion portion 270 and the ink passage 301, and is a position for closing between the insertion portion 270 and the ink passage 301 (hereinafter referred to as a closing position Pc). It is configured to be movable between a position called (see FIG. 10) and a position (hereinafter referred to as an opening position Po, see FIG. 12) that opens between the insertion portion 270 and the ink passage 301. As shown in FIGS.
- the closed position Pc is the position of the valve body 310 which is the uppermost part of the movable range of the valve body 310 and in which the valve body side seal portion 316a and the tank side seal portion 302a1 come into contact with each other. ..
- the open position Po is below the closed position Pc, and is the position of the valve body 310 where the valve body side seal portion 316a and the tank side seal portion 302a1 are separated from each other.
- valve body 310 when the valve body 310 is located at the closed position Pc, the lid opening 313 is separated from the ink passage 301.
- the valve body side seal portion 316a is located between the lid opening 313 and the ink passage 301 when the valve body 310 is located at the closed position Pc. As a result, the valve body side seal portion 316a closes between the lid opening 313 and the ink passage 301.
- the second urging member 303 urges the valve body 310 so that the valve body 310 is held at the closed position Pc.
- the second urging member 303 is a coil spring here.
- the second urging member 303 is not limited to the coil spring, and may be, for example, a leaf spring or the like.
- the second urging member 303 is arranged in a compressed state between the lower surface 315b of the receiving plate 315 of the valve body 310 and the spring seat surface 302b provided on the valve body contact portion 302.
- the spring seat surface 302b is arranged below the lower surface 315b of the receiving plate 315 and extends in the horizontal direction.
- the second urging member 303 urges the valve body 310 so that when the contact portion 315a of the valve body 310 is pushed in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400 with a force equal to or greater than a predetermined force, the valve body 310 moves to the open position Po. doing.
- the valve body 310 moves to the open position Po when the contact portion 315a is pushed in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400 with a force equal to or greater than the predetermined force. Therefore, when the supply bottle 400 is mounted on the mounting mechanism 192, the ink storage chamber 154 and the inside of the supply bottle 400 communicate with each other.
- the spring seat surface 302b is provided with a bypass passage 304 penetrating in the vertical direction.
- the bypass passage 304 connects the insertion portion 270 and the ink passage 301.
- the bypass passage 304 is a passage that connects the insertion portion 270 and the ink passage 301 by a route different from the internal flow path 314 of the valve body 310.
- the valve body 310 closes between the bypass passage 304 and the ink passage 301 at the closing position Pc.
- the valve body 310 opens between the bypass passage 304 and the ink passage 301 at the opening position Po.
- the bypass passage 304 is also closed when the supply bottle 400 is not mounted on the mounting mechanism 192. Further, when the supply bottle 400 is mounted on the mounting mechanism 192, the bypass passage 304 is opened.
- the bypass passage 304 is arranged below the inflow port 312 of the valve body 310.
- the user In order to mount the supply bottle 400 on the mounting mechanism 192, the user first opens the replenishment port cover 191 and inserts the supply bottle 400 into the insertion portion 270. Specifically, the user inserts the supply bottle 400 into the insertion portion 270 while holding the supply bottle 400 so as to avoid collision between the protrusion 214 of the supply bottle 400 and the protrusion 275 of the insertion portion 270.
- the supply bottle 400 is once held in the state shown in FIG. That is, the supply bottle 400 is not connected to the tank side connection portion 300 simply by dropping the supply bottle 400 into the insertion portion 270. As a result, the unintended connection between the supply bottle 400 and the tank side connection portion 300 is suppressed.
- FIG. 11 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the valve body 310 and the ink injection port 421 of the supply bottle 400 are in contact with each other.
- FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the stopper 291 is engaged with the supply bottle 400 as described above.
- the tip portion 311a of the needle portion 311 of the valve body 310 comes into contact with the sealing film 222 of the supply bottle 400.
- the needle portion 311 breaks through the sealing film 222 of the supply bottle 400.
- the inflow port 312 formed in the needle portion 311 penetrates into the inside of the supply bottle 400, the ink 59 contained in the supply bottle 400 flows into the inflow port 312. In this process, a part of the ink 59 does not flow into the inflow port 312 and spills into the insertion portion 270.
- the valve body 310 when the needle portion 311 breaks through the sealing film 222 of the supply bottle 400, the valve body 310 is immobile due to the urging of the second urging member 303.
- the urging force of the second urging member 303 may be set to be smaller than the resistance when the needle portion 311 breaks through the sealing film 222 of the supply bottle 400, and therefore the valve body 310 is set downward at this time. You may move. In other words, at this time, the supply bottle 400 and the tank side connection portion 300 may communicate with each other.
- the inclined surface 291b1 of the stopper 291 abuts on the lower corner (front corner in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400) 214c of the protruding portion 214 of the supply bottle 400.
- the front corner 214c is a second pressing portion that comes into contact with the receiving portion 291b of the stopper 291 and presses the receiving portion 291b.
- the stopper 291 is pushed downward by the front corner 214c and moves outward in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270 due to the effect of the inclination of the inclined surface 291b1.
- the front corner 214c moves below the inclined surface 291b1, and the stopper 291 comes into contact with the side surface of the protrusion 214 of the supply bottle 400.
- the bottle-side tapered surface 421a of the supply bottle 400 is in contact with the receiving-side tapered surface 315a1 of the valve body 310. ..
- the force for pushing the supply bottle 400 downward is directly transmitted to the valve body 310.
- the valve body 310 moves downward.
- the valve body 310 moves from the closed position Pc to the open position Po, for example, as shown in FIG.
- the inside of the supply bottle 400 and the ink passage 301 communicate with each other.
- the ink 59 inside the supply bottle 400 moves to the ink passage 301.
- the supply bottle 400 When the supply bottle 400 is further pushed downward from the state shown in FIG. 11, the supply bottle 400 shifts to the locked state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 12, in the locked state, the protruding portion 214 is located in front of the stopper 291 in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400. In the locked state, the stopper 291 is in contact with the first stepped surface 214a formed between the protruding portion 214 and the second straight portion 213.
- the second straight portion 213 is adjacent to the protruding portion 214 on the rear side in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400, and is configured to be smaller in diameter in the radial direction than the protruding portion 214.
- a first stepped surface 214a facing upward is formed between the protruding portion 214 and the second straight portion 213.
- the stopper 291 restricts the supply bottle 400 from moving in the direction opposite to the insertion direction by abutting on the first stepped surface 214a as the engaging portion.
- the tank-side connecting portion 300 includes a needle portion 311 as a connection end that comes into contact with the supply bottle 400, and a second urging member 303 that urges the needle portion 311 in the direction opposite to the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400.
- the stopper 291 of the lock mechanism 290 protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface 273 of the insertion portion 270 due to the urging of the first urging member 292, and the supply It engages with the first stepped surface 214a as an engaging portion provided on the bottle 400, and restricts the supply bottle 400 from moving in the direction opposite to the insertion direction.
- the stopper 291 regulates the movement of the supply bottle 400 in the opposite direction of the insertion direction, and the second urging member 303 urges the supply bottle 400 in the opposite direction of the insertion direction, whereby a part of the supply bottle 400 is released. It is sandwiched from above and below by the stopper 291 and the valve body 310. As a result, the supply bottle 400 is fixed to the mounting mechanism 192.
- the holding surface 281a as a part of the holding mechanism 280 holds the held surface 412a formed on the tapered portion 212 of the supply bottle 400.
- the contact between the holding surface 281a inclined with respect to the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400 and the held surface 412a receives a force for the supply bottle 400 to rotate, and the fixed state of the supply bottle 400 is stabilized.
- the stopper 291 is provided only on the front side of the supply bottle 400. Therefore, due to the urging force of the second urging member 303, the supply bottle 400 tends to rotate in the urging direction of the second urging member 303 about the portion in contact with the stopper 291.
- the holding surface 281a and the held surface 412a receive this rotational force. However, a part of the rotational force may be received by the vertical plane of the inlet portion 281 of the holding mechanism 280. As a result, the supply bottle 400 can be stably supported in the insertion direction.
- a part of the supply bottle 400 is located outside the mounting mechanism 192.
- the user can easily attach / detach the supply bottle 400 by grasping the portion (here, the first straight portion 411) protruding outward from the mounting mechanism 192 of the supply bottle 400.
- the supply bottle 400 may be entirely housed inside the mounting mechanism 192 while being held by the holding mechanism 280.
- the mounting mechanism 192 may be provided with a sensor or the like for confirming that the supply bottle 400 has been mounted.
- the printer 10 may be configured to display a display prompting the removal of the supply bottle 400 after a predetermined time has elapsed after the supply bottle 400 is confirmed to be attached.
- the predetermined time is longer than the time required for all the ink 59 in the supply bottle 400 to move to the ink tank 151.
- the time required for all the ink 59 in the supply bottle 400 to move to the ink tank 151 is measured in advance.
- the lock release switch 293 When removing the supply bottle 400 from the mounting mechanism 192, the lock release switch 293 is pressed. As shown in FIG. 13, when the unlock switch 293 is pressed, the protrusion 291c of the stopper 291 is pushed outward in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270 by the inclined lower surface 293a of the unlock switch 293. .. As a result, the stopper 291 retracts outward in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270. When the unlock switch 293 is pushed in by a predetermined distance or more, the stopper 291 moves to the unlock position Pu. As a result, the supply bottle 400 is released from being fixed. According to the configuration of the unlock mechanism, the supply bottle 400 can be unlocked by a simple operation of pressing the unlock switch 293.
- the lock release switch 293 is arranged side by side with the insertion portion 270, and is configured to be able to be pushed in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400.
- the lock is released by pressing the unlock switch 293. Therefore, the user can intuitively understand how to release the lock.
- the supply bottle 400 When the lock is released, the supply bottle 400 receives the urging force of the second urging member 303 via the valve body 310. Therefore, when the lock is released, the supply bottle 400 receives the urging force of the second urging member 303 and is moved in the direction opposite to the insertion direction.
- the protrusion 275 of the insertion portion 270 is provided to limit the movement of the supply bottle 400. If the protrusion 275 is not provided, the supply bottle 400 moves too fast when the lock is released, for example, the ink 59 remaining in the supply bottle 400 scatters or the supply bottle 400 flies. There is a risk of chilling.
- the protrusion 275 is provided to avoid such a problem.
- the protrusion 275 is configured to overlap the protrusion 214 of the supply bottle 400 when viewed from above when the supply bottle 400 is connected to the tank side connection portion 300. Therefore, when the lock of the supply bottle 400 is released from the state of being connected to the tank side connection portion 300, the protruding portion 214 of the supply bottle 400 collides with the protrusion 275. As a result, the supply bottle 400 receives resistance from the protrusion 275. As a result, the speed at which the supply bottle 400 separates from the mounting mechanism 192 is reduced.
- the valve body 310 moves to the closed position Pc again. As a result, the communication with the ink tank 151 is released.
- the ink 59 is photocurable, it is preferably stored in a state where it is not irradiated with light. Further, in order to prevent drying, it is still preferable that the ink 59 is stored in a state where it does not come into contact with the outside air.
- the printer 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the valve body 310 closes between the ink passage 301 and the insertion portion 270 except when the supply bottle 400 is mounted on the mounting mechanism 192. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ink 59 contained in the ink tank 151 from being irradiated with light and being exposed to the outside air.
- FIG. 14 is a front view of the right side portion 19R in a state where the supply bottles 400a and 400b are attached to the ink supply devices 70G and 70H, respectively.
- FIG. 15 is a right side view of the printer 10 in a state where the supply bottles 400a and 400b are attached to the ink supply devices 70G and 70H, respectively.
- the printer 10 is configured so that ink 59 can be simultaneously added to a plurality of ink supply devices 70G and 70H from a plurality of supply bottles 400a and 400b.
- the supply bottles 400a and 400b have the same shape as the supply bottle 400 and contain ink 59 containing different coloring materials.
- an interval DL is secured between adjacent supply bottles 400a and 400b so that a standard user's finger can be inserted.
- the interval DL is typically not less than or equal to the diameter of the supply bottles 400a and 400b, and may be approximately 20 mm or more, for example 20 to 50 mm.
- the control device 80 includes a feed motor (not shown), a carriage motor 16a of the carriage 30, a piezoelectric element of the ink head 20, a motor 42 of the liquid feed pump 41, a vacuum pump 44 of the degassing device 43, and pressure. It is communicably connected to the regulating valve 46 and the sensor unit 164 of the ink amount detecting unit 160, and controls their operations.
- the hardware configuration of the control device 80 is not particularly limited.
- the control device 80 stores, for example, an interface (I / F) for receiving print data or the like, a central processing unit (CPU: central processing unit) for executing instructions of a control program, a program executed by the CPU, or the like. It may be provided with a CPU (read only memory) and a RAM (random access memory) used as a working area for deploying a program.
- the control device 80 includes a print control unit 81, a determination unit 82, and a notification unit 83.
- Each part of the control device 80 may be composed of software or hardware.
- Each part of the control device 80 may be realized by one or more processors, or may be incorporated in a circuit.
- the print control unit 81 is a control unit that executes a print operation based on print data.
- the print control unit 81 conveys the recording medium 5 in the front-rear direction (sub-scanning direction) by controlling the feed motor.
- the print control unit 81 controls the movement of the carriage 30 and the ink head 20 in the left-right direction (main scanning direction) by controlling the carriage motor 16a.
- the print control unit 81 controls the ejection of ink 59 from the nozzle 21 by controlling the piezoelectric element of the ink head 20.
- the print control unit 81 controls the motor 42 of the liquid feed pump 41 to adjust the flow and stop of the ink 59 in the ink flow path 40 and the liquid feed amount.
- the print control unit 81 degass the ink 59 by controlling the vacuum pump 44 of the degassing device 43. By controlling the opening and closing of the pressure adjusting valve 46, the print control unit 81 switches the communication state between the sixth flow path 40f and the seventh flow path 40g, and adjusts the pressures of the ink head 20 and the ink flow path 40. ..
- the determination unit 82 is a control unit that determines the amount of ink in the ink tank 151 based on the communication result of the ink amount detection unit 160 with the sensor unit 164.
- the determination unit 82 controls the light emitting unit of the first sensor S1 and the light emitting unit of the second sensor S2 to irradiate the light.
- the light receiving amount is input to the determination unit 82 from the light emitting unit of the first sensor S1 and the light receiving unit of the second sensor S2.
- the determination unit 82 detects that the sensor has switched from the UNHIT state to the HIT state when the light receiving amount changes to or less than a predetermined reference value for each of the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2.
- the reference value is stored in the determination unit 82 in advance.
- the notification unit 83 is a control unit that notifies the user of the determination result of the determination unit 82.
- the method of notifying the user is not particularly limited.
- the notification unit 83 may display the display unit 19D of the printer 10 with characters, illustrations, or the like to indicate that the ink is in the ink end state, and visually notify the user.
- the notification unit 83 may give a notification by voice such as a buzzer or an announcement, for example.
- the notification unit 83 may issue a warning or the like urging the user to replenish the ink 59.
- the printer 10 As described above, in the printer 10, at least a part of the space that has been a dead space in the past, for example, the space under the main body 12 and the space in front of the piping boxes 18L and 18R and on the side of the platen 14 A plurality of ink supply devices 70A to 70H are arranged in effective use. Therefore, it is possible to secure the installation space of the large-capacity ink tank 151 while saving the space of the printer 10. As a result, the dead space of the printer 10 can be reduced, the installation area of the printer 10 can be reduced, and the capacity of the ink tank 151 can be increased.
- the printer 10 at least a part (for example, all) of the lid opening (ink replenishment port) 313 is exposed from the casing (cover body) 19 in a plan view. Specifically, it is exposed from the main body 12. This allows the user to add ink 59 to the ink tank 151 without, for example, removing the ink tank 151 from the printer 10 or pulling it forward. Therefore, the ink 59 can be added even while the printer 10 is being used (for example, during printing).
- the lid opening (ink replenishment port) 313 is provided on the upper surface of the ink tank 151.
- the capacity of the ink 59 that can be stored in the ink storage chamber 154 can be increased, and the capacity of the ink tank 151 can be suitably increased.
- the ink tank 151 is located in front of the casing (cover body) 19 in a plan view. Specifically, it is located in front of the main body 12.
- the user can add ink 59 from the front of the printer 10 while checking, for example, the display unit 19D and the progress of printing.
- the entire lid opening (ink replenishment port) 313 is provided so as not to overlap the casing (cover body) 19 in a plan view. Specifically, it is provided so as not to overlap with the main body portion 12. This makes it possible to improve the workability of the user when refilling ink.
- the lid opening (ink replenishment port) 313 is provided in front of the center line CL in the front-rear direction of the ink tank 151. This makes it possible to improve the workability of the user when refilling ink.
- the lid opening (ink replenishment port) 313 is provided at a position equal to or higher than the waist height in the standing state of the user.
- the user can replenish the ink 59 without bending and bending his hips or bending his knees and crouching. Therefore, the workload at the time of replenishing the ink of the user can be reduced.
- the printer 10 of the present embodiment further includes a platen 14 that supports the recording medium, and an ink flow path 40 that has one end connected to the ink tank 151 and the other end connected to the ink head 20.
- At least a part of the casing (cover body) 19 is arranged on the side of the platen 14, and at least a part of the components constituting the ink flow path 40 (for example, the liquid feed pump 41, the motor 42, the degassing device 43, etc.)
- a piping box portion 18L, 18R for accommodating one or more of the vacuum pumps 44) is provided.
- the ink tank 151 is fixed to the piping box portions 18L and 18R. As a result, poor connection between the ink tank 151 and the ink flow path 40 is less likely to occur, as compared with the case where the ink tank 151 itself is detachable or movable, for example. Therefore, the ink 59 can be stably supplied to the ink head 20.
- the casing (cover body) 19 extends from the left side to the right side of the platen 14.
- the main body 12 extends from the left side to the right side of the platen 14.
- Ink tanks 151 are provided on the left side and the right side of the platen 14, respectively.
- a part of the component components (for example, the pressure adjusting valve 46) constituting the ink flow path 40 is a casing (cover) in front of the piping box portions 18L and 18R and in the vertical direction. It is provided between the body) 19 and the ink tank 151. Specifically, it is provided between the main body 12 and the ink tank 151. As a result, the dead space of the printer 10 can be effectively utilized.
- the ink flow path 40 includes a degassing device 43 for degassing ink, and at least a part of the degassing device 43 is provided inside the piping box portions 18L and 18R.
- the degassing device 43 includes, for example, a vacuum pump 44, and tends to be generally large in size. However, according to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the set area of the printer 10.
- the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 containing the replenishment ink 59 is connected to the insertion portion 270 into which the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 is detachably inserted and the lid opening (ink replenishment port) 313.
- the tank side connection part (connection part) 300 to which the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 inserted into the insertion part 270 is connected, and the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 are connected to the tank side connection part (connection part) 300.
- a holding mechanism 280 for holding in a state is further provided.
- the ink passage 301 connecting the tank side connection portion (connection portion) 300 and the lid opening (ink replenishment port) 313 and the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 can be attached or detached.
- a valve body (opening / closing mechanism) 310 that opens or closes between the tank-side connecting portion (connecting portion) 300 and the ink passage 301 is further provided.
- the holding mechanism 280 is arranged in front of the casing (cover body) 19. Specifically, it is arranged in front of the main body portion 12 and the piping box portions 18L and 18R. This makes it possible to improve the workability of the user when refilling ink.
- an operation panel (input unit) 19C for the user to input information related to printing is provided on the front surface of the casing (cover body) 19, specifically, the front surface of the main body unit 12, and is a holding mechanism.
- the 280 is arranged in front of the operation panel (input unit) 19C, and in a state where the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 is held by the holding mechanism 280, the upper end of the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 is the operation panel (replenishment container).
- Input unit) It is configured to be located below 19C in the vertical direction. As a result, the user can input information to the operation panel 19C even while the ink 59 is being added.
- a display unit 19D for displaying information related to printing is provided on the front surface of the casing (cover body) 19, specifically, the front surface of the main body unit 12, and the holding mechanism 280 is a display unit. It is arranged in front of the 19D, and when the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 is held by the holding mechanism 280, the upper end of the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 is located vertically below the display unit 19D. It is configured in. As a result, the user can check the display unit 19D even while the ink 59 is being added.
- the volume of the ink tank 151 is larger than the volume of the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400.
- the number of times the ink 59 is added during printing can be reduced.
- ink is less likely to run out.
- the workload of the user at the time of ink replenishment can be reduced.
- the printer 10 of the present embodiment there are a plurality of holding mechanisms 280, and the plurality of holding mechanisms 280 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and supply bottles (replenishment containers) 400 are held in each of the plurality of holding mechanisms 280.
- the interval DL into which the user's finger enters is secured between the adjacent supply bottles (replenishment containers) 400.
- the user can add ink 59 from the plurality of supply bottles 400 at the same time when the ink 59 is reduced at the same time in the adjacent ink supply devices 70E to 70H. Therefore, the ink 59 can be added efficiently.
- the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 includes a container main body 410 in which the ink 59 is stored and an ink injection port 421 formed at one end of the container main body 410, and is provided with an insertion portion 270.
- the holding mechanism 280 is a supply bottle (replenishment) with the ink injection port 421 facing downward in the vertical direction.
- Container is configured to hold 400.
- the ink 59 of the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 moves downward (on the side of the ink storage chamber 154) due to its own weight. Therefore, a device or mechanism for moving ink from the supply bottle to the ink tank becomes unnecessary.
- the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 includes a held surface 412a inclined so as to narrow in the insertion direction into the insertion portion 270, and the holding mechanism 280 corresponds to the held surface 412a.
- the holding surface 281a is provided so as to be inclined.
- the holding surface 281a and the held surface 412a are made of the same material, for example, a resin material.
- the holding surface 281a or the held surface 412a is worn by the other, as compared with the case where the holding surface 281a and the held surface 412a are made of materials having significantly different hardness (for example, a resin material and a metal material). It can be suppressed.
- the weight of the supply bottle 400 can be reduced.
- the insertion direction of the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 into the insertion portion 270 is the vertical direction
- the holding mechanism 280 inserts the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 so as to extend in the vertical direction. It is configured to hold.
- the user can easily mount the supply bottle 400 on the mounting mechanism 192 by grasping the portion (for example, the first straight portion 411) protruding upward from the holding mechanism 280 of the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400.
- the supply bottle 400 can be easily detached from the mounting mechanism 192.
- the holding mechanism 280 causes the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 in a state of being connected to the tank side connection portion (connection portion) 300 to move in the direction opposite to the insertion direction into the insertion portion 270. It is provided with a locking mechanism 290 to regulate. Thereby, the connection between the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 and the tank side connection portion 300 can be made more stable.
- the portions of the ink tank 151 and the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 in contact with the ink are both formed of a resin material.
- the ink 59 is a photocurable ink and the portion of the ink tank 151 and the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 in contact with the ink is made of metal, the photocurable ink and the metal may chemically react with each other. This may cure the photocurable ink.
- the portion of the ink tank 151 and the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 in contact with the ink is made of resin, the curing of the photocurable ink 59 can be suppressed.
- the ink tank 151 is a tank body (lower member) having an upper opening (opening) 152U and a flange portion 152E provided around the upper opening (opening) 152U. 152, a plate-shaped portion 153B arranged above the tank body (lower member) 152 and covering the upper opening (opening) 152U, and a flange portion 153E provided around the lid (plate-shaped portion) 153. It is provided with a lid body (upper member) having the above, and a flange connecting portion 158 for connecting the flange portion 152E of the tank body (lower member) 152 and the flange portion 153E of the lid body (upper member).
- the large-capacity ink tank 151 can be manufactured relatively easily and at low cost.
- the configuration can be simplified and the man-hours required for assembly can be reduced.
- the risk of ink leakage can be reduced, and the accuracy of detecting the amount of ink in the ink amount detecting unit 160 can be improved.
- the printer 10 of the present embodiment there are a plurality of ink tanks 151, and the plurality of ink tanks 151 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and the flange coupling portions 158 of the adjacent ink tanks 151 are displaced in the vertical direction. ing. As a result, the large-capacity ink tank 151 can be compactly arranged in the left-right direction.
- the flange coupling portions 158 of the adjacent ink tanks 151 are overlapped with each other in the overlapping width OL in the plan view.
- the large-capacity ink tank 151 can be compactly arranged in the left-right direction.
- the ink tank 151 is provided on the upper surface with an atmospheric communication portion 153A that communicates the inside of the ink tank 151 with the atmosphere, and at least a part of the atmospheric communication portion 153A is a casing (cover) in the vertical direction. It is arranged vertically below (here, directly below) the casing (cover body) 19 in a state where the air can flow between the body) 19 and the casing (cover body) 19. Specifically, it is arranged in a state where an interval at which the atmosphere can flow is secured between the main body portion 12 and the main body portion 12.
- the air communication unit 153A may be completely blocked or the resin film 153M may be damaged.
- the air communication part 153A By arranging at least a part of the air communication part 153A vertically below the casing (cover body) 19, specifically, the main body 12, it is possible to prevent the air communication part 153A from being unintentionally blocked. Can be done. Further, it is possible to prevent the resin film 153M from being damaged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ink 59 from volatilizing more than expected and causing a change in the physical properties of the ink 59 beyond the guarantee.
- the lid opening (ink refilling port) 313 is provided on the upper surface of the ink tank 151, and in a plan view, at least a part of the lid opening (ink refilling port) 313 is a casing. (Cover body) It is arranged so as not to overlap with 19. Specifically, it is provided so as not to overlap with the main body portion 12. As a result, the user can add ink 59 from the front side of the printer 10 when the ink 59 in the ink tank 151 is low.
- each of the plurality of ink tanks 151 has a front wall (tank inclined surface) 152C formed so as to incline downward from the front to the rear.
- the ink 59 replenished from the ink replenishing unit 190 easily moves in the ink storage chamber 154 along the front wall 152C, and foaming of the ink 59 is suppressed.
- the front wall of the ink tank 151 is vertical or is formed so as to be inclined forward, even if the user approaches the printer 10 when adding the ink 59, the user's foot is inked. It becomes difficult to hit the tank 151. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the user when refilling ink.
- the front end 14t of the platen 14 is located in front of all the front ends 70t of the plurality of ink tanks 151 in the side view.
- the recording medium 5 is guided by the platen 14 to the front of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H. Therefore, the user can easily pick up the recording medium 5 after printing is completed by inserting his / her hands into both side surfaces of the platen 14.
- the printer 10 according to this embodiment has been described above.
- the inkjet printer according to the present invention is not limited to this.
- the present invention can be carried out based on the contents disclosed in the present specification and common general technical knowledge in the art.
- the techniques described in the claims include various modifications and modifications of the embodiments illustrated above. For example, it is possible to replace a part of the above-described embodiment with another modification, and it is also possible to add another modification to the above-described embodiment. Further, the above-described embodiment and the following modified modes can be appropriately combined. Further, if the technical feature is not explained as essential, it can be deleted as appropriate.
- FIG. 16 is an enlarged perspective view of the right side portion of the inkjet printer 500.
- FIG. 17 is a part of the right side view of the inkjet printer 500.
- ink supply devices 70I to 70P are provided on the right side portion 19R of the casing 19.
- the specific configuration of the ink supply devices 70I to 70P may be the same as that of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H described above.
- 16 and 17 show a state in which the supply bottle 400 is attached to each of the eight ink supply devices 70I to 70P. Further, in FIG. 17, the ink replenishment portion 190 and the air communication portion 153A provided on the upper part of the lid body 153 are covered with the lid body cover 153C.
- eight ink supply devices 70I to 70P are arranged in two rows along the left-right direction.
- the eight ink supply devices 70I to 70P are arranged in a staggered manner in the front-rear direction. That is, the ink supply devices 70I to 70L are arranged in front of the ink supply devices 70M to 70P.
- the ink supply devices 70I to 70L on the front side are supported by the piping box portion 18R via an L-shaped support member 18M.
- the ink supply devices 70I to 70L on the front side are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction.
- the ink supply devices 70I to 70L on the front side are aligned in the vertical direction.
- the ink supply devices 70M to 70P on the rear side are directly supported by the piping box portion 18R.
- the ink supply devices 70M to 70P on the rear side are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction.
- the ink supply devices 70M to 70P on the rear side are aligned in the vertical direction.
- the ink supply devices 70I to 70L are examples of ink tanks located on the rear side, and the ink supply devices 70M to 70P are examples of the ink tanks located on the front side.
- the ink supply device 70L on the front side is arranged below the ink supply device 70P on the rear side.
- the front wall (tank inclined surface) 152C of the ink tank 151 of the ink supply device 70P on the rear side overlaps with the ink tank 151 of the ink supply device 70L on the front side. That is, the front wall 152C of the ink tank 151 of the ink supply device 70P on the rear side has a slope shape that gradually inclines downward from the front to the rear, similarly to the ink supply devices 70A to 70H described above. Therefore, there is a space portion that is a dead space in front of and below the front wall 152C.
- the ink supply device 70L on the front side is inserted by effectively utilizing the space portion of the ink supply device 70P on the rear side.
- the ink outflow pipe 152F of the ink supply device 70L on the front side is arranged above the ink outflow pipe 152F of the four ink supply devices 70P on the rear side.
- the position of the ink outflow tube 152F of the ink supply device 70L on the front side and the position of the ink outflow tube 152F of the ink supply device 70P on the rear side are deviated from each other.
- the piping and wiring of the ink flow paths 40 of the ink supply devices 70I to 70L on the front side can be satisfactorily routed to the piping box portion 18R side.
- the first flow path 40a can be passed through the inside of the support member 18M and extended to the inside of the piping box portion 18R.
- the ink replenishment unit 190 is provided with a mounting mechanism 192, and the supply bottle 400 is detachably configured.
- the ink replenishment unit 190 is a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and may be configured so that the user can pour ink 59 from the supply bottle 400.
- the ink replenishing unit 190 may not have, for example, a holding mechanism 280, and may be configured to hold the supply bottle 400 in a state where the user holds it in his / her hand.
- the ink replenishment unit 190 may not have, for example, the lock mechanism 290, and may be configured such that the supply bottle 400 starts the replenishment of the ink 59 only by its own weight.
- the ink tank 151 is composed of a tank body (lower member) 152 and a lid body (upper member) 153, and the entire tank body 152 is located above the entire lid body 153. It was. However, it is not limited to this.
- the ink tank 151 is, for example, provided with any of the following: (1) a member forming a part of the ink tank 151 is provided between the tank body 152 and the lid 153; (2) above the tank body 152, A member forming a part of the ink tank 151 is provided; (3) a member forming a part of the ink tank 151 is provided below the lid 153; (4) a step is formed at the lower end of the tank body 152. At the same time, a step is formed at the upper end of the lid 153, and a part of the lower end of the tank body 152 is located below a part of the upper end of the lid 153; May be good.
- the ink inlet 153I and the lid opening 313 overlap with the slope-shaped front wall 152C in a plan view.
- the ink inlet 153I and / or the lid opening 313 does not have to overlap the front wall 152C.
- the atmospheric communication portion 153A provided in the lid 153 is a labyrinth structure including a through hole 153H, a serpentine 153S, and a resin film 153M.
- the air communication unit 153A is composed of a conventionally known gas-liquid separator such as a mesh-shaped gas-liquid separator, a centrifugal separator, a surface tension separator, a gravity separator, and a corelesser. May be good.
- the pressure sensitive film 161 is arranged on the lower wall 152A of the tank body 152.
- the pressure-sensitive film 161 may be arranged in a lower portion of a side wall (horizontal wall) extending along the vertical direction of the tank body 152.
- a side opening may be formed on the side wall of the tank body 152, and the pressure sensitive film 161 may be attached to the tank body 152 so as to close the side opening.
- the urging member 163 may be attached to the pressure sensitive film 161 so as to be stretchable in the horizontal direction.
- the pressure sensitive film 161 is made of a flexible film. However, it is not limited to this.
- the pressure sensitive film 161 does not have to have flexibility.
- the pressure sensitive film 161 may be, for example, a rubber member.
- the pressure-sensitive film 161 may be, for example, an elastic member that can expand and contract in a direction approaching the ink storage chamber 154 and a direction away from the ink storage chamber 154.
- the telescopic member may have, for example, a fold-shaped cross-sectional shape and may be configured to be stretchable in an accordion shape.
- the urging member 163 was a coil spring. However, it is not limited to this.
- the urging member 163 is arranged below, for example, the member to be detected 162, is arranged at a position facing the first magnetic body having a predetermined magnetic pole and the first magnetic body, and is arranged at a position facing the first magnetic body. It is configured to include a second magnetic material having a magnetic pole that repels the pressure-sensitive film 161 and to urge the pressure-sensitive film 161 by a reaction force acting between the first magnetic material and the second magnetic material. You may be.
- the sensor unit 164 includes the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2.
- the number of sensors may be three or more.
- one sensor may be configured to be able to detect the states of a plurality of ink tanks 151.
- both the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 are transmissive photosensors.
- the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 may have different configurations from each other.
- the first sensor S1 and / or the second sensor S2 may be, for example, a reflective photo sensor, a non-contact type position sensor, a contact type switch, or the like. ..
- the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400 into the insertion portion 270 is downward.
- the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400 may be, for example, a horizontal direction or an oblique vertical direction.
- the ink tank 151 and the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 are both made of resin.
- the materials of the ink tank 151 and the supply bottle 400 can be appropriately selected, and are not limited to resin.
- the supply bottle 400 does not have to have a fixed shape, for example, when the printer 10 does not have the mounting mechanism 192.
- the refill container may have a bag shape such as an ink pouch.
- the sealing film 422 of the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 and the cap 430 face each other directly, and there is a gap between the sealing film 422 and the cap 430.
- the sealing film 422 and the cap 430 may indirectly face each other via other members. Further, there may not be a gap between the sealing film 422 and the cap 430.
- FIG. 18 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of the injection port 421 of the supply bottle 600.
- the supply bottle 600 includes a container body 410 in which the ink injection port 421 is formed and a sealing film 422 stretched so as to close the ink injection port 421, similarly to the supply bottle 400 described above. ,have.
- the supply bottle 600 further has a cap 630 attached to the front end 415 of the container body 410 and a protective member 640 arranged between the cap 630 and the sealing film 422.
- the cap 630 has a base 631 and a standing wall portion 632 that rises from the base.
- the protective member 640 is a member that protects the fragile sealing film 422.
- the protective member 640 is arranged between the inner surface of the base 631 and the sealing film 422.
- the protective member 640 is in contact with the base 631 and the sealing film 422.
- the sealing film 422 indirectly faces the cap 630 via the protective member 640.
- the protective member 640 is made of rubber, for example.
- the protective member 640 is, for example, an annular shape (for example, an annular shape).
- the protective member 640 is preferably arranged along the heat-welded welded portion W of the sealing film 422.
- the protective member 640 is preferably arranged so as to cover the peripheral edge of the welded portion W of the sealing film 422.
- the protective member 640 can function as a shock absorbing member that cushions the impact on the sealing film 422. That is, the supply bottle 600 may be accidentally dropped during market distribution (for example, during transportation) or during use.
- the sealing film 422 when the side of the cap 630 collides with the ground, the water hammer action of the contained ink 59 causes the ink 59 to be contained.
- the sealing film 422 is displaced downward in the vertical direction, and a large load is applied to the peripheral edge of the welded portion W.
- the welded portion W may be stretched or peeled off, the sealing film 422 may be damaged, and the ink 59 may leak out.
- the protective member 640 is arranged on the peripheral edge of the welded portion W of the sealing film 422, the protective member 640 can absorb the impact.
- the welded portion W of the sealing film 422 is less likely to be damaged, and the ink 59 can be prevented from leaking out.
- the protective member 640 is interposed between the sealing film 422 and the cap 630, it is possible to prevent the cap 630 from being pressed against the sealing film 422 with a strong force when the cap 630 is fastened. .. Further, even if the cap 630 has burrs or the like, it is possible to prevent the burrs or the like from coming into direct contact with the sealing film 422.
- the holding mechanism 280 includes an inclined holding surface 281a and a locking mechanism 290.
- the holding mechanism may be, for example, a mechanism for gripping the supply bottle.
- the holding mechanism does not have to be a part of the mounting mechanism, and a part or all of the holding mechanism may be provided outside the mounting mechanism.
- the holding surface 281a and the held surface 412a are formed as a conical surface and have a linear shape in a side view, but the present invention is not limited to this.
- the holding surface 281a and the held surface 412a may have a curved shape in the side view, or may have a step in the side view, for example.
- the carriage 30 is configured to move in the left-right direction
- the recording medium 5 is configured to move in the front-rear direction
- the present invention is not limited to this.
- the movement of the carriage 30 and the recording medium 5 is relative, and either of them may move in the left-right direction or the front-back direction.
- the recording medium 5 may be arranged immovably, and the carriage 30 may be configured to be movable in both the scanning direction and the front-rear direction.
- both the carriage 30 and the recording medium 5 may be configured to be movable in both directions.
- the configuration of the printer 10 is not particularly limited.
- the printer 10 may be, for example, a flatbed type printer.
- the printer 10 may include an irradiation device that irradiates ultraviolet rays, or may include a cutting head that cuts the recording medium 5.
Landscapes
- Ink Jet (AREA)
Abstract
This inkjet printer 10 comprises: an ink head; a cover body 19 which extends in the right/left direction and covers the ink head; an ink refill opening 313 used for refilling ink; an ink tank 151 that stores the ink to be supplied to the ink head. At least a part of the ink tank 151 is disposed below the cover body 19 in the vertical direction thereof, and at least a portion of the ink refill opening 313 is provided so as not to overlap with the cover body 19 in plan view.
Description
本発明は、インクジェットプリンタに関する。
なお、本出願は、2019年12月26日に出願された日本国特許出願2019-237201号に基づく優先権を主張しており、その出願の全内容は本明細書中に参照として組み入れられている。 The present invention relates to an inkjet printer.
This application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2019-237201 filed on December 26, 2019, and the entire contents of the application are incorporated herein by reference. There is.
なお、本出願は、2019年12月26日に出願された日本国特許出願2019-237201号に基づく優先権を主張しており、その出願の全内容は本明細書中に参照として組み入れられている。 The present invention relates to an inkjet printer.
This application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2019-237201 filed on December 26, 2019, and the entire contents of the application are incorporated herein by reference. There is.
従来から、記録媒体に向かってインクを吐出するインクヘッドと、インクヘッドに供給するインクを貯留するインクタンクと、を備え、インクジェット方式によって記録媒体上に所望の画像を印刷するインクジェットプリンタが知られている。
Conventionally, an inkjet printer including an ink head that ejects ink toward a recording medium and an ink tank that stores ink supplied to the ink head, and prints a desired image on the recording medium by an inkjet method has been known. ing.
また近年、A1やA0といった大判サイズの記録媒体に印刷を行う大型のプリンタも知られている。このようなプリンタでは、例えばフルカラーで写真調の画像を印刷する場合等に、一度に大量のインクを消費する。そのため、ユーザからは、インクタンクを大容量化して、インクの補充回数を低減することが要望されていた。これに関連して、例えば特許文献1には、インクヘッドを有するプリンタ本体と、容量2Lの大容量のインクタンクを有するインク貯留装置と、を備えたプリンタが開示されている。特許文献1のインクタンクは、所謂、継ぎ足し式であり、インクタンク内のインクを消費したときに、ユーザがインクを継ぎ足し可能なように構成されている。
In recent years, large printers that print on large format recording media such as A1 and A0 are also known. Such a printer consumes a large amount of ink at one time, for example, when printing a full-color photographic image. Therefore, users have requested that the capacity of the ink tank be increased to reduce the number of times the ink is replenished. In this regard, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses a printer including a printer main body having an ink head and an ink storage device having a large capacity ink tank having a capacity of 2 L. The ink tank of Patent Document 1 is a so-called replenishment type, and is configured so that a user can replenish ink when the ink in the ink tank is consumed.
特許文献1では、プリンタ本体とインク貯留装置とが別体で、プリンタ本体とインク貯留装置のインクタンクとがチューブ等で連結されている。このため、プリンタ全体としての外形寸法が大きくなり、設置に広いスペースが必要となる。したがって、いかにして大容量のインクタンクの設置スペースを確保しつつ、プリンタの省スペース化を実現するかが課題となっている。
In Patent Document 1, the printer main body and the ink storage device are separate bodies, and the printer main body and the ink tank of the ink storage device are connected by a tube or the like. Therefore, the external dimensions of the printer as a whole become large, and a large space is required for installation. Therefore, the issue is how to save the space of the printer while securing the installation space of the large-capacity ink tank.
本発明はかかる点に鑑みてなされたものであり、その目的は、インクタンクの大容量化とプリンタの省スペース化とを両立する新規なインクジェットプリンタを提供することである。
The present invention has been made in view of this point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a new inkjet printer that achieves both a large capacity of an ink tank and a space saving of a printer.
本願第1発明に係るインクジェットプリンタは、記録媒体に向かってインクを吐出するインクヘッドと、左右方向に延び、前記インクヘッドを覆うカバー体と、インクを補充するインク補充口を有し、前記インクヘッドに供給する前記インクを貯留するインクタンクと、を備える。前記インクタンクの少なくとも一部は、前記カバー体の鉛直方向下方に配置されており、平面視において、前記インク補充口の少なくとも一部は、前記カバー体と重ならないように設けられている。
The inkjet printer according to the first invention of the present application has an ink head for ejecting ink toward a recording medium, a cover body extending in the left-right direction to cover the ink head, and an ink replenishment port for replenishing the ink. An ink tank for storing the ink supplied to the head is provided. At least a part of the ink tank is arranged below the cover body in the vertical direction, and at least a part of the ink replenishment port is provided so as not to overlap the cover body in a plan view.
本願第2発明に係るインクジェットプリンタは、記録媒体を支持するプラテンと、前記記録媒体に向かってインクを吐出するインクヘッドと、左右方向に延び、前記インクヘッドを覆うカバー体と、前記カバー体の前方かつ前記プラテンの側方に設けられ、インクを補充するインク補充口を有し、前記インクヘッドに供給する前記インクを貯留する複数のインクタンクと、を備える。複数の前記インクタンクは、それぞれ平面視において長辺と短辺とを有する矩形状であり、前記短辺が前記左右方向に沿って配置されている。
The inkjet printer according to the second invention of the present application includes a platen that supports a recording medium, an ink head that ejects ink toward the recording medium, a cover body that extends in the left-right direction and covers the ink head, and the cover body. It is provided in front and on the side of the platen, has an ink replenishment port for replenishing ink, and includes a plurality of ink tanks for storing the ink to be supplied to the ink head. Each of the plurality of ink tanks has a rectangular shape having a long side and a short side in a plan view, and the short sides are arranged along the left-right direction.
本願第1発明に係るインクジェットプリンタでは、従来デッドスペースとなっていたカバー体の下側の空間の少なくとも一部を有効活用して、インクタンクが配置されている。また、本願第2発明に係るインクジェットプリンタでは、従来デッドスペースとなっていたカバー体の前方かつプラテンの側方の空間の少なくとも一部を有効活用して、複数のインクタンクが左右方向にコンパクトに配置されている。このため、本願第1発明および本願第2発明によれば、プリンタの省スペース化を図りつつ、大容量のインクタンクの設置スペースを好適に確保することができる。
In the inkjet printer according to the first invention of the present application, the ink tank is arranged by effectively utilizing at least a part of the space under the cover body, which has been a dead space in the past. Further, in the inkjet printer according to the second invention of the present application, a plurality of ink tanks can be made compact in the left-right direction by effectively utilizing at least a part of the space in front of the cover body and on the side of the platen, which has been a dead space in the past. Have been placed. Therefore, according to the first invention of the present application and the second invention of the present application, it is possible to suitably secure the installation space of the large-capacity ink tank while saving the space of the printer.
本発明によれば、インクタンクの大容量化とプリンタの省スペース化とを両立する新規なインクジェットプリンタを提供することができる。
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a new inkjet printer that achieves both a large capacity of an ink tank and a space saving of a printer.
以下、図面を参照しながら、一実施形態に係るインクジェットプリンタについて説明する。なお、ここで説明される実施形態は、当然ながら特に本発明を限定することを意図したものではない。また、同じ作用を奏する部材、部位には同じ符号を付し、重複する説明は適宜省略または簡略化する。また、本明細書において「インクジェットプリンタ」とは、従来公知のインクジェット技術による印刷方法、例えば、二値偏向方式あるいは連続偏向方式等の連続方式や、サーマル方式、あるいは圧電素子方式等の各種のオンデマンド方式を利用したプリンタ全般をいう。また、「プリンタ」とは、二次元の画像を印刷する、所謂、2Dプリンタと、三次元の造形物を造形する、所謂、3Dプリンタ(三次元造形装置)と、を包含する用語である。
Hereinafter, the inkjet printer according to the embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the embodiments described here are, of course, not intended to particularly limit the present invention. In addition, members and parts that perform the same action are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted or simplified as appropriate. Further, in the present specification, the "inkjet printer" refers to a printing method by a conventionally known inkjet technique, for example, a continuous method such as a binary deflection method or a continuous deflection method, a thermal method, a piezoelectric element method, or the like. Refers to all printers that use the demand method. Further, the term "printer" is a term that includes a so-called 2D printer that prints a two-dimensional image and a so-called 3D printer (three-dimensional modeling apparatus) that forms a three-dimensional modeled object.
図1は、インクジェットプリンタ(以下、プリンタという。)10の正面図である。図2は、プリンタ10の右側面図である。図3は、プリンタ10の主要部(具体的には、後述する本体部12)の内部構造を示す正面図である。なお、以下の説明において、左、右、上、下とは、プリンタ10の正面にいるユーザ(プリンタ10の使用者)から見た左、右、上、下をそれぞれ意味し、プリンタ10からユーザに近づく方を前方、遠ざかる方を後方とする。また、図面中の符号F、Rr、L、R、U、Dは、それぞれ、前、後、左、右、上、下を表すものとする。ただし、これらは説明の便宜上の方向に過ぎず、プリンタ10の設置態様を何ら限定するものではない。
FIG. 1 is a front view of an inkjet printer (hereinafter referred to as a printer) 10. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the printer 10. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the internal structure of the main part (specifically, the main body part 12 described later) of the printer 10. In the following description, left, right, top, and bottom mean left, right, top, and bottom as seen from the user (user of the printer 10) in front of the printer 10, respectively, and the user from the printer 10. The one that approaches is the front, and the one that moves away is the rear. Further, the symbols F, Rr, L, R, U, and D in the drawing represent front, back, left, right, top, and bottom, respectively. However, these are merely directions for convenience of explanation, and do not limit the installation mode of the printer 10.
プリンタ10は、2Dプリンタである。図1に示すように、プリンタ10は、記録媒体5に印刷を行う印刷装置である。プリンタ10は、所謂、Roll-to-Rollタイプである。プリンタ10は、大判サイズの記録媒体5に対して印刷を行う大型のプリンタである。記録媒体5は、本実施形態ではロール状の媒体である。記録媒体5には、普通紙やインクジェット用印刷紙等の紙類はもちろんのこと、例えば、ポリ塩化ビニル(polyvinyl chloride、PVC)やポリエステル等の樹脂材料、織布や不織布等の布帛、アルミニウム、鉄、木材、ガラス等の各種の材料からなる媒体が含まれる。
The printer 10 is a 2D printer. As shown in FIG. 1, the printer 10 is a printing device that prints on the recording medium 5. The printer 10 is a so-called Roll-to-Roll type. The printer 10 is a large-sized printer that prints on a large-format recording medium 5. The recording medium 5 is a roll-shaped medium in this embodiment. The recording medium 5 includes not only papers such as plain paper and printing paper for inkjet, but also resin materials such as polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and polyester, fabrics such as woven fabrics and non-woven fabrics, and aluminum. It includes media made of various materials such as iron, wood and glass.
図1に示すように、プリンタ10は、2つの脚部11と、脚部11に支持され、本体部12と配管ボックス部18L、18Rとを覆うケーシング19と、インクタンク151(図2参照)を備える複数のインク供給装置70A~70Hと、を備えている。脚部11は、典型的には床面に接触し、本体部12と配管ボックス部18L、18Rとを下方から支持している。脚部11は、本体部12よりも下方に配置されている。2つの脚部11は、左右方向に並んで配置されている。2つの脚部11は、後述するプラテン14を左右方向の両側から挟み込んでいる。脚部11の上下方向の長さ(高さ)は、標準的なユーザの立位状態における腰の高さから胸の高さの間であり、例えば70~110cm程度である。2つの脚部11は、それぞれ、第1脚部11Aと、第2脚部11Bと、を備えている。第1脚部11Aは、本体部12の下面に当接している。第1脚部11Aは、本体部12の下端から下方に向かって延びている。第1脚部11Aは、垂直に伸びている。図2に示すように、第2脚部11Bは、第1脚部11Aの下端から前後方向に延びている。第2脚部11Bは、本体部12の下面と平行に伸びている。
As shown in FIG. 1, the printer 10 has two legs 11, a casing 19 supported by the legs 11 and covering the main body 12 and the piping boxes 18L and 18R, and an ink tank 151 (see FIG. 2). 70A to 70H, and a plurality of ink supply devices 70A to 70H. The leg portion 11 typically contacts the floor surface and supports the main body portion 12 and the piping box portions 18L and 18R from below. The leg portion 11 is arranged below the main body portion 12. The two legs 11 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The two legs 11 sandwich the platen 14, which will be described later, from both sides in the left-right direction. The vertical length (height) of the leg portion 11 is between the waist height and the chest height in a standard user's standing position, and is, for example, about 70 to 110 cm. The two legs 11 each include a first leg 11A and a second leg 11B, respectively. The first leg portion 11A is in contact with the lower surface of the main body portion 12. The first leg portion 11A extends downward from the lower end of the main body portion 12. The first leg portion 11A extends vertically. As shown in FIG. 2, the second leg portion 11B extends in the front-rear direction from the lower end of the first leg portion 11A. The second leg portion 11B extends parallel to the lower surface of the main body portion 12.
図1、図2に示すように、本体部12は、脚部11よりも上方に配置されている。本体部12は、脚部11に支持されている。本体部12は、脚部11によって、床面から所定の高さに配置されている。本体部12は、左右方向に延びている。本体部12は、記録媒体5に印刷を行う印刷空間を構成している。詳しくは後述するが、図3に示すように、本体部12の内部には、ガイドレール13と、プラテン14の一部と、複数のインクヘッド20と、複数のダンパー22と、複数のインク流路40の一部と、制御装置80(図1参照)と、が配置されている。インク流路40の一部は、本体部12の外部に配置されている。インク供給装置70A~70Hは、本体部12の外部に配置されている。なお、本実施形態において、インクヘッド20と、ダンパー22と、インク流路40と、インク供給装置70A~70Hとは、各8つである。ただし、他の実施形態において、インクヘッド20と、ダンパー22と、インク流路40と、インク供給装置70A~70Hとは、必ずしも全て同数でなくてよい。
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the main body portion 12 is arranged above the leg portion 11. The main body 12 is supported by the legs 11. The main body portion 12 is arranged at a predetermined height from the floor surface by the leg portions 11. The main body 12 extends in the left-right direction. The main body 12 constitutes a printing space for printing on the recording medium 5. Although details will be described later, as shown in FIG. 3, inside the main body 12, a guide rail 13, a part of the platen 14, a plurality of ink heads 20, a plurality of dampers 22, and a plurality of ink flows A part of the road 40 and a control device 80 (see FIG. 1) are arranged. A part of the ink flow path 40 is arranged outside the main body 12. The ink supply devices 70A to 70H are arranged outside the main body 12. In this embodiment, the ink head 20, the damper 22, the ink flow path 40, and the ink supply devices 70A to 70H are each eight. However, in other embodiments, the ink head 20, the damper 22, the ink flow path 40, and the ink supply devices 70A to 70H do not necessarily have to be the same number.
図1、図2に示すように、配管ボックス部18L、18Rは、本体部12の下面に取り付けられている。配管ボックス部18L、18Rは、本体部12の下方に設けられている。配管ボックス部18L、18Rは、箱状である。配管ボックス部18L、18Rは、プラテン14の左側方および右側方に設けられている。配管ボックス部18L、18Rは、プラテン14を左右方向の両側から挟み込んでいる。これにより、プリンタ10のデッドスペースを減らして、プリンタ10の設置面積を小さくすることができる。図2に示すように、配管ボックス部18L、18Rの前後方向の長さは、本体部12よりも短い。平面視において、配管ボックス部18L、18Rは、本体部12と重なっている(図5参照)。側面視において、配管ボックス部18L、18Rの少なくとも一部は、プラテン14と重なっている。配管ボックス部18L、18Rの内部には、インク流路40の一部等が配置されている。インク供給装置70A~70Hは、配管ボックス部18L、18Rの外部に配置されている。
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the piping box portions 18L and 18R are attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 12. The piping box portions 18L and 18R are provided below the main body portion 12. The piping box portions 18L and 18R have a box shape. The piping box portions 18L and 18R are provided on the left side and the right side of the platen 14. The piping box portions 18L and 18R sandwich the platen 14 from both sides in the left-right direction. As a result, the dead space of the printer 10 can be reduced, and the installation area of the printer 10 can be reduced. As shown in FIG. 2, the lengths of the piping box portions 18L and 18R in the front-rear direction are shorter than those of the main body portion 12. In a plan view, the piping box portions 18L and 18R overlap with the main body portion 12 (see FIG. 5). In the side view, at least a part of the piping box portions 18L and 18R overlaps with the platen 14. A part of the ink flow path 40 and the like are arranged inside the piping box portions 18L and 18R. The ink supply devices 70A to 70H are arranged outside the piping box portions 18L and 18R.
ケーシング19は、本体部12と配管ボックス部18L、18Rとを覆うハウジングである。本実施形態において、ケーシング19は、ガイドレール13の全体を覆っている。ケーシング19は、プラテン14の少なくとも一部を覆っている。プラテン14の一部は、ケーシング19の外部に配置されている。ケーシング19は、本体部12と配管ボックス部18L、18Rとを区画している。なお、本実施形態では、インクヘッド20を覆う本体部12と、インク流路40の一部を収容する配管ボックス部18L、18Rとが、ケーシング19によって別々に区画されているが、本体部12と配管ボックス部18L、18Rとは、ケーシング19によって一体的に覆われていてもよい。ケーシング19は、カバー体の一例である。
The casing 19 is a housing that covers the main body portion 12 and the piping box portions 18L and 18R. In the present embodiment, the casing 19 covers the entire guide rail 13. The casing 19 covers at least a part of the platen 14. A part of the platen 14 is arranged outside the casing 19. The casing 19 separates the main body portion 12 and the piping box portions 18L and 18R. In the present embodiment, the main body portion 12 that covers the ink head 20 and the piping box portions 18L and 18R that accommodate a part of the ink flow path 40 are separately partitioned by the casing 19, but the main body portion 12 And the piping box portions 18L and 18R may be integrally covered by the casing 19. The casing 19 is an example of a cover body.
図1に示すように、ケーシング19は、左右方向において、左側部19Lと、中央部19Mと、右側部19Rと、の3つの領域に区画されている。右側部19Rには、操作パネル19Cが設けられている。操作パネル19Cは、ユーザが操作容易なように、ケーシング19の前面(詳しくは、本体部12の前面)に設けられている。図2に示すように、操作パネル19Cは、下側に行くほど前方に位置するように傾斜している。すなわち、操作パネル19Cは、前傾している。操作パネル19Cは、ユーザが印刷に関する情報を入力する入力部を兼ねている。図1に示すように、操作パネル19Cには、印刷に関する情報が表示される表示部19Dが設けられている。
As shown in FIG. 1, the casing 19 is divided into three regions in the left-right direction: a left side portion 19L, a central portion 19M, and a right side portion 19R. An operation panel 19C is provided on the right side portion 19R. The operation panel 19C is provided on the front surface of the casing 19 (specifically, the front surface of the main body 12) so that the user can easily operate the operation panel 19C. As shown in FIG. 2, the operation panel 19C is inclined so as to be positioned forward toward the lower side. That is, the operation panel 19C is tilted forward. The operation panel 19C also serves as an input unit for the user to input information related to printing. As shown in FIG. 1, the operation panel 19C is provided with a display unit 19D for displaying information related to printing.
次に、本体部12の構成について説明する。図3に示すように、ガイドレール13は、本体部12に設けられ、左右方向(主走査方向)に延びている。ガイドレール13は、左側部19Lから右側部19Rに亘って延びている。ガイドレール13には、キャリッジ30がスライド自在に係合している。キャリッジ30は、非印刷時には、右側部19Rのなかに予め定められた待機位置(図示せず)に配置される。キャリッジ30は、例えばインクヘッド20のメンテナンスを行う際等に、左側部19Lのなかに予め定められたメンテナンス位置(図示せず)に配置される。キャリッジ30には、インクヘッド20とダンパー22とが搭載されている。なお、キャリッジ30には、従来公知のインクジェットプリンタと同様に、例えば光照射装置(例えば紫外線ランプ)等の種々の装置や、種々の部材が、さらに搭載されていてもよい。キャリッジ30は、キャリッジ移動機構16によって左右方向に往復移動する。
Next, the configuration of the main body 12 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the guide rail 13 is provided on the main body portion 12 and extends in the left-right direction (main scanning direction). The guide rail 13 extends from the left side portion 19L to the right side portion 19R. The carriage 30 is slidably engaged with the guide rail 13. When non-printing, the carriage 30 is arranged in a predetermined standby position (not shown) in the right side portion 19R. The carriage 30 is arranged at a predetermined maintenance position (not shown) in the left side portion 19L, for example, when performing maintenance on the ink head 20. An ink head 20 and a damper 22 are mounted on the carriage 30. Similar to the conventionally known inkjet printer, the carriage 30 may be further equipped with various devices such as a light irradiation device (for example, an ultraviolet lamp) and various members. The carriage 30 reciprocates in the left-right direction by the carriage moving mechanism 16.
キャリッジ移動機構16は、キャリッジ30をガイドレール13に沿って左右方向に移動させる機構である。図3に示すように、キャリッジ移動機構16は、ガイドレール13の左端側および右端側に配置されたプーリ17bおよびプーリ17aを有している。プーリ17aには、キャリッジモータ16aが連結されている。キャリッジモータ16aは、制御装置80(図1参照)と電気的に接続されており、制御装置80によって制御される。プーリ17aおよびプーリ17bには、それぞれ無端状のベルト15が巻き掛けられている。キャリッジ30はベルト15に固定されている。キャリッジモータ16aが駆動すると、プーリ17aが回転してベルト15が走行する。これにより、キャリッジ30がガイドレール13に沿って左右方向に移動する。
The carriage moving mechanism 16 is a mechanism for moving the carriage 30 in the left-right direction along the guide rail 13. As shown in FIG. 3, the carriage moving mechanism 16 has a pulley 17b and a pulley 17a arranged on the left end side and the right end side of the guide rail 13. A carriage motor 16a is connected to the pulley 17a. The carriage motor 16a is electrically connected to the control device 80 (see FIG. 1) and is controlled by the control device 80. An endless belt 15 is wound around the pulley 17a and the pulley 17b, respectively. The carriage 30 is fixed to the belt 15. When the carriage motor 16a is driven, the pulley 17a rotates and the belt 15 travels. As a result, the carriage 30 moves in the left-right direction along the guide rail 13.
プラテン14は、印刷の際、記録媒体5を支持するものである。プラテン14には、印刷の際、記録媒体5が載置される。記録媒体5への印刷は、プラテン14上で行われる。図1に示すように、プラテン14は、本体部12に設けられ、左右方向に延びている。左右方向において、プラテン14は、2つの脚部11の間に設けられている。左右方向において、プラテン14は、配管ボックス部18L、18Rの間に設けられている。プラテン14は、インク供給装置70A~70Dとインク供給装置70E~70Hとの間に設けられている。図2に示すように、プラテン14は、前後方向にも延びている。前後方向において、プラテン14の前端14tは、第2脚部11Bの前端11tよりもケーシング19に近い側(図2の右側)に位置している。図3に示すように、プラテン14は、ガイドレール13よりも下方に配置されている。
The platen 14 supports the recording medium 5 at the time of printing. A recording medium 5 is placed on the platen 14 at the time of printing. Printing on the recording medium 5 is performed on the platen 14. As shown in FIG. 1, the platen 14 is provided on the main body portion 12 and extends in the left-right direction. In the left-right direction, the platen 14 is provided between the two legs 11. In the left-right direction, the platen 14 is provided between the piping box portions 18L and 18R. The platen 14 is provided between the ink supply devices 70A to 70D and the ink supply devices 70E to 70H. As shown in FIG. 2, the platen 14 also extends in the front-rear direction. In the front-rear direction, the front end 14t of the platen 14 is located closer to the casing 19 (right side in FIG. 2) than the front end 11t of the second leg portion 11B. As shown in FIG. 3, the platen 14 is arranged below the guide rail 13.
プラテン14には、上下一対のグリットローラ(図示せず)およびピンチローラ(図示せず)が設けられている。グリットローラはフィードモータ(図示せず)に連結されている。グリットローラはフィードモータによって回転駆動される。記録媒体5がグリットローラとピンチローラとの間に挟まれた状態でグリットローラが回転すると、記録媒体5は前後方向(副走査方向)に搬送される。
The platen 14 is provided with a pair of upper and lower grit rollers (not shown) and pinch rollers (not shown). The grit roller is connected to a feed motor (not shown). The grit roller is rotationally driven by a feed motor. When the grit roller rotates while the recording medium 5 is sandwiched between the grit roller and the pinch roller, the recording medium 5 is conveyed in the front-rear direction (secondary scanning direction).
インクヘッド20は、記録媒体5に向かってインク59(図4参照)の液滴を吐出するものである。図3に示すように、インクヘッド20は、プラテン14よりも上方に配置されている。インクヘッド20は、キャリッジ30に搭載されている。複数のインクヘッド20は、左右方向に並んでいる。インクヘッド20は、キャリッジ30を介してガイドレール13にスライド自在に係合している。なお、インクヘッド20の個数は、本実施形態ではインク供給装置70A~70Hの個数と同じ(8つ)である。ただし、インクヘッド20の個数は、インク供給装置70A~70Hの個数と同じでなくてもよい。
The ink head 20 ejects a droplet of ink 59 (see FIG. 4) toward the recording medium 5. As shown in FIG. 3, the ink head 20 is arranged above the platen 14. The ink head 20 is mounted on the carriage 30. The plurality of ink heads 20 are arranged in the left-right direction. The ink head 20 is slidably engaged with the guide rail 13 via the carriage 30. In this embodiment, the number of ink heads 20 is the same as the number of ink supply devices 70A to 70H (8). However, the number of ink heads 20 does not have to be the same as the number of ink supply devices 70A to 70H.
インクヘッド20の下面20a(図4参照)は、プラテン14と対向している。インクヘッド20の下面20aには、インク59を吐出するノズル21(図4参照)が形成されている。また、インクヘッド20の内部には、圧電素子等からなるアクチュエータ(図示せず)が設けられている。このアクチュエータが駆動することにより、インクヘッド20のノズル21からインク59が吐出される。
The lower surface 20a (see FIG. 4) of the ink head 20 faces the platen 14. A nozzle 21 (see FIG. 4) for ejecting ink 59 is formed on the lower surface 20a of the ink head 20. Further, inside the ink head 20, an actuator (not shown) made of a piezoelectric element or the like is provided. By driving this actuator, the ink 59 is ejected from the nozzle 21 of the ink head 20.
図4は、インク流路40を示すブロック図である。複数(ここでは8つ)のインク流路40は、インク供給装置70A~70Hのインクタンク151と、複数のインクヘッド20と、をそれぞれ連結するインク59の経路である。インクタンク151のインク59は、インク流路40を通じてそれぞれインクヘッド20に供給される。また、本実施形態のインク流路40は、インクタンク151を含めてインク59が循環可能なように構成されている。このため、インクタンク151からインク流路40へ流れたインク59の一部は、再びインクタンク151へと還流する。
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an ink flow path 40. The plurality of (here, eight) ink flow paths 40 are the paths of the ink 59 that connect the ink tanks 151 of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H and the plurality of ink heads 20, respectively. The ink 59 of the ink tank 151 is supplied to the ink head 20 through the ink flow path 40, respectively. Further, the ink flow path 40 of the present embodiment is configured so that the ink 59 can be circulated including the ink tank 151. Therefore, a part of the ink 59 that has flowed from the ink tank 151 to the ink flow path 40 returns to the ink tank 151 again.
インク59は、従来から使用されているものと同じでよく、特に制限はない。インク59は、ソルベント系の顔料インク、水性顔料インク、水性染料インク等であってもよい。インク59は、例えば、光重合性モノマーと光重合開始剤系とを含み、光照射によって硬化する性質を有する光硬化性インク(例えば紫外線硬化型のUVインク)であってもよい。本実施形態において、8つのインク供給装置70A~70Hのインクタンク151には、それぞれ異なる色材を含んだインク、例えば、シアンインク、マゼンタインク、イエローインク、ブラックインク、ライトシアンインク、ライトマゼンタインク、ライトブラックインク、ホワイトインク、が貯留されている。ただし、インク59の種類(色材、性状、用途等)は何ら限定されない。
The ink 59 may be the same as that conventionally used, and there is no particular limitation. The ink 59 may be a solvent-based pigment ink, a water-based pigment ink, a water-based dye ink, or the like. The ink 59 may be, for example, a photocurable ink containing a photopolymerizable monomer and a photopolymerization initiator system and having a property of being cured by light irradiation (for example, an ultraviolet curable UV ink). In the present embodiment, the ink tanks 151 of the eight ink supply devices 70A to 70H are filled with inks containing different color materials, for example, cyan ink, magenta ink, yellow ink, black ink, light cyan ink, and light magenta ink. Light black ink and white ink are stored. However, the type of ink 59 (coloring material, properties, use, etc.) is not limited at all.
インク流路40は、柔軟性や可撓性を有し、弾性変形可能なように構成されている。特に限定されるものではないが、インク流路40は、例えば可撓性のチューブによって構成されている。8つのインク流路40のうち4つは、インク供給装置70A~70Dのインクタンク151から、配管ボックス部18Lの内部と、本体部12の内部と、に亘って延びている。残りの4つは、インク供給装置70E~70Hのインクタンク151から、配管ボックス部18Rの内部と、本体部12の内部と、に亘って延びている。図1に示すように、本体部12の内部では、キャリッジ30が左右方向に移動してもインク流路40が破損しないように、大部分(少なくとも全長の半分以上)が左右方向に延びた状態で配置されている。インク流路40は、ケーブル類保護案内装置32で覆われている。
The ink flow path 40 has flexibility and flexibility, and is configured to be elastically deformable. Although not particularly limited, the ink flow path 40 is composed of, for example, a flexible tube. Four of the eight ink flow paths 40 extend from the ink tanks 151 of the ink supply devices 70A to 70D to the inside of the piping box portion 18L and the inside of the main body portion 12. The remaining four extend from the ink tanks 151 of the ink supply devices 70E to 70H to the inside of the piping box portion 18R and the inside of the main body portion 12. As shown in FIG. 1, a state in which most of the inside of the main body 12 (at least half of the total length) extends in the left-right direction so that the ink flow path 40 is not damaged even if the carriage 30 moves in the left-right direction. It is arranged in. The ink flow path 40 is covered with a cable protection guide device 32.
図4に示すように、インク流路40は、第1流路40aと、第2流路40bと、第3流路40cと、第4流路40dと、第5流路40eと、第6流路40fと、第7流路40gと、を備えている。本実施形態において、インクタンク151からインクヘッド20までのインク流路40の途中には、送液ポンプ41と、脱気装置43と、分岐部材45と、ダンパー22と、圧力調整弁46と、が設けられている。なお、インク流路40の途中には、従来公知のインクジェットプリンタと同様に、必要に応じて、さらに種々の装置や部材が設けられていてもよい。インク流路40には、例えば、インク59を濾過する濾過装置等が設けられていてもよい。
As shown in FIG. 4, the ink flow paths 40 include a first flow path 40a, a second flow path 40b, a third flow path 40c, a fourth flow path 40d, a fifth flow path 40e, and a sixth flow path. A flow path 40f and a seventh flow path 40g are provided. In the present embodiment, in the middle of the ink flow path 40 from the ink tank 151 to the ink head 20, a liquid feed pump 41, a degassing device 43, a branch member 45, a damper 22, a pressure adjusting valve 46, and so on. Is provided. As in the case of a conventionally known inkjet printer, various devices and members may be further provided in the middle of the ink flow path 40, if necessary. The ink flow path 40 may be provided with, for example, a filtration device for filtering the ink 59.
第1流路40aの上流端は、インクタンク151のインク流出口152O(図8も参照)に接続されている。第1流路40aの下流端は、送液ポンプ41に接続されている。第2流路40bの上流端は、送液ポンプ41に接続されている。第2流路40bの下流端は、脱気装置43に接続されている。第3流路40cの上流端は、脱気装置43に接続されている。第2流路40bの下流端は、分岐部材45に接続されている。第4流路40dの上流端は、分岐部材45に接続されている。第4流路40dの下流端は、ダンパー22に接続されている。第5流路40eの上流端は、ダンパー22に接続されている。第5流路40eの下流端は、インクヘッド20に接続されている。第6流路40fの上流端は、分岐部材45に接続されている。第6流路40fの下流端は、圧力調整弁46に接続されている。第7流路40gの上流端は、圧力調整弁46に接続されている。第7流路40gの下流端は、インクタンク151のインク流入口153I(図8も参照)に接続されている。
The upstream end of the first flow path 40a is connected to the ink outlet 152O (see also FIG. 8) of the ink tank 151. The downstream end of the first flow path 40a is connected to the liquid feed pump 41. The upstream end of the second flow path 40b is connected to the liquid feed pump 41. The downstream end of the second flow path 40b is connected to the degassing device 43. The upstream end of the third flow path 40c is connected to the degassing device 43. The downstream end of the second flow path 40b is connected to the branch member 45. The upstream end of the fourth flow path 40d is connected to the branch member 45. The downstream end of the fourth flow path 40d is connected to the damper 22. The upstream end of the fifth flow path 40e is connected to the damper 22. The downstream end of the fifth flow path 40e is connected to the ink head 20. The upstream end of the sixth flow path 40f is connected to the branch member 45. The downstream end of the sixth flow path 40f is connected to the pressure regulating valve 46. The upstream end of the seventh flow path 40 g is connected to the pressure regulating valve 46. The downstream end of the seventh flow path 40g is connected to the ink inlet 153I (see also FIG. 8) of the ink tank 151.
第1流路40aと、第2流路40bと、第3流路40cと、第4流路40dと、第5流路40eとは、印刷時やインクヘッド20のクリーニング時等に、インクタンク151内のインク59をインクヘッド20へ送液するインク供給流路を構成している。第6流路40fと、第7流路40gとは、インクタンク151内のインク59を循環させるインク還流流路を構成している。第1流路40aと、第2流路40bと、第3流路40cと、第6流路40fと、第7流路40gとは、インクタンク151内のインク59を循環させるインク循環流路を構成している。
The first flow path 40a, the second flow path 40b, the third flow path 40c, the fourth flow path 40d, and the fifth flow path 40e are used in the ink tank during printing, cleaning of the ink head 20, and the like. It constitutes an ink supply flow path for sending the ink 59 in 151 to the ink head 20. The sixth flow path 40f and the seventh flow path 40g form an ink recirculation flow path for circulating the ink 59 in the ink tank 151. The first flow path 40a, the second flow path 40b, the third flow path 40c, the sixth flow path 40f, and the seventh flow path 40g are ink circulation flow paths that circulate the ink 59 in the ink tank 151. Consists of.
送液ポンプ41は、インクタンク151のインク59をインクヘッド20に送る送液装置である。送液ポンプ41は、特に限定されないが、例えばダイヤフラムポンプ、チューブポンプ、シリンジポンプ等である。本実施形態において、送液ポンプ41は、各インク流路40に1つ設けられている。図2に示すように、送液ポンプ41は、配管ボックス部18L、18Rの内部に配置されている。送液ポンプ41は、モータ42に接続されている。モータ42は、配管ボックス部18L、18Rの内部に配置されている。モータ42は、制御装置80(図1参照)と電気的に接続されており、制御装置80によって制御される。
The liquid feed pump 41 is a liquid feed device that sends the ink 59 of the ink tank 151 to the ink head 20. The liquid feed pump 41 is not particularly limited, and is, for example, a diaphragm pump, a tube pump, a syringe pump, or the like. In this embodiment, one liquid feed pump 41 is provided in each ink flow path 40. As shown in FIG. 2, the liquid feed pump 41 is arranged inside the piping box portions 18L and 18R. The liquid feed pump 41 is connected to the motor 42. The motor 42 is arranged inside the piping box portions 18L and 18R. The motor 42 is electrically connected to the control device 80 (see FIG. 1) and is controlled by the control device 80.
脱気装置43は、インク59中に溶存する空気やインク59に混入した気泡を除去する装置である。本実施形態において、脱気装置43は、各インク流路40に1つ設けられている。図2に示すように、脱気装置43は、配管ボックス部18L、18Rの内部にそれぞれ配置されている。脱気装置43は、真空ポンプ44に接続されている。本実施形態において、真空ポンプ44は、配管ボックス部18L、18Rの内部に1つずつ配置されている。1つの真空ポンプ44は、4つの脱気装置43にそれぞれ接続されている。真空ポンプ44は、制御装置80(図1参照)と電気的に接続されており、制御装置80によって制御される。
The degassing device 43 is a device that removes air dissolved in the ink 59 and air bubbles mixed in the ink 59. In this embodiment, one degassing device 43 is provided in each ink flow path 40. As shown in FIG. 2, the degassing device 43 is arranged inside the piping box portions 18L and 18R, respectively. The degassing device 43 is connected to the vacuum pump 44. In the present embodiment, the vacuum pumps 44 are arranged one by one inside the piping box portions 18L and 18R. One vacuum pump 44 is connected to each of the four degassing devices 43. The vacuum pump 44 is electrically connected to the control device 80 (see FIG. 1) and is controlled by the control device 80.
ダンパー22は、インクヘッド20の真上に設けられている。ダンパー22は、印刷時にインク59の圧力変動を緩和して、インクヘッド20のノズル21からのインク59の吐出動作を安定させるものである。ダンパー22は、インクヘッド20と共に、キャリッジ30に搭載されている。なお、ダンパー35は必須ではなく、他の実施形態において省略することもできる。
The damper 22 is provided directly above the ink head 20. The damper 22 relaxes the pressure fluctuation of the ink 59 during printing and stabilizes the ejection operation of the ink 59 from the nozzle 21 of the ink head 20. The damper 22 is mounted on the carriage 30 together with the ink head 20. The damper 35 is not essential and may be omitted in other embodiments.
圧力調整弁46は、インクヘッド20およびインク流路40の圧力を調整する弁体である。圧力調整弁46は、インク流路40の第6流路40fと第7流路40gとの間を閉鎖する弁体である。圧力調整弁46を開閉することで、インクヘッド20およびインク流路40に掛かる圧力を調整することができる。圧力調整弁46は、ここでは減圧弁(リリーフバルブ)である。本実施形態において、圧力調整弁46は、各インク流路40に1つ設けられている。圧力調整弁46は、制御装置80(図1参照)と電気的に接続されており、制御装置80によって制御される。
The pressure adjusting valve 46 is a valve body that adjusts the pressure of the ink head 20 and the ink flow path 40. The pressure adjusting valve 46 is a valve body that closes between the sixth flow path 40f and the seventh flow path 40g of the ink flow path 40. By opening and closing the pressure adjusting valve 46, the pressure applied to the ink head 20 and the ink flow path 40 can be adjusted. The pressure regulating valve 46 is a pressure reducing valve (relief valve) here. In this embodiment, one pressure regulating valve 46 is provided in each ink flow path 40. The pressure regulating valve 46 is electrically connected to the control device 80 (see FIG. 1) and is controlled by the control device 80.
本実施形態において、圧力調整弁46は、ケーシング19の外部に配置されている。詳しくは、図2に示すように、圧力調整弁46は、インク供給装置70A~70Hの外表面に取り付けられている。詳しくは、圧力調整弁46は、後述するインク補充部190の後面に取り付けられている。前後方向において、圧力調整弁46は、配管ボックス部18L、18Rよりも前方に配置されている。圧力調整弁46は、送液ポンプ41および脱気装置43よりも前方に配置されている。圧力調整弁46は、ケーシング19よりも前方に配置されている。圧力調整弁46は、インク補充部190よりもケーシング19に近い側(図2の右側)に配置されている。圧力調整弁46は、プラテン14の前端14tよりもケーシング19に近い側(図2の右側)に配置されている。
In the present embodiment, the pressure regulating valve 46 is arranged outside the casing 19. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, the pressure regulating valve 46 is attached to the outer surface of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H. Specifically, the pressure adjusting valve 46 is attached to the rear surface of the ink replenishing unit 190, which will be described later. In the front-rear direction, the pressure adjusting valve 46 is arranged in front of the piping box portions 18L and 18R. The pressure regulating valve 46 is arranged in front of the liquid feeding pump 41 and the degassing device 43. The pressure regulating valve 46 is arranged in front of the casing 19. The pressure adjusting valve 46 is arranged on the side closer to the casing 19 (on the right side in FIG. 2) than the ink replenishing unit 190. The pressure regulating valve 46 is arranged on the side closer to the casing 19 (on the right side in FIG. 2) than the front end 14t of the platen 14.
上下方向において、圧力調整弁46は、本体部12よりも下方に配置されている。圧力調整弁46は、インクヘッド20の下面20aよりも下方に配置されている。圧力調整弁46は、インクタンク151よりも上方に配置されている。上下方向において、圧力調整弁46は、本体部12とインクタンク151との間に配置されている。平面視において、圧力調整弁46の少なくとも一部は、本体部12と重なっている。これにより、プリンタ10のデッドスペースを有効に活用することができる。圧力調整弁46の少なくとも一部は、送液ポンプ41の上端よりも上方に配置されている。圧力調整弁46の少なくとも一部は、脱気装置43の上端よりも上方に配置されている。
In the vertical direction, the pressure adjusting valve 46 is arranged below the main body 12. The pressure regulating valve 46 is arranged below the lower surface 20a of the ink head 20. The pressure regulating valve 46 is arranged above the ink tank 151. In the vertical direction, the pressure adjusting valve 46 is arranged between the main body 12 and the ink tank 151. In plan view, at least a part of the pressure adjusting valve 46 overlaps with the main body portion 12. As a result, the dead space of the printer 10 can be effectively utilized. At least a part of the pressure regulating valve 46 is arranged above the upper end of the liquid feed pump 41. At least a part of the pressure regulating valve 46 is arranged above the upper end of the deaerator 43.
非印刷時等にインク59を循環させる際は、例えば圧力調整弁46を開状態とし、第6流路40fと第7流路40gとの間を開放する。この状態で、送液ポンプ41を駆動することにより、インクタンク151内のインク59が、インク循環流路を流れて、インクタンク151に戻される。これにより、インクタンク151内のインク59を撹拌することができ、例えば沈降しがちな顔料等を好適に分散することができる。したがって、インクタンク151に貯留されているインク59を均質な状態に維持することができる。また、インク循環流路には脱気装置43が設けられているので、インク59を循環させることでインク59の脱気レベルを向上することができる。
When the ink 59 is circulated during non-printing or the like, for example, the pressure adjusting valve 46 is opened to open the space between the 6th flow path 40f and the 7th flow path 40g. By driving the liquid feed pump 41 in this state, the ink 59 in the ink tank 151 flows through the ink circulation flow path and is returned to the ink tank 151. As a result, the ink 59 in the ink tank 151 can be agitated, and for example, pigments and the like that tend to settle can be preferably dispersed. Therefore, the ink 59 stored in the ink tank 151 can be maintained in a homogeneous state. Further, since the degassing device 43 is provided in the ink circulation flow path, the degassing level of the ink 59 can be improved by circulating the ink 59.
印刷時にインク59を循環させる際は、例えば圧力調整弁46を開状態として、送液ポンプ41を駆動し、送液ポンプ41の送液量をインクヘッド20で必要な量よりも多くする。これにより、印刷時にも継続してインク59を撹拌することができる。また、インクヘッド20のクリーニングを行う際等は、例えば圧力調整弁46を閉状態とし、第6流路40fと第7流路40gとの間を閉鎖する。この状態で、送液ポンプ41を駆動することにより、インクタンク151内のインク59が、インク供給流路に集中し、インクヘッド20に集中的にインク59が供給される。
When the ink 59 is circulated during printing, for example, the pressure adjusting valve 46 is opened, the liquid feeding pump 41 is driven, and the liquid feeding amount of the liquid feeding pump 41 is made larger than the amount required by the ink head 20. As a result, the ink 59 can be continuously agitated even during printing. Further, when cleaning the ink head 20, for example, the pressure adjusting valve 46 is closed, and the space between the sixth flow path 40f and the seventh flow path 40g is closed. By driving the liquid feed pump 41 in this state, the ink 59 in the ink tank 151 is concentrated in the ink supply flow path, and the ink 59 is concentratedly supplied to the ink head 20.
次に、インク供給装置70A~70Hの構成について説明する。複数(ここでは8つ)のインク供給装置70A~70Hは、それぞれ、色材、性状、用途等が異なるインク59をインクヘッド20に供給するためのものである。インク供給装置70A~70Hは、インクタンク151に貯留されているインク59が少なくなったときに、インクタンク151自体は交換せずに、インク補充用のサプライボトル400(図9参照)からインク59を継ぎ足して繰り返し使用する、継ぎ足し式の(使い捨てない)インク供給装置である。なお、サプライボトル400の構成については後述する。
Next, the configurations of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H will be described. The plurality of (here, eight) ink supply devices 70A to 70H are for supplying ink 59 having different color materials, properties, uses, and the like to the ink head 20. When the ink 59 stored in the ink tank 151 is low, the ink supply devices 70A to 70H do not replace the ink tank 151 itself, but from the ink replenishment supply bottle 400 (see FIG. 9) to the ink 59. This is a replenishment type (non-disposable) ink supply device that is replenished and used repeatedly. The configuration of the supply bottle 400 will be described later.
図1に示すように、本実施形態において、インク供給装置70A~70Hは、プリンタ10の前面に設けられている。詳しくはケーシング19の前方に設けられている。これにより、ユーザは、プリンタ10の前方側から、例えば表示部19Dや印刷の進行状況を確認しながら、インク59を継ぎ足すことができる。ただし、複数のインク供給装置70A~70Hのうちの少なくとも一部は、例えばケーシング19の側方や後方に設けられていてもよい。インク供給装置70A~70Hは、キャリッジ30に搭載されておらず、左右方向には移動しない。本実施形態において、8つのインク供給装置70A~70Hは、本体部12の左右に4つずつ振り分けて配置されている。インク供給装置70A~70Hは、左側部19Lおよび右側部19Rにおいて、それぞれ4つずつ左右方向に並設されている。
As shown in FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, the ink supply devices 70A to 70H are provided on the front surface of the printer 10. Specifically, it is provided in front of the casing 19. As a result, the user can add the ink 59 from the front side of the printer 10 while checking, for example, the display unit 19D and the progress of printing. However, at least a part of the plurality of ink supply devices 70A to 70H may be provided on the side or the rear of the casing 19, for example. The ink supply devices 70A to 70H are not mounted on the carriage 30 and do not move in the left-right direction. In the present embodiment, the eight ink supply devices 70A to 70H are arranged on the left and right sides of the main body 12 by dividing them into four. Four ink supply devices 70A to 70H are arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the left side portion 19L and the right side portion 19R, respectively.
すなわち、正面視において、4つのインク供給装置70A~70Dは、ケーシング19の中央部19Mおよびプラテン14よりも左方に設けられている。4つのインク供給装置70A~70Dは、左側の脚部11よりも外方(中央部19Mから離れる側、図1の左方)に設けられている。4つのインク供給装置70A~70Dは、本体部12の下方に設けられている。4つのインク供給装置70A~70Dは、配管ボックス部18Lの前方に設けられている。4つのインク供給装置70A~70Dは、左右方向に沿って一列に配置されている。4つのインク供給装置70A~70Dは、左右方向に所定の間隔をあけて配置されている。4つのインク供給装置70A~70Dは、上下方向に互い違いに配置されている。4つのインク供給装置70A~70Dは、上下方向に一部分が重なるように配置されている。
That is, in front view, the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are provided on the left side of the central portion 19M of the casing 19 and the platen 14. The four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are provided outside the left leg portion 11 (the side away from the central portion 19M, the left side in FIG. 1). The four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are provided below the main body portion 12. The four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are provided in front of the piping box portion 18L. The four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are arranged in a row along the left-right direction. The four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. The four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are arranged alternately in the vertical direction. The four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are arranged so that a part thereof overlaps in the vertical direction.
4つのインク供給装置70E~70Hは、ケーシング19の中央部19Mおよびプラテン14よりも右方に設けられている。4つのインク供給装置70E~70Hは、右側の脚部11よりも外方(中央部19Mから離れる側、図1の右方)に設けられている。4つのインク供給装置70E~70Hは、本体部12の下方に設けられている。4つのインク供給装置70E~70Hは、配管ボックス部18Rの前方に設けられている。4つのインク供給装置70E~70Hは、左右方向に沿って一列に配置されている。4つのインク供給装置70E~70Hは、左右方向に所定の間隔をあけて配置されている。4つのインク供給装置70E~70Hは、上下方向に互い違いに配置されている。4つのインク供給装置70E~70Hは、上下方向に一部分が重なるように配置されている。
The four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are provided on the right side of the central portion 19M of the casing 19 and the platen 14. The four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are provided on the outer side (the side away from the central portion 19M, the right side in FIG. 1) from the right leg portion 11. The four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are provided below the main body portion 12. The four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are provided in front of the piping box portion 18R. The four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are arranged in a row along the left-right direction. The four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. The four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are arranged alternately in the vertical direction. The four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are arranged so that a part thereof overlaps in the vertical direction.
本実施形態において、4つのインク供給装置70A~70Dは、それぞれ配管ボックス部18Lの前面に取り付けられている。具体的には、4つのインク供給装置70A~70Dは、上下方向に立設するように配管ボックス部18Lに固定されている。4つのインク供給装置70A~70Dは、配管ボックス部18Lを介して、それぞれケーシング19の左側部19Lに支持されている。同様に、4つのインク供給装置70E~70Hは、それぞれ配管ボックス部18Rの前面に取り付けられている。具体的には、4つのインク供給装置70E~70Hは、上下方向に立設するように配管ボックス部18Rに固定されている。4つのインク供給装置70E~70Hは、配管ボックス部18Rを介して、それぞれケーシング19の右側部19Rに支持されている。
In this embodiment, the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are attached to the front surface of the piping box portion 18L, respectively. Specifically, the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are fixed to the piping box portion 18L so as to stand upright in the vertical direction. The four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are supported by the left side portion 19L of the casing 19, respectively, via the piping box portion 18L. Similarly, the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are attached to the front surface of the piping box portion 18R, respectively. Specifically, the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are fixed to the piping box portion 18R so as to stand upright in the vertical direction. The four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are supported by the right side portion 19R of the casing 19, respectively, via the piping box portion 18R.
正面視において、4つのインク供給装置70A~70Dの左右の幅WL1は、配管ボックス部18Lの左右の幅WL2よりも狭い。4つのインク供給装置70A~70Dは、配管ボックス部18Lの幅WL2に収まっている。同様に、4つのインク供給装置70E~70Hの左右の幅は、配管ボックス部18Rの左右の幅よりも狭い。インク供給装置70E~70Hは、配管ボックス部18Rの幅WL2に収まっている。本実施形態では、4つのインク供給装置70A~70Dおよび4つのインク供給装置70E~70Hの左右の幅WL1が同じであり、配管ボックス部18Lおよび配管ボックス部18Rの左右の幅WL2が同じである。
In front view, the left and right width WL1 of the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are narrower than the left and right width WL2 of the piping box portion 18L. The four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are contained in the width WL2 of the piping box portion 18L. Similarly, the left and right widths of the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are narrower than the left and right widths of the piping box portion 18R. The ink supply devices 70E to 70H are contained in the width WL2 of the piping box portion 18R. In the present embodiment, the left and right width WL1 of the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D and the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are the same, and the left and right width WL2 of the piping box portion 18L and the piping box portion 18R are the same. ..
図2に示すように、側面視において、インク供給装置70A~70Hの少なくとも一部は、プラテン14と重なっている。また、インク供給装置70A~70Hを前後方向の中心線CLで前側部分と後側部分とに区分したときに、インク供給装置70A~70Hの前側部分は、操作パネル19Cよりも前方に配置されている。インク供給装置70A~70Hの後側部分は、操作パネル19Cの下方に配置されている。このため、平面視において、インク供給装置70A~70Hの前側部分は、本体部12と重なっていない。平面視において、インク供給装置70A~70Hの後側部分は、本体部12と重なっている。
As shown in FIG. 2, in the side view, at least a part of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H overlaps with the platen 14. Further, when the ink supply devices 70A to 70H are divided into a front side portion and a rear side portion by the center line CL in the front-rear direction, the front side portion of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H is arranged in front of the operation panel 19C. There is. The rear portion of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H is arranged below the operation panel 19C. Therefore, in a plan view, the front portion of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H does not overlap with the main body portion 12. In a plan view, the rear portion of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H overlaps with the main body portion 12.
側面視において、複数のインク供給装置70A~70Hは、前端と後端の位置が一致している。インク供給装置70A~70Hの前端70tは、第2脚部11Bの前端11tよりも本体部12に近い側(図2の右側)に位置している。なお、図2では、第2脚部11Bと垂直でかつ前端70tを通る垂線を、仮想線TLで示している。インク供給装置70A~70Hの前端70tは、プラテン14の前端14tよりも本体部12に近い側(図2の右側)に位置している。これにより、印刷完了後に、記録媒体5がインク供給装置70A~70Hの前方までプラテン14で案内される。そのため、ユーザはプラテン14の両側面に手を挿入して容易に印刷完了後の記録媒体5を取り上げることができる。
In the side view, the positions of the front end and the rear end of the plurality of ink supply devices 70A to 70H are the same. The front ends 70t of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H are located closer to the main body 12 (on the right side in FIG. 2) than the front ends 11t of the second leg portion 11B. In FIG. 2, a vertical line perpendicular to the second leg portion 11B and passing through the front end 70t is shown by a virtual line TL. The front ends 70t of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H are located closer to the main body 12 (on the right side in FIG. 2) than the front ends 14t of the platen 14. As a result, after the printing is completed, the recording medium 5 is guided by the platen 14 to the front of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H. Therefore, the user can easily pick up the recording medium 5 after printing is completed by inserting his / her hands into both side surfaces of the platen 14.
なお、本実施形態において、インク供給装置は8つであるが、インク供給装置の個数や配置は何ら限定されない。また、インク供給装置70A~70Hは、配管ボックス部18L、18Rを介在せずに、本体部12に直接取り付けてもよい。また、例えばインク59の種類が少ない場合等には、配管ボックス部18Lあるいは配管ボックス部18Rのみにインク供給装置を取り付けてもよい。なお、本実施形態では、複数のインク供給装置70A~70Hが、全て同じ構成である。このため、以下では、インク供給装置70Hを例として、インク供給装置の構成を説明する。ただし、複数のインク供給装置70A~70Hは、必ずしも全てが同じ構成である必要はなく、一部はインク供給装置70Hと構成が異なっていてもよい。
In the present embodiment, the number of ink supply devices is eight, but the number and arrangement of the ink supply devices are not limited at all. Further, the ink supply devices 70A to 70H may be directly attached to the main body portion 12 without interposing the piping box portions 18L and 18R. Further, for example, when the types of ink 59 are small, the ink supply device may be attached only to the piping box portion 18L or the piping box portion 18R. In this embodiment, the plurality of ink supply devices 70A to 70H all have the same configuration. Therefore, in the following, the configuration of the ink supply device will be described by taking the ink supply device 70H as an example. However, the plurality of ink supply devices 70A to 70H do not necessarily all have the same configuration, and some of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H may have different configurations from the ink supply devices 70H.
図5は、プリンタ10のインク供給装置70E~70Hの付近を拡大した平面図である。図6は、インク供給装置70Hの斜視図である。図7は、インク供給装置70Hの平面図である。図8は、インク供給装置70Hの鉛直断面図である。図6に示すように、インク供給装置70Hは、インク貯留部150と、インク量検出部160と、インク補充部190と、を備えている。以下、順に説明する。
FIG. 5 is an enlarged plan view of the vicinity of the ink supply devices 70E to 70H of the printer 10. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the ink supply device 70H. FIG. 7 is a plan view of the ink supply device 70H. FIG. 8 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the ink supply device 70H. As shown in FIG. 6, the ink supply device 70H includes an ink storage unit 150, an ink amount detection unit 160, and an ink replenishment unit 190. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.
インク貯留部150は、インク59を貯留する部分である。インク貯留部150は、インクタンク151を備えている。インクタンク151は、インク59が貯留される容器である。インクタンク151は、インク59が少なくなっても使い捨てず、連続使用が可能な容器である。図2に示すように、本実施形態において、インクタンク151は、一側面(図2の右側の面)が配管ボックス部18Rに固定されている。インクタンク151は、工具なしでは配管ボックス部18Rから着脱不可能なように取り付けられている。これにより、インクタンク151とインク流路40との接続不良が生じにくくなっている。また、インク59の補充中にも印刷を継続することができる。インクタンク151は、配管ボックス部18Rに支持されている。インクタンク151は、キャリッジ30に搭載されておらず、左右方向には移動しない。図4に示すように、インクタンク151は、インクヘッド20の下面20aよりも下方に配置されている。上下方向において、インクタンク151の上端とインクヘッド20の下面20aとの間隔は、概ね50~200mm、例えば100~150mmでありうる。
The ink storage unit 150 is a portion that stores ink 59. The ink storage unit 150 includes an ink tank 151. The ink tank 151 is a container in which the ink 59 is stored. The ink tank 151 is a container that is not disposable even when the amount of ink 59 is low and can be used continuously. As shown in FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, one side surface (the right side surface of FIG. 2) of the ink tank 151 is fixed to the piping box portion 18R. The ink tank 151 is attached so as not to be detachable from the piping box portion 18R without a tool. As a result, poor connection between the ink tank 151 and the ink flow path 40 is less likely to occur. In addition, printing can be continued even while the ink 59 is being replenished. The ink tank 151 is supported by the piping box portion 18R. The ink tank 151 is not mounted on the carriage 30 and does not move in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 4, the ink tank 151 is arranged below the lower surface 20a of the ink head 20. In the vertical direction, the distance between the upper end of the ink tank 151 and the lower surface 20a of the ink head 20 can be approximately 50 to 200 mm, for example, 100 to 150 mm.
インクタンク151は、扁平な箱型形状である。図7に示すように、インクタンク151は、平面視において矩形状である。ただし、インクタンク151は、平面視において、例えば楕円形状、円形状等であってもよい。インクタンク151は、一対の短辺151Nと、一対の長辺151Wと、を備えている。図5に示すように、本実施形態において、インクタンク151の短辺151Nは、左右方向に沿って延びている。短辺151Nは、本体部12およびケーシング19に沿って延びている。長辺151Wは、前後方向に沿って延びている。長辺151Wは、本体部12およびケーシング19と直交するように延びている。インク供給装置70E~70Hは、長辺151W同士が対向するように並設されている。
The ink tank 151 has a flat box shape. As shown in FIG. 7, the ink tank 151 has a rectangular shape in a plan view. However, the ink tank 151 may have an elliptical shape, a circular shape, or the like in a plan view. The ink tank 151 includes a pair of short sides 151N and a pair of long sides 151W. As shown in FIG. 5, in the present embodiment, the short side 151N of the ink tank 151 extends in the left-right direction. The short side 151N extends along the main body 12 and the casing 19. The long side 151W extends along the front-rear direction. The long side 151W extends so as to be orthogonal to the main body 12 and the casing 19. The ink supply devices 70E to 70H are arranged side by side so that the long sides 151W face each other.
なお、本明細書において「矩形状」とは、例えば次の(1)~(3)のような形状:(1)長辺151Wと短辺151Nとが曲線を介して互いに接合している形状;(2)長辺151Wおよび短辺151Nの少なくとも一方が直線状ではなく、湾曲したり、凹凸になっていたりする形状;長辺151Wおよび短辺151Nの少なくとも一方が屈曲していて、複数の直線あるいは曲線から構成されている形状;を包含する用語である。
In the present specification, the "rectangular shape" means, for example, the following shapes (1) to (3): (1) A shape in which a long side 151W and a short side 151N are joined to each other via a curved line. (2) A shape in which at least one of the long side 151W and the short side 151N is not straight but curved or uneven; at least one of the long side 151W and the short side 151N is bent, and a plurality of A term that includes a shape composed of a straight line or a curved line.
インクタンク151の材質は、従来この種の用途で使用されているものと同じでよく、特に制限はない。インクタンク151は、適度な剛性とガスバリア性と水蒸気バリア性とを有しているとよい。インクタンク151のインク59と接する面は、耐インク腐食性に優れ、インク59を変質させにくい材質からなるとよい。インクタンク151は、例えば、ポリエチレン(PE)やポリプロピレン(PP)、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)、シリコン、フッ素系樹脂等の樹脂製である。インクタンク151は、内表面あるいは外表面に、樹脂等で形成されたコーティング層を備えていてもよい。インク59が光硬化性である場合、インクタンク151は、外観が黒色で遮光性を有していてもよい。
The material of the ink tank 151 may be the same as that conventionally used for this type of application, and there is no particular limitation. The ink tank 151 is preferably provided with appropriate rigidity, gas barrier property, and water vapor barrier property. The surface of the ink tank 151 in contact with the ink 59 is preferably made of a material that has excellent ink corrosion resistance and does not easily deteriorate the ink 59. The ink tank 151 is made of, for example, a resin such as polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), polyethylene terephthalate (PET), silicon, and a fluororesin. The ink tank 151 may be provided with a coating layer made of resin or the like on the inner surface or the outer surface. When the ink 59 is photocurable, the ink tank 151 may have a black appearance and a light-shielding property.
図8に示すように、インクタンク151は、上方に向かって開口された上方開口部152Uを有するタンク本体152と、上方開口部152Uを覆う蓋体153と、を備えている。タンク本体152は下部材の一例であり、蓋体153は上部材の一例である。詳しくは後述するが、インクタンク151は、例えば上下方向においてタンク本体152と蓋体153との間に、さらに他の部材を備えていてもよい。タンク本体152および蓋体153は、例えば樹脂材料の射出成型によって形成することができる。本実施形態において、タンク本体152および蓋体153は、それぞれ1つの部材として形成されている。ただし、タンク本体152および/または蓋体153は、複数の部材を組み合わせて接合することにより形成されていてもよい。
As shown in FIG. 8, the ink tank 151 includes a tank main body 152 having an upper opening 152U opened upward, and a lid 153 covering the upper opening 152U. The tank body 152 is an example of a lower member, and the lid body 153 is an example of an upper member. As will be described in detail later, the ink tank 151 may further include another member between the tank body 152 and the lid 153 in the vertical direction, for example. The tank body 152 and the lid 153 can be formed, for example, by injection molding of a resin material. In the present embodiment, the tank body 152 and the lid body 153 are each formed as one member. However, the tank body 152 and / or the lid 153 may be formed by combining and joining a plurality of members.
タンク本体152は、上方開口部152Uの周縁にフランジ部(縁部)152Eを有している。蓋体153は、外周縁にフランジ部153Eを有している。本実施形態では、タンク本体152のフランジ部152Eと蓋体153のフランジ部153Eとが重ね合わせられ、ボルト等の接合部材159によって接合されている。これにより、フランジ結合部158が形成されている。インクタンク151は、フランジ結合部158によって一体化されている。タンク本体152の上方開口部152Uは、蓋体153によって気密に封止されている。フランジ部152Eは、第1フランジ部の一例であり、フランジ部153Eは第2フランジ部の一例である。
The tank body 152 has a flange portion (edge portion) 152E on the peripheral edge of the upper opening 152U. The lid body 153 has a flange portion 153E on the outer peripheral edge. In the present embodiment, the flange portion 152E of the tank body 152 and the flange portion 153E of the lid body 153 are overlapped and joined by a joining member 159 such as a bolt. As a result, the flange joint portion 158 is formed. The ink tank 151 is integrated by a flange coupling portion 158. The upper opening 152U of the tank body 152 is hermetically sealed by the lid 153. The flange portion 152E is an example of the first flange portion, and the flange portion 153E is an example of the second flange portion.
図5に示すように、インク供給装置70E~70Hは、フランジ結合部158が上下方向に互い違いになるように配置されている。言い換えれば、フランジ結合部158が鉛直方向に偏位している。これにより、大容量のインクタンク151を左右方向にコンパクトに収めることができる。本実施形態では、インク供給装置70E、70Gのフランジ結合部158が、インク供給装置70F、70Hのフランジ結合部158よりも上方に配置されている。インク供給装置70E~70Hのうち隣り合う2つのインク供給装置は、フランジ結合部158の少なくとも一部が、所定の重なり幅OLで相互に重なるように配置されている。
As shown in FIG. 5, the ink supply devices 70E to 70H are arranged so that the flange coupling portions 158 are staggered in the vertical direction. In other words, the flange coupling portion 158 is displaced in the vertical direction. As a result, the large-capacity ink tank 151 can be compactly stored in the left-right direction. In the present embodiment, the flange coupling portions 158 of the ink supply devices 70E and 70G are arranged above the flange coupling portions 158 of the ink supply devices 70F and 70H. In the two adjacent ink supply devices 70E to 70H, at least a part of the flange coupling portion 158 is arranged so as to overlap each other with a predetermined overlap width OL.
図8に示すように、タンク本体152は、下壁152Aと、後壁152Bと、前壁152Cと、を有している。下壁152Aには、上下方向に貫通した下方開口部(図示せず)が形成されている。後壁152Bは、下壁152Aから上方に延びている。前壁152Cは、後壁152Bに対向している。前壁152Cは、下方に行くほど後方に位置するように傾斜している。前壁152Cは、前方から後方に向かって漸次下方に傾斜するスロープ状をなしている。前壁152Cは、インク流出口152Oに向かって傾斜している。図2に示すように、前壁152Cは、本体部12に近づくほど下方に傾斜している。これにより、ユーザがインク59を継ぎ足す時にプリンタ10に近づいても、ユーザの足がインクタンク151にぶつかりにくくなる。前壁152Cは、タンク傾斜面の一例である。
As shown in FIG. 8, the tank main body 152 has a lower wall 152A, a rear wall 152B, and a front wall 152C. The lower wall 152A is formed with a lower opening (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction. The rear wall 152B extends upward from the lower wall 152A. The front wall 152C faces the rear wall 152B. The front wall 152C is inclined so as to be located rearward as it goes downward. The front wall 152C has a slope shape that gradually slopes downward from the front to the rear. The front wall 152C is inclined toward the ink outlet 152O. As shown in FIG. 2, the front wall 152C is inclined downward as it approaches the main body 12. As a result, even if the user approaches the printer 10 when replenishing the ink 59, the user's foot is less likely to hit the ink tank 151. The front wall 152C is an example of a tank inclined surface.
タンク本体152は、中空構造である。タンク本体152には、インク貯留室154が区画されている。インク貯留室154には、空気とインク59との気液界面が存在している。特に限定されるものではないが、インク貯留室154の容積は、典型的にはサプライボトル400(図9参照)の容積よりも大きい。インク貯留室154に収容可能なインク59の容量は、典型的には1L以上、例えば1.5~2Lである。このように、インクタンク151には、例えば消耗品としてのインクカートリッジに比べて、多くのインク59を収容し得る。このため、大型のプリンタ10で一度に大量の印刷を行う場合等にも、印刷の途中でインク59を継ぎ足す回数が少なくて済む。また、夜間等に無人で印刷を継続する場合にも、インク切れが起きにくくなる。インク貯留室154に収容可能なインク59の容量は、サプライボトル400に収容されているインク59の容量の概ね2倍以上、例えば3~5倍であってもよい。
The tank body 152 has a hollow structure. An ink storage chamber 154 is partitioned in the tank body 152. In the ink storage chamber 154, a gas-liquid interface between air and ink 59 exists. Although not particularly limited, the volume of the ink storage chamber 154 is typically larger than the volume of the supply bottle 400 (see FIG. 9). The capacity of the ink 59 that can be accommodated in the ink storage chamber 154 is typically 1 L or more, for example, 1.5 to 2 L. In this way, the ink tank 151 can accommodate a larger amount of ink 59 than, for example, an ink cartridge as a consumable item. Therefore, even when a large amount of printing is performed by the large printer 10 at one time, the number of times to add the ink 59 in the middle of printing can be reduced. In addition, when printing is continued unattended at night or the like, ink is less likely to run out. The capacity of the ink 59 that can be stored in the ink storage chamber 154 may be approximately twice or more, for example, 3 to 5 times the capacity of the ink 59 stored in the supply bottle 400.
図8に示すように、タンク本体152の後壁152Bには、インク流出管152Fが形成されている。インク流出管152Fは、後壁152Bと直交する方向(図8の前後方向)に延びている。インク流出管152Fの下流端、すなわちインク貯留室154から離れた側の端部は、インク流出口152Oである。インク流出口152Oには、インク流路40の一端、具体的には、第1流路40aの上流端が接続されている。インク貯留室154内のインク59は、インク流出口152Oからインク流路40の第1流路40aに流出し、インクヘッド20に供給される。
As shown in FIG. 8, an ink outflow pipe 152F is formed on the rear wall 152B of the tank body 152. The ink outflow tube 152F extends in a direction orthogonal to the rear wall 152B (front-rear direction in FIG. 8). The downstream end of the ink outflow pipe 152F, that is, the end on the side away from the ink storage chamber 154 is the ink outlet 152O. One end of the ink flow path 40, specifically, the upstream end of the first flow path 40a is connected to the ink outlet 152O. The ink 59 in the ink storage chamber 154 flows out from the ink outlet 152O to the first flow path 40a of the ink flow path 40 and is supplied to the ink head 20.
蓋体153は、タンク本体152の上方開口部152Uを覆う部材である。図7に示すように、蓋体153は、平面視において矩形状である。蓋体153は、前後方向に延びる板状部153Bを備えている。図2に示すように、蓋体153の少なくとも一部は、本体部12よりも下方に配置されている。蓋体153の少なくとも一部は、送液ポンプ41の上端よりも上方に配置されている。蓋体153は、インクヘッド20の下面20aよりも下方に配置されている。図5に示すように、平面視において、蓋体153の少なくとも一部は、本体部12と重なっている。
The lid body 153 is a member that covers the upper opening 152U of the tank body 152. As shown in FIG. 7, the lid body 153 has a rectangular shape in a plan view. The lid body 153 includes a plate-shaped portion 153B extending in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 2, at least a part of the lid 153 is arranged below the main body 12. At least a part of the lid 153 is arranged above the upper end of the liquid feed pump 41. The lid 153 is arranged below the lower surface 20a of the ink head 20. As shown in FIG. 5, in a plan view, at least a part of the lid 153 overlaps with the main body 12.
蓋体153は、大気連通部153Aを備えている。大気連通部153Aは、インク貯留室154内を大気圧の状態で維持すると共に、インク貯留室154内のインク59の蒸発を抑制する部材である。大気連通部153Aは、インク貯留室154を大気開放している。大気連通部153Aは、大気の流れを蛇行させるラビリンス構造体である。
The lid body 153 is provided with an atmospheric communication unit 153A. The atmospheric communication unit 153A is a member that maintains the inside of the ink storage chamber 154 in a state of atmospheric pressure and suppresses evaporation of the ink 59 in the ink storage chamber 154. The air communication unit 153A opens the ink storage chamber 154 to the atmosphere. The atmospheric communication unit 153A is a labyrinth structure that meanders the flow of the atmosphere.
図2に示すように、前後方向において、大気連通部153Aは、配管ボックス部18Rよりも前方に配置されている。大気連通部153Aは、インク供給装置70Hのインク補充部190よりも本体部12に近い側(図2の右側)に配置されている。大気連通部153Aは、プラテン14の前端14tよりも本体部12に近い側(図2の右側)に配置されている。大気連通部153Aは、送液ポンプ41および脱気装置43よりも前方(図2の左側)に配置されている。大気連通部153Aは、送液ポンプ41の上端よりも上方に配置されている。大気連通部153Aは、本体部12よりも下方に配置されている。大気連通部153Aは、インクヘッド20の下面20aよりも下方に配置されている。上下方向において、大気連通部153Aと本体部12との間には、大気が流通可能な程度の間隔(例えば1cm以上の間隔)が確保されている。図5に示すように、平面視において、大気連通部153Aの少なくとも一部(ここでは全部)は、本体部12と重なっている。
As shown in FIG. 2, the atmospheric communication portion 153A is arranged in front of the piping box portion 18R in the front-rear direction. The air communication unit 153A is arranged on the side closer to the main body portion 12 (on the right side in FIG. 2) than the ink replenishment portion 190 of the ink supply device 70H. The atmospheric communication portion 153A is arranged on the side closer to the main body portion 12 (on the right side in FIG. 2) than the front end 14t of the platen 14. The air communication unit 153A is arranged in front of the liquid feed pump 41 and the deaerator 43 (on the left side in FIG. 2). The air communication unit 153A is arranged above the upper end of the liquid feed pump 41. The atmospheric communication portion 153A is arranged below the main body portion 12. The atmospheric communication portion 153A is arranged below the lower surface 20a of the ink head 20. In the vertical direction, a distance (for example, a distance of 1 cm or more) is secured between the air communication portion 153A and the main body portion 12 so that the atmosphere can flow. As shown in FIG. 5, in a plan view, at least a part (here, all) of the atmospheric communication portion 153A overlaps with the main body portion 12.
図7に示すように、大気連通部153Aは、蓋体153を上下方向に貫通し、インク貯留室154の内部と外部とを連通する貫通孔153Hと、蓋体153の外表面(図7の上面)に設けられ、貫通孔153Hと大気とを接続する蛇道153Sと、貫通孔153Hおよび蛇道153Sを覆う樹脂フィルム153Mと、を備えている。平面視において、貫通孔153Hは、ケーシング19(例えば本体部12)と重なっているとよい。蛇道153Sは、貫通孔153Hから大気までの流体流路を長くするために、細長く蛇行している。蛇道153Sは、大気連通溝の一例である。樹脂フィルム153Mは、例えば気体の通過を許容する一方、インク59の通過を遮断する微小な孔を有する多孔質膜であってもよい。樹脂フィルム153Mは、例えばポリテトラフルオロエチレン等のフッ素樹脂製のフィルムであってもよい。
As shown in FIG. 7, the atmospheric communication portion 153A has a through hole 153H that penetrates the lid 153 in the vertical direction and communicates between the inside and the outside of the ink storage chamber 154, and the outer surface of the lid 153 (FIG. 7). It is provided on the upper surface) and includes a serpentine 153S that connects the through hole 153H and the atmosphere, and a resin film 153M that covers the through hole 153H and the serpentine 153S. In a plan view, the through hole 153H may overlap with the casing 19 (for example, the main body portion 12). The meandering path 153S meanders in an elongated manner in order to lengthen the fluid flow path from the through hole 153H to the atmosphere. The serpentine 153S is an example of an atmospheric communication groove. The resin film 153M may be, for example, a porous film having minute pores that allow the passage of gas while blocking the passage of the ink 59. The resin film 153M may be a film made of a fluororesin such as polytetrafluoroethylene.
図8に示すように、蓋体153は、さらに蓋体開口部313と、インク流入管153Fと、を備えている。蓋体開口部313は、インクタンク151の上面に設けられている。これにより、インク貯留室154に貯留可能なインク59の容量を増やすことができる。
なお、本明細書において「上面」とは、蓋体153を構成する壁部のうち、鉛直方向において一番高い面(天面)を包含し、鉛直方向の下方を向く全ての面のことをいう。蓋体153の上面は、平面、例えば水平面であってもよく、表面に凹凸が形成されていてもよく、湾曲していてもよく、傾斜していてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 8, thelid body 153 further includes a lid body opening 313 and an ink inflow pipe 153F. The lid opening 313 is provided on the upper surface of the ink tank 151. As a result, the capacity of the ink 59 that can be stored in the ink storage chamber 154 can be increased.
In addition, in this specification, the "upper surface" includes the highest surface (top surface) in the vertical direction among the wall portions constituting thelid body 153, and refers to all the surfaces facing downward in the vertical direction. Say. The upper surface of the lid 153 may be a flat surface, for example, a horizontal surface, may have irregularities on the surface, may be curved, or may be inclined.
なお、本明細書において「上面」とは、蓋体153を構成する壁部のうち、鉛直方向において一番高い面(天面)を包含し、鉛直方向の下方を向く全ての面のことをいう。蓋体153の上面は、平面、例えば水平面であってもよく、表面に凹凸が形成されていてもよく、湾曲していてもよく、傾斜していてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 8, the
In addition, in this specification, the "upper surface" includes the highest surface (top surface) in the vertical direction among the wall portions constituting the
蓋体開口部313は、蓋体153を上下方向に貫通している。蓋体開口部313は、インク補充口の一例である。蓋体開口部313には、後述するインク補充部190の装着機構192(図10も参照)が取り付けられている。図2、図5からわかるように、蓋体開口部313は、標準的なユーザの立位状態における腰の高さから胸の高さの間であり、例えば70~110cm程度の高さに設けられている。これにより、ユーザは腰を曲げて屈んだり、膝を曲げてしゃがんだりすることなく、インク59を補充することができる。したがって、ユーザのインク補充時の作業負荷を軽減することができる。
The lid opening 313 penetrates the lid 153 in the vertical direction. The lid opening 313 is an example of an ink replenishment port. A mounting mechanism 192 (see also FIG. 10) of the ink replenishing section 190, which will be described later, is mounted on the lid opening 313. As can be seen from FIGS. 2 and 5, the lid opening 313 is provided between the height of the waist and the height of the chest in a standard user's standing position, for example, at a height of about 70 to 110 cm. Has been done. As a result, the user can replenish the ink 59 without bending the waist and bending or bending the knee and crouching. Therefore, the workload at the time of replenishing the ink of the user can be reduced.
なお、「標準的なユーザの立位状態における腰の高さ」とは、プリンタ10を操作する標準的な操作者の腰の高さ位置を意味し、例えば、特許第5640373号公報や特許第5942479号公報に記載されている高さと同じである。人間工学的・設計上の観点から一例を挙げれば、日本人の場合には、男性で845.9mm、女性で768.8mmでありうる。また、外国人(例えば米国人)の場合には、男性で934.3mm、女性で829.9mmでありうる(1998年度の成人平均データによる)。
The "waist height in a standing state of a standard user" means the waist height position of a standard operator who operates the printer 10, and is, for example, Japanese Patent No. 5640373 and Japanese Patent No. 5640373. It is the same as the height described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 5942479. To give an example from the viewpoint of ergonomics and design, in the case of Japanese, it can be 845.9 mm for men and 768.8 mm for women. In the case of foreigners (for example, Americans), it can be 934.3 mm for men and 829.9 mm for women (according to the 1998 adult average data).
図5に示すように、蓋体開口部313の少なくとも一部は、ケーシング19よりも前方に設けられている。平面視において、蓋体開口部313の少なくとも一部は、ケーシング19と重なっていない。これにより、ユーザは、例えばインクタンク151を移動させることなく、インクタンク151にインク59を継ぎ足すことができる。したがって、プリンタ10を使用している最中(例えば、印刷中)にも、インク59を継ぎ足すことができる。本実施形態では、蓋体開口部313の全体が、ケーシング19よりも前方に設けられている。平面視において、蓋体開口部313の全体が、ケーシング19と重なっていない。図5、図7からわかるように、蓋体開口部313は、インク供給装置70A~70Hの前後方向における中心線CLよりも前方に配置されている。これにより、ユーザのインク補充時の作業性を向上することができる。
As shown in FIG. 5, at least a part of the lid opening 313 is provided in front of the casing 19. In plan view, at least a portion of the lid opening 313 does not overlap the casing 19. As a result, the user can add the ink 59 to the ink tank 151 without moving the ink tank 151, for example. Therefore, the ink 59 can be added even while the printer 10 is being used (for example, during printing). In the present embodiment, the entire lid opening 313 is provided in front of the casing 19. In plan view, the entire lid opening 313 does not overlap the casing 19. As can be seen from FIGS. 5 and 7, the lid opening 313 is arranged in front of the center line CL in the front-rear direction of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H. This makes it possible to improve the workability of the user when refilling ink.
図8に示すように、蓋体開口部313は、平面視において、前壁152Cと重なっている。インク補充部190から補充されたインク59は、典型的には前壁152Cを伝ってインク貯留室154内を移動する。前壁152Cは、インク補充部190からインク59を導くガイドとして機能する。これにより、インク貯留室154内のインク59に一方向の流れを生じさせ、インク59を撹拌することができる。また、たとえインク59が勢い良く補充されたとしても、インク59の泡立ちが抑えられる。これにより、インク59に微小な気泡が混ざりにくくなると共に、発生した泡がタンク本体152から溢れだすような事態が生じにくくなる。
As shown in FIG. 8, the lid opening 313 overlaps the front wall 152C in a plan view. The ink 59 replenished from the ink replenishment unit 190 typically moves in the ink storage chamber 154 along the front wall 152C. The front wall 152C functions as a guide for guiding the ink 59 from the ink replenishing unit 190. As a result, the ink 59 in the ink storage chamber 154 can be made to flow in one direction, and the ink 59 can be agitated. Further, even if the ink 59 is replenished vigorously, the bubbling of the ink 59 is suppressed. As a result, minute bubbles are less likely to be mixed with the ink 59, and the generated bubbles are less likely to overflow from the tank body 152.
インク流入管153Fは、上下方向に沿って延びている。インク流入管153Fの下端は、インク流入口153Iである。インク流入口153Iには、インク流路40の一端、具体的には、インク還流流路の一部である第7流路40gの下流端が接続されている。インク循環流路を流通したインク59は、インク流入口153Iからインク貯留室154に戻される。インク流入口153Iは、インク貯留室154の内部に突出している。インク流入口153Iは、インク流出口152Oよりも上方に設けられている。これにより、インク貯留室154内のインクを撹拌することができ、例えば沈降しがちな顔料等を分散することができる。
The ink inflow pipe 153F extends along the vertical direction. The lower end of the ink inflow tube 153F is the ink inflow port 153I. One end of the ink flow path 40, specifically, the downstream end of the seventh flow path 40g, which is a part of the ink return flow path, is connected to the ink inflow port 153I. The ink 59 that has flowed through the ink circulation flow path is returned to the ink storage chamber 154 from the ink inflow port 153I. The ink inlet 153I projects into the ink storage chamber 154. The ink inlet 153I is provided above the ink outlet 152O. As a result, the ink in the ink storage chamber 154 can be agitated, and for example, pigments and the like that tend to settle can be dispersed.
インク流入口153Iは、平面視において、前壁152Cと重なっている。インク流入口153Iから流入したインク59は、前壁152Cを伝ってインク貯留室154内を移動する。前壁152Cは、インク流入口153Iからインク59を導くガイドとして機能する。これにより、インク貯留室154内のインク59に一方向の流れを生じさせ、インク59を撹拌することができる。加えて、長期にわたって連続的にインクを循環させても、インク59の泡立ちが抑えられ、インク59に微小な気泡が混ざりにくくなる。また、微小な気泡を含んだインク59がインク流路40に流出しにくくなる。
The ink inlet 153I overlaps the front wall 152C in a plan view. The ink 59 flowing in from the ink inlet 153I moves in the ink storage chamber 154 along the front wall 152C. The front wall 152C functions as a guide for guiding the ink 59 from the ink inlet 153I. As a result, the ink 59 in the ink storage chamber 154 can be made to flow in one direction, and the ink 59 can be agitated. In addition, even if the ink is continuously circulated for a long period of time, foaming of the ink 59 is suppressed, and it becomes difficult for minute bubbles to be mixed with the ink 59. In addition, the ink 59 containing minute bubbles is less likely to flow out into the ink flow path 40.
インク量検出部160は、インク59の水頭圧を利用して、インクタンク151のインク貯留室154内のインク量(典型的には、インク59の残量)を検出する検出機構である。インク59の水頭圧を利用することで、インク貯留室154内のインク量を長期に亘って精度よく検出することができる。インク量検出部160は、感圧膜161と、被検出部材162と、付勢部材163と、センサ部164と、ケーシング165と、を備えている。
The ink amount detection unit 160 is a detection mechanism that detects the amount of ink (typically, the remaining amount of ink 59) in the ink storage chamber 154 of the ink tank 151 by using the head pressure of the ink 59. By utilizing the head pressure of the ink 59, the amount of ink in the ink storage chamber 154 can be accurately detected over a long period of time. The ink amount detecting unit 160 includes a pressure sensitive film 161, a detected member 162, an urging member 163, a sensor unit 164, and a casing 165.
ケーシング165は、被検出部材162と、付勢部材163と、センサ部164と、を収容するケースである。特に限定されるものではないが、ケーシング165は、例えば、アルミニウム、鉄、ステンレス鋼等の金属製、ポリエチレン(PE)やポリプロピレン(PP)、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)等の樹脂製である。インク59が光硬化性である場合、ケーシング165は、外観が黒色で遮光性を有していてもよい。
The casing 165 is a case for accommodating the detected member 162, the urging member 163, and the sensor unit 164. Although not particularly limited, the casing 165 is made of, for example, a metal such as aluminum, iron, or stainless steel, or a resin such as polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), or polyethylene terephthalate (PET). When the ink 59 is photocurable, the casing 165 may have a black appearance and a light-shielding property.
感圧膜161は、インク貯留室154内のインク59の水頭圧に応じて、撓み変形の度合いが変化する部材である。感圧膜161は、タンク本体152の下壁152Aに取り付けられている。詳しくは、下壁152Aの下方開口部の縁部分に沿って取り付けられている。感圧膜161は、インク貯留室154の下面(ここでは底面)の一部を構成している。感圧膜161の材質は、従来この種の用途で使用されているものと同じでよく、特に制限はない。感圧膜161は、ガス透過性や水蒸気透過性が低い材質で構成されているとよい。感圧膜161のインクと接する面は、耐インク腐食性に優れた材質からなるとよい。感圧膜161は、例えば単層構造あるいは多層構造の樹脂製のフィルムである。本実施形態において、感圧膜161は、可撓性を有する可撓性フィルムである。
The pressure sensitive film 161 is a member whose degree of bending deformation changes according to the head pressure of the ink 59 in the ink storage chamber 154. The pressure sensitive film 161 is attached to the lower wall 152A of the tank body 152. Specifically, it is attached along the edge of the lower opening of the lower wall 152A. The pressure-sensitive film 161 constitutes a part of the lower surface (here, the bottom surface) of the ink storage chamber 154. The material of the pressure-sensitive film 161 may be the same as that conventionally used for this type of application, and is not particularly limited. The pressure sensitive membrane 161 is preferably made of a material having low gas permeability and water vapor permeability. The surface of the pressure sensitive film 161 in contact with the ink is preferably made of a material having excellent ink corrosion resistance. The pressure-sensitive film 161 is, for example, a resin film having a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure. In the present embodiment, the pressure sensitive film 161 is a flexible film having flexibility.
感圧膜161は、下方開口部152Dから遠ざかる方向、言い換えれば、インク貯留室154の気液界面から遠ざかる方向(図8の下方)に撓み変形できる程度の張力で取り付けられている。感圧膜161は、インク貯留室154に十分な量のインク59が貯留されているときには、インク59の水頭圧によってインク貯留室154から遠ざかる方向(図8の下方)に変位する。言い換えれば、感圧膜161は、インク貯留室154に貯留されているインク59の水頭圧が高いほど、気液界面から遠ざかる方向に変位する。一方、感圧膜161は、インク貯留室154のインク59が減少したときには、インク貯留室154に近づく方向(図8の上方)に変位する。言い換えれば、感圧膜161は、インク貯留室154に貯留されているインク59の水頭圧が低いほど、気液界面に近づく方向に変位する。
The pressure sensitive film 161 is attached with a tension sufficient to bend and deform in a direction away from the lower opening 152D, in other words, in a direction away from the gas-liquid interface of the ink storage chamber 154 (lower part of FIG. 8). When a sufficient amount of ink 59 is stored in the ink storage chamber 154, the pressure sensitive film 161 is displaced in a direction away from the ink storage chamber 154 (lower part in FIG. 8) due to the head pressure of the ink 59. In other words, the pressure-sensitive film 161 is displaced in the direction away from the gas-liquid interface as the head pressure of the ink 59 stored in the ink storage chamber 154 increases. On the other hand, when the ink 59 in the ink storage chamber 154 decreases, the pressure sensitive film 161 is displaced in the direction approaching the ink storage chamber 154 (upper in FIG. 8). In other words, the pressure-sensitive film 161 is displaced in the direction closer to the gas-liquid interface as the head pressure of the ink 59 stored in the ink storage chamber 154 is lower.
被検出部材162は、感圧膜161が撓み変形することによって、センサ部164で検出される部材である。被検出部材162は、インク貯留室154の外部かつ真下に配置されている。被検出部材162は、インク貯留室154の外部に配置されている。被検出部材162は、ケーシング165の内部に配置されている。被検出部材162は、インク貯留室154に貯留されているインク59と接触しない。被検出部材162は、ケーシング165の長辺151Wに沿って延びている。被検出部材162は、感圧膜161よりも硬質で、かつ感圧膜161の変位を阻害しないような軽量な材質からなるとよい。
The member to be detected 162 is a member that is detected by the sensor unit 164 when the pressure sensitive film 161 bends and deforms. The member to be detected 162 is arranged outside and directly below the ink storage chamber 154. The member to be detected 162 is arranged outside the ink storage chamber 154. The member to be detected 162 is arranged inside the casing 165. The member to be detected 162 does not come into contact with the ink 59 stored in the ink storage chamber 154. The member to be detected 162 extends along the long side 151W of the casing 165. The member to be detected 162 is preferably made of a lightweight material that is harder than the pressure-sensitive film 161 and does not hinder the displacement of the pressure-sensitive film 161.
図8に示すように、被検出部材162は、ケーシング165の後面に支持されている。被検出部材162は、後端部を支点部(傾動中心)として傾動可能に構成されている。被検出部材162は、感圧膜161の撓み変形の度合いに連動して、インク貯留室154に近づく方向とインク貯留室154から遠ざかる方向と(図8の上下方向)に傾動する。これにより、被検出部材162の位置が変化する(すなわち変位する)。本実施形態において、被検出部材162は、第1遮蔽部P1と、第1遮蔽部P1の上端から上方に延びる第2遮蔽部P2と、第2遮蔽部P2の上端から上方に延びる第3遮蔽部P3と、を備えている。第1遮蔽部P1と第2遮蔽部P2とは、前端の位置が一致している。第2遮蔽部P2と第3遮蔽部P3とは、後端の位置が一致している。
As shown in FIG. 8, the detected member 162 is supported on the rear surface of the casing 165. The detected member 162 is configured to be tiltable with the rear end portion as a fulcrum portion (tilt center). The detected member 162 tilts in a direction approaching the ink storage chamber 154 and a direction away from the ink storage chamber 154 (vertical direction in FIG. 8) in conjunction with the degree of bending deformation of the pressure sensitive film 161. As a result, the position of the member to be detected 162 changes (that is, it is displaced). In the present embodiment, the detected member 162 has a first shielding portion P1, a second shielding portion P2 extending upward from the upper end of the first shielding portion P1, and a third shielding portion extending upward from the upper end of the second shielding portion P2. It is provided with a unit P3. The positions of the front ends of the first shielding portion P1 and the second shielding portion P2 are the same. The positions of the rear ends of the second shielding portion P2 and the third shielding portion P3 are the same.
付勢部材163は、感圧膜161に直接的または間接的に接触して、感圧膜161をインク貯留室154に近づける方向(図8の上方)に付勢する部材である。付勢部材163は、一端が被検出部材162の下面に固定され、他端がケーシング165の下面に固定されている。付勢部材163は、インク貯留室154の外部に配置されている。付勢部材163は、ケーシング165の内部に配置されている。付勢部材163は、インク貯留室154に貯留されているインク59と接触しない。付勢部材163は、従来この種の用途で使用されているものと同じでよく、特に制限はない。付勢部材163は、金属製であってもよい。付勢部材163は、弾性体であってもよい。付勢部材163は、本実施形態では円柱状のコイルバネである。付勢部材163は、圧縮された状態に維持されている。本実施形態において、付勢部材163は、被検出部材162を介して、感圧膜161をインク貯留室154に近づける方向に付勢している。
The urging member 163 is a member that directly or indirectly contacts the pressure-sensitive film 161 to urge the pressure-sensitive film 161 in the direction of approaching the ink storage chamber 154 (upper part of FIG. 8). One end of the urging member 163 is fixed to the lower surface of the detected member 162, and the other end is fixed to the lower surface of the casing 165. The urging member 163 is arranged outside the ink storage chamber 154. The urging member 163 is arranged inside the casing 165. The urging member 163 does not come into contact with the ink 59 stored in the ink storage chamber 154. The urging member 163 may be the same as that conventionally used for this type of application, and is not particularly limited. The urging member 163 may be made of metal. The urging member 163 may be an elastic body. The urging member 163 is a columnar coil spring in this embodiment. The urging member 163 is maintained in a compressed state. In the present embodiment, the urging member 163 urges the pressure sensitive film 161 in the direction of approaching the ink storage chamber 154 via the detected member 162.
センサ部164は、感圧膜161の位置を検出する部材である。本実施形態において、センサ部164は、被検出部材162の位置を検出することにより、感圧膜161の位置を間接的に検出するように構成されている。センサ部164は、インク貯留室154の外部に配置されている。センサ部164は、ケーシング165の内部に配置されている。センサ部164は、インク貯留室154に貯留されているインク59と接触しない。センサ部164は、制御装置80(図1参照)と電気的に接続されており、制御装置80によって制御される。
The sensor unit 164 is a member that detects the position of the pressure sensitive film 161. In the present embodiment, the sensor unit 164 is configured to indirectly detect the position of the pressure sensitive film 161 by detecting the position of the member to be detected 162. The sensor unit 164 is arranged outside the ink storage chamber 154. The sensor unit 164 is arranged inside the casing 165. The sensor unit 164 does not come into contact with the ink 59 stored in the ink storage chamber 154. The sensor unit 164 is electrically connected to the control device 80 (see FIG. 1) and is controlled by the control device 80.
本実施形態において、センサ部164は、第1センサS1および第2センサS2を備えている。第1センサS1および第2センサS2は、上下方向の位置が同じになるように、ケーシング165の壁面にそれぞれ固定されている。本実施形態において、第1センサS1および第2センサS2は、非接触式センサの一種である透過型のフォトセンサ(フォトインタラプタ)である。フォトセンサは応答時間が早いため、リアルタイムで精度よく検出を行うことができる。第1センサS1および第2センサS2は、それぞれ、左右方向に延びる光軸に沿って光を照射する発光部(図示せず)と、発光部から照射された光を受ける受光部と、を有している。発光部と受光部とは、遮蔽部162Dを挟みこむように、左右方向に対向配置されている。
In the present embodiment, the sensor unit 164 includes a first sensor S1 and a second sensor S2. The first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 are fixed to the wall surface of the casing 165 so that the positions in the vertical direction are the same. In the present embodiment, the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 are transmission type photo sensors (photo interrupters) which are a kind of non-contact type sensors. Since the photo sensor has a fast response time, it can perform accurate detection in real time. The first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 each have a light emitting unit (not shown) that irradiates light along an optical axis extending in the left-right direction, and a light receiving unit that receives light emitted from the light emitting unit. doing. The light emitting portion and the light receiving portion are arranged to face each other in the left-right direction so as to sandwich the shielding portion 162D.
インク貯留室154内のインク59が消費され、インク貯留室154内のインク量が減ると、インク貯留室154内のインク59の水頭圧が小さくなる。すると、付勢部材163の付勢力によって、感圧膜161の撓み変形が緩和される。そして、遮蔽部162Dがインク貯留室154に近づく方向(図8の上方)に移動すると、第3遮蔽部P3が第1センサS1の検出位置(発光部と受光部との間)に到達する。その結果、第1センサS1が、第3遮蔽部P3を検出するHIT状態となる。一方、第2センサS2はUNHIT状態となる。
When the ink 59 in the ink storage chamber 154 is consumed and the amount of ink in the ink storage chamber 154 decreases, the head pressure of the ink 59 in the ink storage chamber 154 decreases. Then, the bending deformation of the pressure sensitive film 161 is alleviated by the urging force of the urging member 163. Then, when the shielding unit 162D moves in the direction approaching the ink storage chamber 154 (upper part in FIG. 8), the third shielding unit P3 reaches the detection position (between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit) of the first sensor S1. As a result, the first sensor S1 is in the HIT state for detecting the third shielding portion P3. On the other hand, the second sensor S2 is in the UNHIT state.
インク貯留室154内のインク59がさらに消費されると、感圧膜161の撓み変形がさらに緩和される。そして、遮蔽部162Dがさらに上方に移動すると、第2遮蔽部P2が第1センサS1および第2センサS2の検出位置(発光部と受光部との間)に到達する。その結果、第1センサS1および第2センサS2が、いずれも第2遮蔽部P2を検出するHIT状態となる。インク貯留室154内のインク59がさらに消費されると、感圧膜161の撓み変形がさらに緩和される。そして、遮蔽部162Dがさらに上方に移動すると、第1遮蔽部P1が第2センサS2の検出位置(発光部と受光部との間)に到達する。その結果、第2センサS2が、第1遮蔽部P1を検出するHIT状態となる。一方、第1センサS1はUNHIT状態となる。
When the ink 59 in the ink storage chamber 154 is further consumed, the bending deformation of the pressure sensitive film 161 is further alleviated. Then, when the shielding unit 162D moves further upward, the second shielding unit P2 reaches the detection positions (between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit) of the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2. As a result, both the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 are in the HIT state in which the second shielding portion P2 is detected. When the ink 59 in the ink storage chamber 154 is further consumed, the bending deformation of the pressure sensitive film 161 is further alleviated. Then, when the shielding unit 162D moves further upward, the first shielding unit P1 reaches the detection position (between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit) of the second sensor S2. As a result, the second sensor S2 is in the HIT state for detecting the first shielding portion P1. On the other hand, the first sensor S1 is in the UNHIT state.
インク補充部190は、蓋体開口部313を介して、インク貯留部150に接続されている。インク補充部190は、インク補充用のサプライボトル400(図9参照)からインク59を継ぎ足し可能なように構成されている。本実施形態において、インク補充部190は、サプライボトル400が着脱可能に構成されている。このため、ユーザが補充用のサプライボトルを手で持ってインクを流し入れる場合と比べて、インク59をこぼして無駄にしたり、プリンタ10の周囲が汚れたりすることが生じにくい。サプライボトル400は、補充用のインク59が収容された補充容器の一例である。サプライボトル400をインク補充部190に装着することにより、サプライボトル400に収容されたインク59がインク貯留部150に移動される。また、サプライボトル400をインク補充部190から取り外すことにより、空になったサプライボトル400を回収することができる。
The ink replenishment unit 190 is connected to the ink storage unit 150 via the lid opening 313. The ink replenishment unit 190 is configured so that the ink 59 can be replenished from the ink replenishment supply bottle 400 (see FIG. 9). In the present embodiment, the ink replenishment unit 190 is configured such that the supply bottle 400 can be attached and detached. Therefore, as compared with the case where the user holds the supply bottle for replenishment by hand and pours the ink, it is less likely that the ink 59 is spilled and wasted or the periphery of the printer 10 is contaminated. The supply bottle 400 is an example of a replenishment container containing the replenishment ink 59. By mounting the supply bottle 400 on the ink replenishment unit 190, the ink 59 contained in the supply bottle 400 is moved to the ink storage unit 150. Further, by removing the supply bottle 400 from the ink replenishment unit 190, the empty supply bottle 400 can be recovered.
図9は、サプライボトル400の縦断面図である。図9では、サプライボトル400を、典型的な市場流通時の状態で表している。なお、以下の説明においてサプライボトル400の方向を示す際には、特に断らない限り、サプライボトル400がインク補充部190に装着されるときの方向を使用する。市場流通時のサプライボトル400は、インク補充部190に装着するときの方向とは上下が反転している。しかし、これはサプライボトル400の設置態様等を限定するものではない。サプライボトル400は、インク59が収容される容器本体410と、容器本体410の一端に設けられ、インク補充部190に取り付けられるボトル側接続部420と、容器本体410に取り付けられ、市場流通時にボトル側接続部420を覆うキャップ430と、を有している。
FIG. 9 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the supply bottle 400. In FIG. 9, the supply bottle 400 is represented in a typical market distribution state. In the following description, when the direction of the supply bottle 400 is indicated, the direction when the supply bottle 400 is mounted on the ink replenishment unit 190 is used unless otherwise specified. The supply bottle 400 at the time of market distribution is upside down from the direction when it is attached to the ink replenishment unit 190. However, this does not limit the installation mode of the supply bottle 400 and the like. The supply bottle 400 is attached to a container body 410 containing ink 59, a bottle-side connecting portion 420 provided at one end of the container body 410 and attached to the ink replenishing unit 190, and a container body 410, and is a bottle at the time of market distribution. It has a cap 430 that covers the side connection portion 420.
容器本体410は、下方部分が上方部分よりも細くなった略円筒形状を有している。容器本体410は、中空構造である。サプライボトル400の容積は、典型的にはインク貯留室154の容積よりも小さい。特に限定されるものではないが、サプライボトル400に収容されているインク59の容量は、概ね250mL以上、典型的には300~1000mL、例えば500mLでありうる。これにより、インク59の継ぎ足し回数の低減と、インク補充時におけるユーザの作業負荷軽減と、をバランスすることができる。容器本体410は、第1ストレート部411と、テーパ部412と、第2ストレート部413と、突出部414と、前端部415と、を有している。第1ストレート部411は、容器本体410の上方部分を構成している。第1ストレート部411は、上下方向に延びる円筒状に形成されている。第1ストレート部411は、上端を塞ぐ天面を有している。
The container body 410 has a substantially cylindrical shape in which the lower portion is thinner than the upper portion. The container body 410 has a hollow structure. The volume of the supply bottle 400 is typically smaller than the volume of the ink reservoir 154. Although not particularly limited, the capacity of the ink 59 contained in the supply bottle 400 can be approximately 250 mL or more, typically 300 to 1000 mL, for example 500 mL. As a result, it is possible to balance the reduction in the number of times the ink 59 is replenished and the reduction in the workload of the user when replenishing the ink. The container body 410 has a first straight portion 411, a tapered portion 412, a second straight portion 413, a protruding portion 414, and a front end portion 415. The first straight portion 411 constitutes an upper portion of the container body 410. The first straight portion 411 is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the vertical direction. The first straight portion 411 has a top surface that closes the upper end.
第1ストレート部411の下方には、テーパ部412が連続している。テーパ部412は、装着機構192へ挿入する方向(ここでは下方)に向かって狭まるように傾斜している。テーパ部412は、下方に向かって狭まるように傾斜している。テーパ部412の外周面は、ここでは円錐面に形成されている。ただし、テーパ部412の形状は円錐面には限定されず、例えば球面の一部のようにR形状に形成されていてもよい。テーパ部412の外周面は、装着機構192によって保持される被保持面412aを形成している。
A tapered portion 412 is continuous below the first straight portion 411. The tapered portion 412 is inclined so as to narrow in the direction of insertion into the mounting mechanism 192 (here, downward). The tapered portion 412 is inclined so as to narrow downward. The outer peripheral surface of the tapered portion 412 is formed here as a conical surface. However, the shape of the tapered portion 412 is not limited to the conical surface, and may be formed in an R shape such as a part of a spherical surface. The outer peripheral surface of the tapered portion 412 forms a held surface 412a held by the mounting mechanism 192.
テーパ部412の下方には、第2ストレート部413が連続している。第2ストレート部413も円筒状に形成されている。第2ストレート部413の直径は、第1ストレート部411の直径よりも小さい。第2ストレート部413の下方には、突出部414が設けられている。突出部414も円筒状に形成されている。突出部414の直径は、第2ストレート部413の直径よりも大きく構成されている。突出部414の下方には前端部415が設けられている。本実施形態では、前端部415は、第2ストレート部413と同じ直径の円筒状に形成されている。突出部414は、サプライボトル400の径方向に関して第2ストレート部413および前端部415よりも突出している。容器本体410は、第2ストレート部413と突出部414との間に形成された第1段差面414aと、突出部414と前端部415との間に形成された第2段差面414bと、を備えている。第1段差面414aは、突出部414の上面を構成し、上方を向いている。第2段差面414bは、突出部414の下面を構成し、下方を向いている。
The second straight portion 413 is continuous below the tapered portion 412. The second straight portion 413 is also formed in a cylindrical shape. The diameter of the second straight portion 413 is smaller than the diameter of the first straight portion 411. A protruding portion 414 is provided below the second straight portion 413. The protruding portion 414 is also formed in a cylindrical shape. The diameter of the protruding portion 414 is larger than the diameter of the second straight portion 413. A front end portion 415 is provided below the protrusion 414. In the present embodiment, the front end portion 415 is formed in a cylindrical shape having the same diameter as the second straight portion 413. The protruding portion 414 protrudes from the second straight portion 413 and the front end portion 415 in the radial direction of the supply bottle 400. The container body 410 has a first stepped surface 414a formed between the second straight portion 413 and the protruding portion 414, and a second stepped surface 414b formed between the protruding portion 414 and the front end portion 415. I have. The first stepped surface 414a constitutes the upper surface of the protruding portion 414 and faces upward. The second stepped surface 414b constitutes the lower surface of the protruding portion 414 and faces downward.
第1ストレート部411は、サプライボトル400の挿入方向に関して容器本体410全体の半分以上の長さを占めている。そのため、第1段差面414aは、サプライボトル400の挿入方向の中心よりも挿入方向の前方側(図9の下側)に設けられている。詳しくは後述するように、第1段差面414aは、後述するロック機構290(図10参照)が係合する係合部である。ロック機構290は、サプライボトル400の上方への動きを規制する機構である。サプライボトル400は、インク補充部190に装着されると、ロック機構290により、挿入方向の半分よりも下側で保持される。ただし、第1ストレート部411は容器本体410全体の半分以上の長さを占めていなくてもよく、サプライボトル400は、必ずしも挿入方向の半分よりも前方側で保持されなくてもよい。
The first straight portion 411 occupies more than half the length of the entire container body 410 with respect to the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400. Therefore, the first stepped surface 414a is provided on the front side (lower side of FIG. 9) in the insertion direction with respect to the center of the supply bottle 400 in the insertion direction. As will be described in detail later, the first stepped surface 414a is an engaging portion with which the lock mechanism 290 (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is engaged. The lock mechanism 290 is a mechanism that regulates the upward movement of the supply bottle 400. When the supply bottle 400 is attached to the ink replenishment unit 190, the supply bottle 400 is held by the lock mechanism 290 below the half in the insertion direction. However, the first straight portion 411 does not have to occupy more than half the length of the entire container body 410, and the supply bottle 400 does not necessarily have to be held on the front side of the half in the insertion direction.
容器本体410の下端、すなわち前端部415の下端には、ボトル側接続部420が設けられている。ボトル側接続部420は、装着機構192にサプライボトル400が装着されたときに、後述するタンク側接続部300(図10参照)に接続される部位である。ボトル側接続部420は、容器本体410の挿入方向側の端部(下端)に開口したインク注入口421と、インク注入口421に設けられた封止フィルム422と、を有している。インク注入口421の周縁部、ここではインク注入口421の内周面には、タンク側接続部300の受側テーパ面215a1(図10参照)に対応した傾斜を有するボトル側テーパ面421aが形成されている。このボトル側テーパ面421aと装着機構192の受側テーパ面315a1との嵌合により、ボトル側接続部420とタンク側接続部300との間の水平方向の位置が位置合わせされる。
A bottle-side connecting portion 420 is provided at the lower end of the container body 410, that is, at the lower end of the front end portion 415. The bottle-side connection portion 420 is a portion connected to the tank-side connection portion 300 (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, when the supply bottle 400 is mounted on the mounting mechanism 192. The bottle-side connecting portion 420 has an ink injection port 421 opened at an end (lower end) on the insertion direction side of the container body 410, and a sealing film 422 provided at the ink injection port 421. A bottle-side tapered surface 421a having an inclination corresponding to the receiving-side tapered surface 215a1 (see FIG. 10) of the tank-side connecting portion 300 is formed on the peripheral edge of the ink injection port 421, here, the inner peripheral surface of the ink injection port 421. Has been done. By fitting the bottle-side tapered surface 421a and the receiving-side tapered surface 315a1 of the mounting mechanism 192, the horizontal positions between the bottle-side connecting portion 420 and the tank-side connecting portion 300 are aligned.
本実施形態では、容器本体410は定型性を有し、インク59の収容量にかかわらず上記した形状を維持するように構成されている。サプライボトル400は、装着機構192に保持され、係合される。また、詳しくは後述するが、サプライボトル400は、装着機構192に設けられた弁体210(図10参照)を押圧する。そのため、サプライボトル400は、パウチのような可撓性を有する態様には構成されず、定型性を有するように構成されている。容器本体410のインクと接する部分、ここでは容器本体410の全体は、インクと化学反応することがないように樹脂によって形成されている。好適には、容器本体410は、インク59に耐性を有しかつ遮光性を有する樹脂、例えば不透明のポリプロピレン(PP)によって形成されているとよい。インク59が光硬化性である場合、光を効果的に遮断できることから、容器本体410の外観は黒色または茶色であるよい。
In the present embodiment, the container body 410 has a fixed shape and is configured to maintain the above-mentioned shape regardless of the capacity of the ink 59. The supply bottle 400 is held and engaged by the mounting mechanism 192. Further, as will be described in detail later, the supply bottle 400 presses the valve body 210 (see FIG. 10) provided in the mounting mechanism 192. Therefore, the supply bottle 400 is not configured to have flexibility like a pouch, but is configured to have stylistic properties. The portion of the container body 410 that comes into contact with the ink, here the entire container body 410, is formed of resin so as not to chemically react with the ink. Preferably, the container body 410 is formed of a resin having resistance to ink 59 and light-shielding property, for example, opaque polypropylene (PP). When the ink 59 is photocurable, the appearance of the container body 410 may be black or brown because it can effectively block light.
ボトル側テーパ面421aの上方には、封止フィルム422がインク注入口421を塞ぐように張られている。封止フィルム422は、例えばインク注入口421の周縁に熱溶着されている。封止フィルム422により、サプライボトル400はインク59を収容した状態で密封される。市場流通時において、封止フィルム422は、容器本体410のインク注入口421を気密に封止している。封止フィルム222は、例えばポリプロピレン(PP)やポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)等の樹脂製のフィルムや、アルミ箔等の金属製の箔等によって形成されている。
A sealing film 422 is stretched above the tapered surface 421a on the bottle side so as to close the ink injection port 421. The sealing film 422 is heat-welded to the periphery of the ink injection port 421, for example. The sealing film 422 seals the supply bottle 400 with the ink 59 contained therein. At the time of market distribution, the sealing film 422 airtightly seals the ink injection port 421 of the container body 410. The sealing film 222 is formed of, for example, a resin film such as polypropylene (PP) or polyethylene terephthalate (PET), a metal foil such as aluminum foil, or the like.
図6に示すように、インク補充部190は、補充口カバー191と、装着機構192と、を備えている。補充口カバー191は、装着機構192の上方、具体的には後述する挿入部270および開口部163Oの上方を覆っている。補充口カバー191は、装着機構192に埃やごみが混入することを防ぐ部材である。インク59が光硬化性である場合、補充口カバー191は、装着機構192に光が侵入することを防止する部材でもある。ユーザは、インクタンク151のインク59が少なくなったときに、補充口カバー191を開いて装着機構192にサプライボトル400を差し入れ、インク59を継ぎ足す。
As shown in FIG. 6, the ink replenishment unit 190 includes a replenishment port cover 191 and a mounting mechanism 192. The replenishment port cover 191 covers the upper part of the mounting mechanism 192, specifically, the upper part of the insertion portion 270 and the opening portion 163O described later. The replenishment port cover 191 is a member that prevents dust and dirt from entering the mounting mechanism 192. When the ink 59 is photocurable, the refill port cover 191 is also a member that prevents light from entering the mounting mechanism 192. When the ink 59 in the ink tank 151 is low, the user opens the refill port cover 191 and inserts the supply bottle 400 into the mounting mechanism 192 to add the ink 59.
図1に示すように、補充口カバー191は、本体部12および操作パネル19Cよりも下方に配置されている。補充口カバー191は、インクヘッド20の下面20aよりも下方に配置されている。上下方向において、補充口カバー191の上端とインクヘッド20の下面20aとの間隔は、概ね50~200mm、例えば100~150mmでありうる。これにより、例えばインクヘッド20をメンテナンス位置に移動してインクヘッド20のメンテナンスを行う際に、インク供給装置70A~70Hを取り外す必要がない。このため、メンテナンス時の作業性を向上することができる。
As shown in FIG. 1, the replenishment port cover 191 is arranged below the main body 12 and the operation panel 19C. The replenishment port cover 191 is arranged below the lower surface 20a of the ink head 20. In the vertical direction, the distance between the upper end of the replenishment port cover 191 and the lower surface 20a of the ink head 20 may be approximately 50 to 200 mm, for example, 100 to 150 mm. As a result, for example, when the ink head 20 is moved to the maintenance position and the ink head 20 is maintained, it is not necessary to remove the ink supply devices 70A to 70H. Therefore, workability during maintenance can be improved.
図2に示すように、補充口カバー191は、プラテン14の前端14tよりも上方に配置されている。補充口カバー191は、ケーシング19よりも前方に設けられている。補充口カバー191は、インク供給装置70A~70Hの前後方向における中心線CLよりも前方に配置されている。補充口カバー191の少なくとも一部(ここでは全部)は、本体部12よりも前方に位置している。
As shown in FIG. 2, the replenishment port cover 191 is arranged above the front end 14t of the platen 14. The replenishment port cover 191 is provided in front of the casing 19. The replenishment port cover 191 is arranged in front of the center line CL in the front-rear direction of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H. At least a part (here, all) of the replenishment port cover 191 is located in front of the main body portion 12.
図5に示すように、平面視において、補充口カバー191の少なくとも一部は、ケーシング19と重なっていない。本実施形態では、平面視において、補充口カバー191がケーシング19と一切重なっておらず、完全に露出している。補充口カバー191は、蓋体開口部313の真上に配置されている。補充口カバー191が平面視において露出していることで、インクタンク151を移動させることなくインクタンク151にインク59を継ぎ足すことができる。したがって、プリンタ10を使用している最中(例えば、印刷中)にも、インク59を継ぎ足すことができる。
As shown in FIG. 5, in a plan view, at least a part of the replenishment port cover 191 does not overlap with the casing 19. In the present embodiment, the replenishment port cover 191 does not overlap the casing 19 at all in a plan view and is completely exposed. The replenishment port cover 191 is arranged directly above the lid opening 313. Since the replenishment port cover 191 is exposed in a plan view, the ink 59 can be added to the ink tank 151 without moving the ink tank 151. Therefore, the ink 59 can be added even while the printer 10 is being used (for example, during printing).
装着機構192は、ユーザが、サプライボトル400を挿入可能なように構成されている。詳しくは、装着機構192は、サプライボトル400の容器本体410を、封止フィルム422で封止された状態のまま挿入可能なように構成されている。このため、ユーザが封止フィルム422を自ら取り外す場合と比べて、インク59をこぼして無駄にしたり、プリンタ10の周囲を汚したりする事態が生じにくい。特に限定されるものではないが、装着機構192は、例えば、ポリエチレン(PE)やポリプロピレン(PP)、ポリアセタール(POM)、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)等の樹脂材料で形成されている。装着機構192のうち、サプライボトル400が接する部分は、摺動性のよい樹脂、例えばPOMで形成されているとよい。装着機構192は、インク供給装置70A~70Hの上側部分に設けられている。装着機構192は、インクタンク151よりも上方に設けられている。サプライボトル400のインク59は、重力の作用により、装着機構192を経由してインクタンク151に移動される。
The mounting mechanism 192 is configured so that the user can insert the supply bottle 400. Specifically, the mounting mechanism 192 is configured so that the container body 410 of the supply bottle 400 can be inserted while being sealed with the sealing film 422. Therefore, as compared with the case where the user removes the sealing film 422 by himself / herself, it is less likely that the ink 59 is spilled and wasted or the periphery of the printer 10 is soiled. Although not particularly limited, the mounting mechanism 192 is formed of, for example, a resin material such as polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), polyacetal (POM), or polyethylene terephthalate (PET). The portion of the mounting mechanism 192 that comes into contact with the supply bottle 400 may be made of a highly slidable resin, for example, POM. The mounting mechanism 192 is provided on the upper portion of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H. The mounting mechanism 192 is provided above the ink tank 151. The ink 59 of the supply bottle 400 is moved to the ink tank 151 via the mounting mechanism 192 by the action of gravity.
図10は、図8の装着機構192の付近を拡大した縦断面図である。図10に示すように、装着機構192は、挿入部270と、保持機構280と、タンク側接続部300と、を備えている。挿入部270は、サプライボトル400と最初に当接する部位である。タンク側接続部300は、挿入部270の開口271よりもサプライボトル400の挿入方向に設けられている。タンク側接続部300は、サプライボトル400が接続される部位である。保持機構280は、挿入部270の側方および上方に設けられている。保持機構280は、サプライボトル400をタンク側接続部300と接続された状態で保持する機構である。本実施形態において、保持機構280は、容器本体410の軸線が鉛直方向に沿うようにサプライボトル400を支持する。ただし、保持機構280は、容器本体410の軸線が鉛直方向から傾くようにサプライボトル400を支持してもよい。
FIG. 10 is an enlarged vertical cross-sectional view of the vicinity of the mounting mechanism 192 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the mounting mechanism 192 includes an insertion portion 270, a holding mechanism 280, and a tank-side connecting portion 300. The insertion portion 270 is a portion that first comes into contact with the supply bottle 400. The tank-side connection portion 300 is provided in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400 with respect to the opening 271 of the insertion portion 270. The tank side connection portion 300 is a portion to which the supply bottle 400 is connected. The holding mechanism 280 is provided on the side and above the insertion portion 270. The holding mechanism 280 is a mechanism for holding the supply bottle 400 in a state of being connected to the tank side connecting portion 300. In the present embodiment, the holding mechanism 280 supports the supply bottle 400 so that the axis of the container body 410 is along the vertical direction. However, the holding mechanism 280 may support the supply bottle 400 so that the axis of the container body 410 is tilted from the vertical direction.
図10に示すように、挿入部270は、サプライボトル400が挿入される筒状の部材である。挿入部270は円筒状に形成され、サプライボトル400の突出部214よりもわずかに大きい直径を有している。挿入部270は、上下方向に延びている。挿入部270は、上方に向かって開口する開口271を有しており、上方からサプライボトル400を挿入可能なように構成されている。
As shown in FIG. 10, the insertion portion 270 is a tubular member into which the supply bottle 400 is inserted. The insertion portion 270 is formed in a cylindrical shape and has a diameter slightly larger than that of the protrusion 214 of the supply bottle 400. The insertion portion 270 extends in the vertical direction. The insertion portion 270 has an opening 271 that opens upward, and is configured so that the supply bottle 400 can be inserted from above.
保持機構280は、挿入部270よりも上方に配置された入口部281と、挿入部270の側方に設けられたロック機構290と、を備えている。入口部281は、サプライボトル400の被保持面412aに対応するように傾斜した保持面281aを有している。保持面281aは、サプライボトル400の挿入方向の後側(図10の上側)に向かって広がる傾斜を有している。保持面281aは、円錐面に形成されている。保持面281aは、挿入部270の開口271に隣接している。保持面281aは、開口271から上方に向かって広がると共に、上方に向かって開口している。なお、保持面281aは、サプライボトル400の被保持面412aと同じ材料によって形成されている。保持面281aは、樹脂材料によって形成されている。これにより、保持面281aを被保持面412aと硬度が大きく異なる材料(例えば金属材料)で構成する場合に比べて、被保持面412aが摩耗したり破損したりすることを抑制することができる。ただし、保持面281aの材料は、サプライボトル400の被保持面412aと同じでなくてもよい。
The holding mechanism 280 includes an inlet portion 281 arranged above the insertion portion 270 and a lock mechanism 290 provided on the side of the insertion portion 270. The inlet 281 has a holding surface 281a that is inclined so as to correspond to the held surface 412a of the supply bottle 400. The holding surface 281a has an inclination that widens toward the rear side (upper side in FIG. 10) of the supply bottle 400 in the insertion direction. The holding surface 281a is formed on a conical surface. The holding surface 281a is adjacent to the opening 271 of the insertion portion 270. The holding surface 281a extends upward from the opening 271 and opens upward. The holding surface 281a is made of the same material as the held surface 412a of the supply bottle 400. The holding surface 281a is formed of a resin material. As a result, it is possible to prevent the held surface 412a from being worn or damaged as compared with the case where the holding surface 281a is made of a material (for example, a metal material) having a hardness significantly different from that of the held surface 412a. However, the material of the holding surface 281a does not have to be the same as the held surface 412a of the supply bottle 400.
ロック機構290は、タンク側接続部300と接続された状態のサプライボトル400が挿入方向と逆方向に動くことを規制する機構である。本実施形態では、ロック機構290が、ストッパ部としての機能も果たしている。すなわち、ロック機構290は、挿入部270にサプライボトル400を差し込んだだけでは、サプライボトル400がタンク側接続部300に接続されないように、サプライボトル400の落下を留めるように構成されている。言い換えれば、ロック機構290は、サプライボトル400が自重だけでタンク側接続部300に接続されることを防止している。
The lock mechanism 290 is a mechanism that regulates the movement of the supply bottle 400 in a state of being connected to the tank side connection portion 300 in the direction opposite to the insertion direction. In the present embodiment, the lock mechanism 290 also functions as a stopper portion. That is, the lock mechanism 290 is configured to stop the supply bottle 400 from falling so that the supply bottle 400 is not connected to the tank side connection portion 300 simply by inserting the supply bottle 400 into the insertion portion 270. In other words, the lock mechanism 290 prevents the supply bottle 400 from being connected to the tank side connection portion 300 only by its own weight.
図10に示すように、ロック機構290のストッパ291がサプライボトル400を支持している状態では、サプライボトル400の先端のボトル側接続部420は、タンク側接続部300よりも上方に位置している。ロック機構290は、タンク側接続部300よりもサプライボトル400の挿入方向の後側(図10の上側)に設けられている。なお、ストッパ部としての機能を考慮しなければ、ロック機構290の位置は、タンク側接続部300よりもサプライボトル400の挿入方向の後側には限定されない。
As shown in FIG. 10, when the stopper 291 of the lock mechanism 290 supports the supply bottle 400, the bottle-side connection portion 420 at the tip of the supply bottle 400 is located above the tank-side connection portion 300. There is. The lock mechanism 290 is provided on the rear side (upper side in FIG. 10) of the supply bottle 400 in the insertion direction with respect to the tank side connection portion 300. If the function as a stopper is not taken into consideration, the position of the lock mechanism 290 is not limited to the rear side of the tank side connection portion 300 in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400.
図10に示すように、ロック機構290は、ストッパ291と、第1付勢部材292と、ロック解除スイッチ293と、を備えている。ストッパ291は、挿入部270の内周面273に開口した側孔274に挿通されている。ストッパ291は、略水平方向に延びている。ストッパ291は、挿入部270の径方向に移動可能に構成されている。本実施形態において、ストッパ291は、挿入部270の内周面273よりも径方向の内側に突出し、挿入部270に挿入されたサプライボトル400と当接する位置(以下、ロック位置Prと呼ぶ)と、ロック位置Prよりも挿入部270の径方向の外側であって挿入部270に挿入されたサプライボトル400が側方を通過可能な位置(図13を参照、以下、アンロック位置Puと呼ぶ)と、に移動可能に構成されている。以下では、ストッパ291が挿入部270の内周面273よりも径方向の内側に突出した状態をロック状態、ストッパ291が挿入部270の内周面273よりも径方向の外側に退避した状態をアンロック状態とも呼ぶ。
As shown in FIG. 10, the lock mechanism 290 includes a stopper 291, a first urging member 292, and an unlock switch 293. The stopper 291 is inserted into a side hole 274 opened in the inner peripheral surface 273 of the insertion portion 270. The stopper 291 extends in a substantially horizontal direction. The stopper 291 is configured to be movable in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270. In the present embodiment, the stopper 291 protrudes inward in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface 273 of the insertion portion 270 and comes into contact with the supply bottle 400 inserted into the insertion portion 270 (hereinafter, referred to as a lock position Pr). , A position outside the insertion portion 270 in the radial direction of the lock position Pr and allowing the supply bottle 400 inserted into the insertion portion 270 to pass laterally (see FIG. 13, hereinafter referred to as an unlock position Pu). And, it is configured to be movable. In the following, the state in which the stopper 291 protrudes inward in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface 273 of the insertion portion 270 is locked, and the state in which the stopper 291 retracts to the outside in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface 273 of the insertion portion 270. Also called unlocked state.
第1付勢部材292は、ストッパ291がロック位置Prに保持されるようにストッパ291を付勢している。サプライボトル400が装着機構192に装着されていない状態では、ストッパ291はロック位置Prに位置している。なお、アンロック位置Puは、ストッパ291の全部が挿入部270の内周面273よりも径方向の外側に退避した位置であってもよく、挿入部270の内周面273よりも径方向の内側にストッパ291の一部が突出した位置であってもよい。
The first urging member 292 urges the stopper 291 so that the stopper 291 is held at the lock position Pr. When the supply bottle 400 is not mounted on the mounting mechanism 192, the stopper 291 is located at the lock position Pr. The unlock position Pu may be a position where the entire stopper 291 is retracted to the outside in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface 273 of the insertion portion 270, and is radially outside the inner peripheral surface 273 of the insertion portion 270. It may be a position where a part of the stopper 291 protrudes inward.
ストッパ291は、第1付勢部材292の付勢力を受けるバネ受面291aを備えている。バネ受面291aは、上下方向に延びている。第1付勢部材292は、ここではコイルスプリングである。第1付勢部材292は、圧縮された状態で設けられている。ただし、第1付勢部材292はコイルスプリングに限定されるわけではなく、板バネ等であってもよい。第1付勢部材292は、水平方向に延びている。第1付勢部材292は、バネ受面291aとそれに対向するように装着機構192に設けられた鉛直面290aとの間で圧縮されている。そこで、第1付勢部材292は、ストッパ291を挿入部270の径方向内側に向かって押圧している。
The stopper 291 includes a spring receiving surface 291a that receives the urging force of the first urging member 292. The spring receiving surface 291a extends in the vertical direction. The first urging member 292 is, here, a coil spring. The first urging member 292 is provided in a compressed state. However, the first urging member 292 is not limited to the coil spring, and may be a leaf spring or the like. The first urging member 292 extends in the horizontal direction. The first urging member 292 is compressed between the spring receiving surface 291a and the vertical surface 290a provided on the mounting mechanism 192 so as to face the spring receiving surface 291a. Therefore, the first urging member 292 presses the stopper 291 inward in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270.
ストッパ291の挿入部270内に突出する部分は、ストッパ291がロック状態にあるときにサプライボトル400が挿入部270に挿入されるとサプライボトル400に当接する受力部291bを有している。受力部291bは、サプライボトル400の挿入方向に沿って挿入部270の径方向の外方側から内方側に向かって傾斜した傾斜面291b1を有している。傾斜面291b1は、上方を向いている。挿入部270にサプライボトル400を挿入すると、傾斜面291b1にはサプライボトル400の前端部215の外周部(以下、第1押圧部215aとも呼ぶ)が当接する。サプライボトル400の自重だけではストッパ291はアンロック位置Puまで後退しないため、サプライボトル400を下方に向かって押し込まない限り、サプライボトル400はストッパ291に支持される。第1押圧部215aは、ストッパ291の受力部291bに当接し、受力部291bを下方に向かって押圧するサプライボトル400の押圧部の1つである。
The portion of the stopper 291 that protrudes into the insertion portion 270 has a receiving portion 291b that comes into contact with the supply bottle 400 when the supply bottle 400 is inserted into the insertion portion 270 while the stopper 291 is in the locked state. The receiving portion 291b has an inclined surface 291b1 inclined from the outward side to the inward side in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270 along the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400. The inclined surface 291b1 faces upward. When the supply bottle 400 is inserted into the insertion portion 270, the outer peripheral portion (hereinafter, also referred to as the first pressing portion 215a) of the front end portion 215 of the supply bottle 400 comes into contact with the inclined surface 291b1. Since the stopper 291 does not retract to the unlocked position Pu only by the weight of the supply bottle 400, the supply bottle 400 is supported by the stopper 291 unless the supply bottle 400 is pushed downward. The first pressing portion 215a is one of the pressing portions of the supply bottle 400 that abuts on the receiving portion 291b of the stopper 291 and presses the receiving portion 291b downward.
言い換えれば、第1付勢部材292は、受力部291bがサプライボトル400の挿入方向に向かって所定の力を受けるとアンロック状態に移行するようにストッパ291を付勢しており、受力部291bが受ける力が上記所定の力よりも小さい場合には、ストッパ291をアンロック位置Puよりも内側に保持する。上記所定の力は、インク59が収容された状態のサプライボトル400の重さよりも大きい。上記所定の力は、容量の半分以上のインク59が収容されたときのサプライボトル400の重さよりも大きいことが好ましく、容量一杯までインク59が収容されたときのサプライボトル400の重さよりも大きいことがより好ましい。なお、サプライボトル400の重さによりストッパ291は挿入部270の径方向外側に後退するが、それでもアンロック位置Puよりも内側の位置に維持され、第1押圧部415aに当接する。
In other words, the first urging member 292 urges the stopper 291 so that when the receiving portion 291b receives a predetermined force in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400, the stopper 291 shifts to the unlocked state. When the force received by the portion 291b is smaller than the predetermined force, the stopper 291 is held inside the unlock position Pu. The predetermined force is larger than the weight of the supply bottle 400 in which the ink 59 is contained. The predetermined force is preferably larger than the weight of the supply bottle 400 when the ink 59 having a capacity of half or more is contained, and is larger than the weight of the supply bottle 400 when the ink 59 is contained to the full capacity. Is more preferable. Although the stopper 291 retracts radially outward of the insertion portion 270 due to the weight of the supply bottle 400, it is still maintained at a position inside the unlock position Pu and abuts on the first pressing portion 415a.
ロック解除スイッチ293は、棒状に形成され、上下方向に延びている。ロック解除スイッチ293は、サプライボトル400の挿入方向、ここでは下方に押込み可能に構成されている。ロック解除スイッチ293の下面293aは、サプライボトル400の挿入方向に沿って挿入部270の径方向の外方側から内方側に向かって傾斜している。ロック解除スイッチ293の傾斜した下面293aは、ストッパ291に設けられた突起部291cによって下方から支持されている。突起部291cは、左右方向に延びる略円柱状に形成されている。
The unlock switch 293 is formed in a rod shape and extends in the vertical direction. The unlock switch 293 is configured to be pushable downward in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400, here. The lower surface 293a of the unlock switch 293 is inclined from the outer side to the inner side in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270 along the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400. The inclined lower surface 293a of the lock release switch 293 is supported from below by the protrusion 291c provided on the stopper 291. The protrusion 291c is formed in a substantially columnar shape extending in the left-right direction.
ロック解除スイッチ293の上面293bは、装着機構192のロック解除スイッチ293付近の部分よりも上方に突出している。ロック解除スイッチ293の上面293bは、ユーザによって押下されることが可能に構成されている。ロック解除スイッチ293は、挿入部270と並んで配置されている。本実施形態では、ロック解除スイッチ293は、挿入部270の前方に並んで配置されている。
The upper surface 293b of the lock release switch 293 protrudes upward from the portion of the mounting mechanism 192 near the lock release switch 293. The upper surface 293b of the unlock switch 293 is configured to be pressed by the user. The unlock switch 293 is arranged side by side with the insertion portion 270. In the present embodiment, the unlock switches 293 are arranged side by side in front of the insertion portion 270.
図13は、ロック解除スイッチ293が押下された状態を示す縦断面図である。ストッパ291の突起部291cは、ストッパ291がロック位置Prに位置しているときにロック解除スイッチ293を押し込むと、ロック解除スイッチ293の傾斜した下面293aによって挿入部270の径方向の外方側に向かって押される。これにより、ストッパ291が挿入部270の径方向の外方側に後退する。ロック解除スイッチ293が所定の距離以上押し込まれると、ストッパ291はアンロック位置Puまで移動する。
FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the unlock switch 293 is pressed. When the lock release switch 293 is pushed in while the stopper 291 is located at the lock position Pr, the protrusion 291c of the stopper 291 is moved outward in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270 by the inclined lower surface 293a of the lock release switch 293. Pushed towards. As a result, the stopper 291 retracts outward in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270. When the unlock switch 293 is pushed in by a predetermined distance or more, the stopper 291 moves to the unlock position Pu.
本実施形態では、ロック解除スイッチ293とストッパ291の突起部291cが、第1付勢部材292の付勢力に抗してストッパ291をアンロック位置Puに移動させる解除機構を構成している。解除機構は、ロック解除スイッチ293をサプライボトル400の挿入方向に押す力を、ストッパ291を挿入部270の径方向の外方に移動させる力に変換する。このことにより、解除機構は、ストッパ291をアンロック位置Puに移動させる。本実施形態では、ロック解除スイッチ293の傾斜した下面293aとストッパ291の略円柱状の突起部291cとが、ロック解除スイッチ293をサプライボトル400の挿入方向に押す力を、ストッパ291を挿入部270の径方向の外方に移動させる力に変換する方向転換部を構成している。ただし、解除機構の構成はこのようなものに限定されるわけではない。
In the present embodiment, the lock release switch 293 and the protrusion 291c of the stopper 291 constitute an release mechanism for moving the stopper 291 to the unlock position Pu against the urging force of the first urging member 292. The release mechanism converts the force that pushes the lock release switch 293 in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400 into a force that moves the stopper 291 radially outward of the insertion portion 270. As a result, the release mechanism moves the stopper 291 to the unlock position Pu. In the present embodiment, the inclined lower surface 293a of the unlock switch 293 and the substantially cylindrical protrusion 291c of the stopper 291 exert a force to push the unlock switch 293 in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400, and the stopper 291 is inserted into the insertion portion 270. It constitutes a direction change part that converts the force to move outward in the radial direction of. However, the configuration of the release mechanism is not limited to such a mechanism.
本実施形態に係る挿入部270は、挿入部270内に突出した突起275を備えている。突起275は、本実施形態では、挿入部270の上端付近に設けられている。突起275の上下方向の位置は特に限定されないが、本実施形態では、装着機構192に装着された状態のサプライボトル400の突出部214よりも上方である。突起275は、例えば、弾性を有するゴムによって形成されている。突起275は、サプライボトル400を挿入部270へ挿入する時にはサプライボトル400を通過させることが可能であって、かつ、サプライボトル400がタンク側接続部300に接続された状態では、挿入方向視においてサプライボトル400の一部と重なるように構成されている。本実施形態では、突起275は、サプライボトル400がタンク側接続部300に接続された状態では、上方から見てサプライボトル400の突出部214と重なるように構成されている。
The insertion portion 270 according to the present embodiment includes a protrusion 275 protruding into the insertion portion 270. In the present embodiment, the protrusion 275 is provided near the upper end of the insertion portion 270. The vertical position of the protrusion 275 is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, it is above the protrusion 214 of the supply bottle 400 mounted on the mounting mechanism 192. The protrusion 275 is formed of, for example, elastic rubber. The protrusion 275 allows the supply bottle 400 to pass through when the supply bottle 400 is inserted into the insertion portion 270, and when the supply bottle 400 is connected to the tank side connection portion 300, the protrusion 275 is viewed in the insertion direction. It is configured to overlap a part of the supply bottle 400. In the present embodiment, the protrusion 275 is configured to overlap the protrusion 214 of the supply bottle 400 when viewed from above when the supply bottle 400 is connected to the tank side connection portion 300.
突起275の存在にもかかわらず挿入部270にサプライボトル400を挿入する方法は特に限定されないが、例えば、弾性を有する突起275を変形させて挿入部270にサプライボトル400を挿入してもよい。または、サプライボトル400を突起275とは逆側に寄せて挿入部270に挿入することにより突起275を避けてもよい。または、サプライボトル400を傾けて挿入部270に挿入することにより突起275を避けてもよい。また、上記した方法のうちの2つ以上が併用されてもよい。タンク側接続部300に接続された状態からサプライボトル400を真上に移動させると、サプライボトル400の突出部214は突起275に衝突し、突起275からの抵抗を受けることになる。
The method of inserting the supply bottle 400 into the insertion portion 270 despite the presence of the protrusion 275 is not particularly limited, but for example, the supply bottle 400 may be inserted into the insertion portion 270 by deforming the elastic protrusion 275. Alternatively, the protrusion 275 may be avoided by moving the supply bottle 400 to the side opposite to the protrusion 275 and inserting it into the insertion portion 270. Alternatively, the protrusion 275 may be avoided by tilting the supply bottle 400 and inserting it into the insertion portion 270. In addition, two or more of the above methods may be used in combination. When the supply bottle 400 is moved directly upward from the state of being connected to the tank side connection portion 300, the protruding portion 214 of the supply bottle 400 collides with the protrusion 275 and receives resistance from the protrusion 275.
なお、本実施形態では平面視において突起275と重なるサプライボトル400の部位は突出部214であるが、平面視において突起275と重なるサプライボトル400の部位はどこであってもよい。
In the present embodiment, the portion of the supply bottle 400 that overlaps the protrusion 275 in the plan view is the protrusion 214, but the portion of the supply bottle 400 that overlaps the protrusion 275 in the plan view may be anywhere.
タンク側接続部300は、挿入部270の底部272に設けられている。図10に示すように、タンク側接続部300は、インク通路301と、弁体310と、弁体当接部302と、第2付勢部材303と、を備えている。インク通路301は、弁体310より下方であってインク貯留室154よりも上方の空間である。インク通路301はインク貯留室154と連通している。インク通路301は、サプライボトル400が接続される弁体310とインク貯留室154とを接続する。本実施形態において、インク通路301は、インク貯留室154と弁体310との間の空間である。
The tank side connection portion 300 is provided at the bottom portion 272 of the insertion portion 270. As shown in FIG. 10, the tank-side connecting portion 300 includes an ink passage 301, a valve body 310, a valve body contact portion 302, and a second urging member 303. The ink passage 301 is a space below the valve body 310 and above the ink storage chamber 154. The ink passage 301 communicates with the ink storage chamber 154. The ink passage 301 connects the valve body 310 to which the supply bottle 400 is connected and the ink storage chamber 154. In the present embodiment, the ink passage 301 is a space between the ink storage chamber 154 and the valve body 310.
弁体310は、挿入部270とインク通路301との間に設けられている。弁体310は、サプライボトル400が挿入部270に挿入された場合にサプライボトル400と接続される接続端としての針部311を備えている。弁体310は、サプライボトル400が装着機構192に装着または離脱されるのに対応して、針部311とインク通路301との間を開放または閉鎖する開閉機構の一例である。弁体310は、針部311と、針部311に設けられた流入口312と、蓋体開口部313と、流入口312と蓋体開口部313とを接続する内部流路314と、を備えている。インク59は、弁体310の針部311と内部流路314とを介して挿入部270からインク通路301に移動する。
The valve body 310 is provided between the insertion portion 270 and the ink passage 301. The valve body 310 includes a needle portion 311 as a connection end that is connected to the supply bottle 400 when the supply bottle 400 is inserted into the insertion portion 270. The valve body 310 is an example of an opening / closing mechanism that opens or closes between the needle portion 311 and the ink passage 301 in response to the supply bottle 400 being attached to or detached from the attachment mechanism 192. The valve body 310 includes a needle portion 311 and an inflow port 312 provided in the needle portion 311 and a lid opening 313, and an internal flow path 314 connecting the inflow port 312 and the lid opening 313. ing. The ink 59 moves from the insertion portion 270 to the ink passage 301 via the needle portion 311 of the valve body 310 and the internal flow path 314.
針部311は、サプライボトル400が装着機構192に装着された状態においてサプライボトル400の封止フィルム222を貫通する尖った先端部311aを備えている。先端部311aは、上方に向かって直径が小さくなる円錐形状を有している。針部311は、封止フィルム222を突き破ることが可能に構成されている。針部311が封止フィルム222を貫通することにより、サプライボトル400の内部と弁体310の内部流路314とが連通する。針部311には、上方に向かって開口する複数の流入口312が形成されている。内部流路314は、流入口312から下方に向かって延びている。内部流路314は、弁体310を上下方向に貫通している。内部流路314の下端には、蓋体開口部313が開口している。
The needle portion 311 includes a sharp tip portion 311a that penetrates the sealing film 222 of the supply bottle 400 in a state where the supply bottle 400 is mounted on the mounting mechanism 192. The tip portion 311a has a conical shape in which the diameter decreases upward. The needle portion 311 is configured to be able to break through the sealing film 222. When the needle portion 311 penetrates the sealing film 222, the inside of the supply bottle 400 and the internal flow path 314 of the valve body 310 communicate with each other. A plurality of inflow ports 312 that open upward are formed in the needle portion 311. The internal flow path 314 extends downward from the inflow port 312. The internal flow path 314 penetrates the valve body 310 in the vertical direction. A lid opening 313 is opened at the lower end of the internal flow path 314.
弁体310は、サプライボトル400が挿入部270に挿入された場合にサプライボトル400が挿入される力を受ける当接部315aを備えている。ここでは、サプライボトル400が当接部315aに直接当接する。ただし、サプライボトル400は、他の部材を介して間接的に当接部315aに当接してもよい。当接部315aは、針部311の下端から水平方向に広がる円盤状の受力板315に設けられている。当接部315aは、受力板315の外周縁に形成され、サプライボトル400の挿入方向に対して傾斜している。詳しくは、当接部315aは、サプライボトル400の挿入方向に沿って径方向の内方側から外方側に向かって傾斜した受側テーパ面315a1を備えている。受側テーパ面315a1は、針部311の先端部311aよりも径方向の外方に設けられている。前述したように、受側テーパ面315a1は、サプライボトル400のインク注入口421に形成されたボトル側テーパ面421aに嵌合するように構成されている。弁体310は、サプライボトル400が挿入部270に押し込まれることにより、ボトル側テーパ面421aが受側テーパ面315a1を押下すると、下方に移動する。弁体310は、サプライボトル400の挿入部270への挿入方向およびその逆方向に移動可能に構成されている。
The valve body 310 includes a contact portion 315a that receives a force for inserting the supply bottle 400 when the supply bottle 400 is inserted into the insertion portion 270. Here, the supply bottle 400 comes into direct contact with the contact portion 315a. However, the supply bottle 400 may indirectly contact the contact portion 315a via another member. The contact portion 315a is provided on a disk-shaped receiving plate 315 extending in the horizontal direction from the lower end of the needle portion 311. The contact portion 315a is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the receiving plate 315 and is inclined with respect to the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400. Specifically, the contact portion 315a includes a receiving side tapered surface 315a1 that is inclined from the inner side to the outer side in the radial direction along the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400. The receiving side tapered surface 315a1 is provided on the outer side in the radial direction with respect to the tip portion 311a of the needle portion 311. As described above, the receiving side tapered surface 315a1 is configured to fit into the bottle side tapered surface 421a formed in the ink injection port 421 of the supply bottle 400. The valve body 310 moves downward when the supply bottle 400 is pushed into the insertion portion 270 and the bottle-side tapered surface 421a presses the receiving-side tapered surface 315a1. The valve body 310 is configured to be movable in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400 into the insertion portion 270 and in the opposite direction.
なお、本実施形態では、受側テーパ面315a1およびサプライボトル400のボトル側テーパ面421aは、サプライボトル400の挿入方向に沿って径方向の内方側から外方側に向かって傾斜していたが、サプライボトル400の挿入方向に沿って径方向の外方側から内方側に向かって傾斜していてもよい。受側テーパ面315a1およびサプライボトル400のボトル側テーパ面421aは、サプライボトル400の挿入方向に対して互いに対応するように傾斜していればよく、その向きや角度は限定されない。
In the present embodiment, the receiving side tapered surface 315a1 and the bottle side tapered surface 421a of the supply bottle 400 are inclined from the inner side to the outer side in the radial direction along the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400. However, it may be inclined from the outer side to the inner side in the radial direction along the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400. The receiving-side tapered surface 315a1 and the bottle-side tapered surface 421a of the supply bottle 400 may be inclined so as to correspond to the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400, and the orientation and angle thereof are not limited.
弁体310の下端には蓋部316が設けられている。図12は、サプライボトル400にストッパ291が係合した状態を示す縦断面図である。サプライボトル400のストッパ291への係合については後述するが、図12に示すように弁体310は、サプライボトル400によって下方に押されると挿入部270に対して下方に移動するように構成されている。蓋部316は、蓋体開口部313と上下方向に離間している。針部311、内部流路314、および受力板315が形成された弁体310の上部と蓋部316とは、連結部317によって連結されている。連結部317は、上端が弁体310の上部に接続され、下端が蓋部316に接続されている。蓋部316は、円盤状に形成され、連結部317の下端から水平方向に広がっている。
A lid 316 is provided at the lower end of the valve body 310. FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the stopper 291 is engaged with the supply bottle 400. The engagement of the supply bottle 400 with the stopper 291 will be described later, but as shown in FIG. 12, the valve body 310 is configured to move downward with respect to the insertion portion 270 when pushed downward by the supply bottle 400. ing. The lid portion 316 is separated from the lid opening portion 313 in the vertical direction. The upper portion of the valve body 310 on which the needle portion 311, the internal flow path 314, and the receiving plate 315 are formed and the lid portion 316 are connected by a connecting portion 317. The upper end of the connecting portion 317 is connected to the upper portion of the valve body 310, and the lower end is connected to the lid portion 316. The lid portion 316 is formed in a disk shape and extends in the horizontal direction from the lower end of the connecting portion 317.
蓋部316の外周縁には、弁体側シール部316aが形成されている。弁体側シール部316aは、サプライボトル400の挿入方向に沿って径方向の内方側から外方側に向かう傾斜を有している。図12に示すように、装着機構192は、弁体側シール部316aと対応する傾斜を有するタンク側シール部302a1を備えている。タンク側シール部302a1は、挿入部270の底部272から下方に向かって延びる円筒状の弁体当接部302に設けられている。詳しくは、タンク側シール部302a1は、弁体当接部302の下端302aの内周縁に形成されている。図10に示すように、サプライボトル400が下方に向かって押されていないとき、弁体側シール部316aとタンク側シール部302a1とは当接している。サプライボトル400が下方に向かって押されていないとき、蓋体開口部313とインク通路301との間は、弁体側シール部316aとタンク側シール部302a1との当接により閉鎖されている。言い換えれば、この状態において、挿入部270とインク通路301との間は、弁体310により閉鎖されている。なお、ここでの閉鎖とは、インクまたは空気が通過できないようにシールすることでもよく、単に空気や光の通過を概ね防止する程度のことであってもよい。
A valve body side seal portion 316a is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the lid portion 316. The valve body side seal portion 316a has an inclination from the inner side to the outer side in the radial direction along the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400. As shown in FIG. 12, the mounting mechanism 192 includes a tank-side seal portion 302a1 having an inclination corresponding to the valve body-side seal portion 316a. The tank-side seal portion 302a1 is provided on a cylindrical valve body contact portion 302 extending downward from the bottom portion 272 of the insertion portion 270. Specifically, the tank-side seal portion 302a1 is formed on the inner peripheral edge of the lower end 302a of the valve body contact portion 302. As shown in FIG. 10, when the supply bottle 400 is not pushed downward, the valve body side seal portion 316a and the tank side seal portion 302a1 are in contact with each other. When the supply bottle 400 is not pushed downward, the lid opening 313 and the ink passage 301 are closed by the contact between the valve body side seal portion 316a and the tank side seal portion 302a1. In other words, in this state, the insertion portion 270 and the ink passage 301 are closed by the valve body 310. The closure here may be a seal to prevent the passage of ink or air, or may be merely to prevent the passage of air or light.
上記から理解されるように、弁体310は、挿入部270とインク通路301との間に設けられており、挿入部270とインク通路301との間を閉鎖する位置(以下、閉鎖位置Pcと呼ぶ、図10参照)と、挿入部270とインク通路301との間を開放する位置(以下、開放位置Poと呼ぶ、図12参照)と、に移動可能に構成されている。図10および図12に示すように、閉鎖位置Pcは、弁体310の可動範囲の最も上方であって、弁体側シール部316aとタンク側シール部302a1とが当接する弁体310の位置である。開放位置Poは閉鎖位置Pcよりも下方であって、弁体側シール部316aとタンク側シール部302a1とが離間する弁体310の位置である。弁体310が開放位置Poに位置しているとき、蓋体開口部313はインク通路301と接続される。それにより、挿入部270とインク通路301との間が開放される。
As can be understood from the above, the valve body 310 is provided between the insertion portion 270 and the ink passage 301, and is a position for closing between the insertion portion 270 and the ink passage 301 (hereinafter referred to as a closing position Pc). It is configured to be movable between a position called (see FIG. 10) and a position (hereinafter referred to as an opening position Po, see FIG. 12) that opens between the insertion portion 270 and the ink passage 301. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 12, the closed position Pc is the position of the valve body 310 which is the uppermost part of the movable range of the valve body 310 and in which the valve body side seal portion 316a and the tank side seal portion 302a1 come into contact with each other. .. The open position Po is below the closed position Pc, and is the position of the valve body 310 where the valve body side seal portion 316a and the tank side seal portion 302a1 are separated from each other. When the valve body 310 is located at the open position Po, the lid opening 313 is connected to the ink passage 301. As a result, the space between the insertion portion 270 and the ink passage 301 is opened.
一方、弁体310が閉鎖位置Pcに位置しているとき、蓋体開口部313はインク通路301と離間している。弁体側シール部316aは、弁体310が閉鎖位置Pcに位置しているときには蓋体開口部313とインク通路301との間に位置する。それにより、弁体側シール部316aは、蓋体開口部313とインク通路301との間を閉鎖する。
On the other hand, when the valve body 310 is located at the closed position Pc, the lid opening 313 is separated from the ink passage 301. The valve body side seal portion 316a is located between the lid opening 313 and the ink passage 301 when the valve body 310 is located at the closed position Pc. As a result, the valve body side seal portion 316a closes between the lid opening 313 and the ink passage 301.
第2付勢部材303は、弁体310が閉鎖位置Pcに保持されるように弁体310を付勢している。第2付勢部材303は、ここではコイルスプリングである。ただし、第2付勢部材303はコイルスプリングに限定されるわけではなく、例えば板バネ等でもよい。第2付勢部材303は、弁体310の受力板315の下面315bと、弁体当接部302に設けられたバネ座面302bとの間に圧縮された状態で配置されている。バネ座面302bは、受力板315の下面315bよりも下方に配置され、水平方向に広がっている。弁体310は、上方から押されていない状態では、第2付勢部材303の付勢力により閉鎖位置Pcに位置付けられている。
The second urging member 303 urges the valve body 310 so that the valve body 310 is held at the closed position Pc. The second urging member 303 is a coil spring here. However, the second urging member 303 is not limited to the coil spring, and may be, for example, a leaf spring or the like. The second urging member 303 is arranged in a compressed state between the lower surface 315b of the receiving plate 315 of the valve body 310 and the spring seat surface 302b provided on the valve body contact portion 302. The spring seat surface 302b is arranged below the lower surface 315b of the receiving plate 315 and extends in the horizontal direction. When the valve body 310 is not pushed from above, the valve body 310 is positioned at the closed position Pc by the urging force of the second urging member 303.
第2付勢部材303は、弁体310の当接部315aがサプライボトル400の挿入方向に向かって所定の力以上の力で押されると開放位置Poに移動するように弁体310を付勢している。弁体310は、当接部315aがサプライボトル400の挿入方向に向かって上記所定の力以上の力で押されると開放位置Poに移動する。そこで、サプライボトル400が装着機構192に装着されると、インク貯留室154とサプライボトル400の内部とが連通する。
The second urging member 303 urges the valve body 310 so that when the contact portion 315a of the valve body 310 is pushed in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400 with a force equal to or greater than a predetermined force, the valve body 310 moves to the open position Po. doing. The valve body 310 moves to the open position Po when the contact portion 315a is pushed in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400 with a force equal to or greater than the predetermined force. Therefore, when the supply bottle 400 is mounted on the mounting mechanism 192, the ink storage chamber 154 and the inside of the supply bottle 400 communicate with each other.
図10に示すように、バネ座面302bには、上下方向に貫通するバイパス通路304が設けられている。バイパス通路304は、挿入部270とインク通路301とを接続する。バイパス通路304は、弁体310の内部流路314とは別のルートで挿入部270とインク通路301とを接続する通路である。図10に示すように、弁体310は、閉鎖位置Pcにおいてバイパス通路304とインク通路301との間を閉鎖する。一方、弁体310は、開放位置Poにおいてバイパス通路304とインク通路301との間を開放する。これにより、サプライボトル400が装着機構192に装着されていないときにはバイパス通路304も閉鎖される。また、サプライボトル400が装着機構192に装着されるときにはバイパス通路304が開放される。バイパス通路304は、弁体310の流入口312よりも下方に配置されている。
As shown in FIG. 10, the spring seat surface 302b is provided with a bypass passage 304 penetrating in the vertical direction. The bypass passage 304 connects the insertion portion 270 and the ink passage 301. The bypass passage 304 is a passage that connects the insertion portion 270 and the ink passage 301 by a route different from the internal flow path 314 of the valve body 310. As shown in FIG. 10, the valve body 310 closes between the bypass passage 304 and the ink passage 301 at the closing position Pc. On the other hand, the valve body 310 opens between the bypass passage 304 and the ink passage 301 at the opening position Po. As a result, the bypass passage 304 is also closed when the supply bottle 400 is not mounted on the mounting mechanism 192. Further, when the supply bottle 400 is mounted on the mounting mechanism 192, the bypass passage 304 is opened. The bypass passage 304 is arranged below the inflow port 312 of the valve body 310.
以下では、サプライボトル400を装着機構192に装着し、取り外す手順について説明する。サプライボトル400を装着機構192に装着するために、まずユーザが補充口カバー191を開いて、挿入部270にサプライボトル400を挿入する。詳しくは、ユーザは、サプライボトル400の突出部214と挿入部270の突起275との衝突を回避するようにサプライボトル400を保持しながら、サプライボトル400を挿入部270に挿入する。サプライボトル400が挿入部270に挿入されると、サプライボトル400は図10の状態でいったん保持される。つまり、単にサプライボトル400を挿入部270内に落としただけでは、サプライボトル400は、タンク側接続部300に接続されない。これにより、意図しないサプライボトル400とタンク側接続部300との接続が抑制される。
The procedure for mounting and removing the supply bottle 400 on the mounting mechanism 192 will be described below. In order to mount the supply bottle 400 on the mounting mechanism 192, the user first opens the replenishment port cover 191 and inserts the supply bottle 400 into the insertion portion 270. Specifically, the user inserts the supply bottle 400 into the insertion portion 270 while holding the supply bottle 400 so as to avoid collision between the protrusion 214 of the supply bottle 400 and the protrusion 275 of the insertion portion 270. When the supply bottle 400 is inserted into the insertion portion 270, the supply bottle 400 is once held in the state shown in FIG. That is, the supply bottle 400 is not connected to the tank side connection portion 300 simply by dropping the supply bottle 400 into the insertion portion 270. As a result, the unintended connection between the supply bottle 400 and the tank side connection portion 300 is suppressed.
図11は、弁体310とサプライボトル400のインク注入口421とが当接した状態を示す縦断面図である。図12は、前述したように、サプライボトル400にストッパ291が係合した状態を示す縦断面図である。図10に示す状態からサプライボトル400を下方に向かって押し込むと、サプライボトル400と装着機構192との関係は、図11の状態を経て図12の状態に移行する。図12の状態では、ロック機構290により、サプライボトル400が装着機構192に固定されている。
FIG. 11 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the valve body 310 and the ink injection port 421 of the supply bottle 400 are in contact with each other. FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the stopper 291 is engaged with the supply bottle 400 as described above. When the supply bottle 400 is pushed downward from the state shown in FIG. 10, the relationship between the supply bottle 400 and the mounting mechanism 192 shifts to the state shown in FIG. 11 through the state shown in FIG. In the state of FIG. 12, the supply bottle 400 is fixed to the mounting mechanism 192 by the lock mechanism 290.
図10および図11から理解されるように、図10に示された状態からサプライボトル400を下方に向かって押し込むと、ストッパ291の傾斜面291b1がサプライボトル400の第1押圧部215aによって下方に向かって押され、傾斜面291b1の傾斜の効果によってストッパ291が挿入部270の径方向の外方に移動する。それにより、第1押圧部215aは傾斜面291b1よりも下方に移動し、ストッパ291はサプライボトル400の前端部215の側面に当接する。ここにおいて、意図しないサプライボトル400とタンク側接続部300との接続を抑制するストッパ部としてのロック機構290の役割は終了する。サプライボトル400とタンク側接続部300とを接続するためには、サプライボトル400を所定の力以上の力で下方に押し込むことが必要である。
As can be seen from FIGS. 10 and 11, when the supply bottle 400 is pushed downward from the state shown in FIG. 10, the inclined surface 291b1 of the stopper 291 is moved downward by the first pressing portion 215a of the supply bottle 400. Pushed toward, the stopper 291 moves outward in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270 due to the effect of the inclination of the inclined surface 291b1. As a result, the first pressing portion 215a moves below the inclined surface 291b1, and the stopper 291 abuts on the side surface of the front end portion 215 of the supply bottle 400. Here, the role of the lock mechanism 290 as a stopper portion for suppressing the unintended connection between the supply bottle 400 and the tank side connection portion 300 ends. In order to connect the supply bottle 400 and the tank side connection portion 300, it is necessary to push the supply bottle 400 downward with a force equal to or higher than a predetermined force.
図10の状態からサプライボトル400を下方に少し移動させると、弁体310の針部311の先端部311aがサプライボトル400の封止フィルム222に接触する。さらにサプライボトル400を下方に移動させると、針部311はサプライボトル400の封止フィルム222を突き破る。針部311に形成された流入口312がサプライボトル400の内部まで侵入すると、サプライボトル400の内部に収容されたインク59は流入口312に流入する。この過程で、インク59の一部は流入口312には流入せず、挿入部270の内部にこぼれ落ちる。本実施形態では、針部311がサプライボトル400の封止フィルム222を突き破っているとき、弁体310は第2付勢部材303の付勢により不動である。ただし、第2付勢部材303の付勢力は、針部311がサプライボトル400の封止フィルム222を突き破るときの抵抗よりも小さく設定されていてもよく、従って、このとき弁体310は下方に移動してもよい。言い換えれば、このときサプライボトル400とタンク側接続部300とは連通してもよい。
When the supply bottle 400 is slightly moved downward from the state shown in FIG. 10, the tip portion 311a of the needle portion 311 of the valve body 310 comes into contact with the sealing film 222 of the supply bottle 400. When the supply bottle 400 is further moved downward, the needle portion 311 breaks through the sealing film 222 of the supply bottle 400. When the inflow port 312 formed in the needle portion 311 penetrates into the inside of the supply bottle 400, the ink 59 contained in the supply bottle 400 flows into the inflow port 312. In this process, a part of the ink 59 does not flow into the inflow port 312 and spills into the insertion portion 270. In the present embodiment, when the needle portion 311 breaks through the sealing film 222 of the supply bottle 400, the valve body 310 is immobile due to the urging of the second urging member 303. However, the urging force of the second urging member 303 may be set to be smaller than the resistance when the needle portion 311 breaks through the sealing film 222 of the supply bottle 400, and therefore the valve body 310 is set downward at this time. You may move. In other words, at this time, the supply bottle 400 and the tank side connection portion 300 may communicate with each other.
図10の状態から図11の状態に移行する途中で、ストッパ291の傾斜面291b1は、サプライボトル400の突出部214の下方側の隅(サプライボトル400の挿入方向の前隅)214cに当接し、前隅214cにより下方に押圧される。前隅214cは、ストッパ291の受力部291bに当接し、受力部291bを押圧する第2押圧部である。ストッパ291は、前隅214cによって下方に向かって押され、傾斜面291b1の傾斜の効果によって挿入部270の径方向の外方に移動する。これにより、前隅214cは傾斜面291b1よりも下方に移動し、ストッパ291はサプライボトル400の突出部214の側面に当接する。
During the transition from the state of FIG. 10 to the state of FIG. 11, the inclined surface 291b1 of the stopper 291 abuts on the lower corner (front corner in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400) 214c of the protruding portion 214 of the supply bottle 400. , Pressed downward by the front corner 214c. The front corner 214c is a second pressing portion that comes into contact with the receiving portion 291b of the stopper 291 and presses the receiving portion 291b. The stopper 291 is pushed downward by the front corner 214c and moves outward in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270 due to the effect of the inclination of the inclined surface 291b1. As a result, the front corner 214c moves below the inclined surface 291b1, and the stopper 291 comes into contact with the side surface of the protrusion 214 of the supply bottle 400.
図11に示すように、ストッパ291がサプライボトル400の突出部214の側面に当接している間に、サプライボトル400のボトル側テーパ面421aは、弁体310の受側テーパ面315a1と当接する。これにより、サプライボトル400を下方に押し込む力が弁体310に直接伝達されるようになる。サプライボトル400を第2付勢部材303の付勢力よりも大きい力で押し込むと、弁体310は下方に移動する。これにより、弁体310は、例えば図12に示すように、閉鎖位置Pcから開放位置Poに移動する。その結果、サプライボトル400の内部とインク通路301とが連通する。これにより、サプライボトル400の内部のインク59がインク通路301に移動する。
As shown in FIG. 11, while the stopper 291 is in contact with the side surface of the protrusion 214 of the supply bottle 400, the bottle-side tapered surface 421a of the supply bottle 400 is in contact with the receiving-side tapered surface 315a1 of the valve body 310. .. As a result, the force for pushing the supply bottle 400 downward is directly transmitted to the valve body 310. When the supply bottle 400 is pushed in with a force larger than the urging force of the second urging member 303, the valve body 310 moves downward. As a result, the valve body 310 moves from the closed position Pc to the open position Po, for example, as shown in FIG. As a result, the inside of the supply bottle 400 and the ink passage 301 communicate with each other. As a result, the ink 59 inside the supply bottle 400 moves to the ink passage 301.
また、サプライボトル400のボトル側テーパ面421aと装着機構192の受側テーパ面315a1とが当接することにより、サプライボトル400の内部と挿入部270との間が閉鎖される。図10の状態と図11の状態との間においてはインク59の一部が挿入部270にこぼれ落ちていたが、これにより、挿入部270へのインク59の流入が止まる。
Further, when the bottle-side tapered surface 421a of the supply bottle 400 and the receiving-side tapered surface 315a1 of the mounting mechanism 192 come into contact with each other, the inside of the supply bottle 400 and the insertion portion 270 are closed. A part of the ink 59 spilled into the insertion portion 270 between the state of FIG. 10 and the state of FIG. 11, but this stops the inflow of the ink 59 into the insertion portion 270.
図12に示すように、弁体310が開放位置Poに移動すると、バイパス通路304とインク通路301との間も連通する。そこで、挿入部270とインク貯留室154とは、バイパス通路304およびインク通路301を介して連通する。その結果、図10の状態と図11の状態との間において挿入部270に流入したインク59は、バイパス通路304およびインク通路301を通って、インクタンク151のインク貯留室154に流入する。これにより、インクタンク151にインク59が補充される。
As shown in FIG. 12, when the valve body 310 moves to the open position Po, the bypass passage 304 and the ink passage 301 also communicate with each other. Therefore, the insertion portion 270 and the ink storage chamber 154 communicate with each other via the bypass passage 304 and the ink passage 301. As a result, the ink 59 that has flowed into the insertion portion 270 between the state of FIG. 10 and the state of FIG. 11 flows into the ink storage chamber 154 of the ink tank 151 through the bypass passage 304 and the ink passage 301. As a result, the ink tank 151 is replenished with ink 59.
図11の状態からさらにサプライボトル400を下方に押し込むと、サプライボトル400は図12に示すロック状態に移行する。図12に示すように、ロック状態では、突出部214はストッパ291よりもサプライボトル400の挿入方向の前方に位置している。ロック状態では、ストッパ291は、突出部214と第2ストレート部213との間に形成された第1段差面214aに当接している。第2ストレート部213は、サプライボトル400の挿入方向の後側において突出部214と隣接し、突出部214よりも径方向の大きさが小さく構成されている。そのため、突出部214と第2ストレート部213との間には、上方を向いた第1段差面214aが形成されている。ロック状態では、ストッパ291は、係合部としての第1段差面214aに当接することによりサプライボトル400が挿入方向の逆方向に移動することを規制する。
When the supply bottle 400 is further pushed downward from the state shown in FIG. 11, the supply bottle 400 shifts to the locked state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 12, in the locked state, the protruding portion 214 is located in front of the stopper 291 in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400. In the locked state, the stopper 291 is in contact with the first stepped surface 214a formed between the protruding portion 214 and the second straight portion 213. The second straight portion 213 is adjacent to the protruding portion 214 on the rear side in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400, and is configured to be smaller in diameter in the radial direction than the protruding portion 214. Therefore, a first stepped surface 214a facing upward is formed between the protruding portion 214 and the second straight portion 213. In the locked state, the stopper 291 restricts the supply bottle 400 from moving in the direction opposite to the insertion direction by abutting on the first stepped surface 214a as the engaging portion.
タンク側接続部300は、サプライボトル400と当接する接続端としての針部311と、針部311をサプライボトル400の挿入方向の逆方向に付勢する第2付勢部材303と、を備えている。ロック機構290のストッパ291は、サプライボトル400が針部311に当接している状態では、第1付勢部材292の付勢によって挿入部270の内周面273よりも内側に突出すると共に、サプライボトル400に設けられた係合部としての第1段差面214aに係合し、サプライボトル400が挿入方向の逆方向に移動することを規制する。ストッパ291がサプライボトル400の挿入方向の逆方向への移動を規制し、第2付勢部材303がサプライボトル400を挿入方向の逆方向に付勢することにより、サプライボトル400の一部は、ストッパ291と弁体310とによって上下から挟まれる。これにより、サプライボトル400が装着機構192に固定される。
The tank-side connecting portion 300 includes a needle portion 311 as a connection end that comes into contact with the supply bottle 400, and a second urging member 303 that urges the needle portion 311 in the direction opposite to the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400. There is. When the supply bottle 400 is in contact with the needle portion 311, the stopper 291 of the lock mechanism 290 protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface 273 of the insertion portion 270 due to the urging of the first urging member 292, and the supply It engages with the first stepped surface 214a as an engaging portion provided on the bottle 400, and restricts the supply bottle 400 from moving in the direction opposite to the insertion direction. The stopper 291 regulates the movement of the supply bottle 400 in the opposite direction of the insertion direction, and the second urging member 303 urges the supply bottle 400 in the opposite direction of the insertion direction, whereby a part of the supply bottle 400 is released. It is sandwiched from above and below by the stopper 291 and the valve body 310. As a result, the supply bottle 400 is fixed to the mounting mechanism 192.
なお、このとき、保持機構280の一部としての保持面281aは、サプライボトル400のテーパ部212に形成された被保持面412aを保持している。サプライボトル400の挿入方向に対して傾斜した保持面281aと被保持面412aとの当接により、サプライボトル400が回転しようとする力が受けられ、サプライボトル400の固定状態が安定する。ストッパ291は、本実施形態では、サプライボトル400の前方側にだけ設けられている。そのため、第2付勢部材303の付勢力により、サプライボトル400は、ストッパ291と当接している部位を軸に第2付勢部材303の付勢方向に回転しようとする。保持面281aと被保持面412aは、この回転力を受け止めている。ただし、上記回転力の一部は、保持機構280の入口部281の鉛直面によっても受け止められていてもよい。これにより、サプライボトル400を挿入方向に関して安定的に支持することができる。
At this time, the holding surface 281a as a part of the holding mechanism 280 holds the held surface 412a formed on the tapered portion 212 of the supply bottle 400. The contact between the holding surface 281a inclined with respect to the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400 and the held surface 412a receives a force for the supply bottle 400 to rotate, and the fixed state of the supply bottle 400 is stabilized. In this embodiment, the stopper 291 is provided only on the front side of the supply bottle 400. Therefore, due to the urging force of the second urging member 303, the supply bottle 400 tends to rotate in the urging direction of the second urging member 303 about the portion in contact with the stopper 291. The holding surface 281a and the held surface 412a receive this rotational force. However, a part of the rotational force may be received by the vertical plane of the inlet portion 281 of the holding mechanism 280. As a result, the supply bottle 400 can be stably supported in the insertion direction.
図2に示すように、サプライボトル400が保持機構280に保持された状態において、サプライボトル400の一部は、装着機構192の外側に位置している。詳しくは、サプライボトル400が保持機構280に保持された状態において、サプライボトル400の上下方向の半分以上の部分、例えば第1ストレート部411のほとんどは、装着機構192よりも外側に突出している。これにより、ユーザは、サプライボトル400の装着機構192よりも外側に突出した部分(ここでは、第1ストレート部411)を把持して、サプライボトル400を容易に着脱することができる。ただし、サプライボトル400は、保持機構280に保持された状態において、全部が装着機構192の内部に収容されてもよい。
As shown in FIG. 2, in a state where the supply bottle 400 is held by the holding mechanism 280, a part of the supply bottle 400 is located outside the mounting mechanism 192. Specifically, in a state where the supply bottle 400 is held by the holding mechanism 280, more than half of the vertical direction portion of the supply bottle 400, for example, most of the first straight portion 411 protrudes outward from the mounting mechanism 192. As a result, the user can easily attach / detach the supply bottle 400 by grasping the portion (here, the first straight portion 411) protruding outward from the mounting mechanism 192 of the supply bottle 400. However, the supply bottle 400 may be entirely housed inside the mounting mechanism 192 while being held by the holding mechanism 280.
装着機構192は、サプライボトル400が装着されたことを確認するためのセンサ等を備えていてもよい。プリンタ10は、例えば、サプライボトル400が装着確認後、所定の時間が経過すると、サプライボトル400を取り外すことを促す表示を表示するように構成されていてもよい。上記所定の時間は、サプライボトル400内のインク59が全てインクタンク151に移動するのに要する時間以上の時間である。サプライボトル400内のインク59が全てインクタンク151に移動するのに要する時間は予め測定されている。
The mounting mechanism 192 may be provided with a sensor or the like for confirming that the supply bottle 400 has been mounted. For example, the printer 10 may be configured to display a display prompting the removal of the supply bottle 400 after a predetermined time has elapsed after the supply bottle 400 is confirmed to be attached. The predetermined time is longer than the time required for all the ink 59 in the supply bottle 400 to move to the ink tank 151. The time required for all the ink 59 in the supply bottle 400 to move to the ink tank 151 is measured in advance.
サプライボトル400を装着機構192から取り外す際には、ロック解除スイッチ293が押下される。図13に示すように、ロック解除スイッチ293が押下されると、ストッパ291の突起部291cは、ロック解除スイッチ293の傾斜した下面293aによって挿入部270の径方向の外方側に向かって押される。これにより、ストッパ291が挿入部270の径方向の外方側に後退する。ロック解除スイッチ293が所定の距離以上押し込まれると、ストッパ291はアンロック位置Puまで移動する。これにより、サプライボトル400の固定が解除される。かかるロック解除機構の構成によれば、ロック解除スイッチ293を押下するという簡単な操作によってサプライボトル400の固定を解除することができる。
When removing the supply bottle 400 from the mounting mechanism 192, the lock release switch 293 is pressed. As shown in FIG. 13, when the unlock switch 293 is pressed, the protrusion 291c of the stopper 291 is pushed outward in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270 by the inclined lower surface 293a of the unlock switch 293. .. As a result, the stopper 291 retracts outward in the radial direction of the insertion portion 270. When the unlock switch 293 is pushed in by a predetermined distance or more, the stopper 291 moves to the unlock position Pu. As a result, the supply bottle 400 is released from being fixed. According to the configuration of the unlock mechanism, the supply bottle 400 can be unlocked by a simple operation of pressing the unlock switch 293.
ロック解除スイッチ293は、本実施形態では、挿入部270と並んで配置され、サプライボトル400の挿入方向に押込み可能に構成されている。そしてロック解除は、ロック解除スイッチ293を押下することにより行われる。そのため、ユーザにとって、ロックの解除方法が感覚的に分かりやすい。
In the present embodiment, the lock release switch 293 is arranged side by side with the insertion portion 270, and is configured to be able to be pushed in the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400. The lock is released by pressing the unlock switch 293. Therefore, the user can intuitively understand how to release the lock.
ロックが解除されたとき、サプライボトル400は、弁体310を介して第2付勢部材303の付勢力を受けている。そのため、ロックが解除されると、サプライボトル400は第2付勢部材303の付勢力を受け、挿入方向の逆方向に向かって移動される。挿入部270の突起275は、このサプライボトル400の移動を制限するために設けられている。突起275が設けられていなければ、ロックが解除されたとき、サプライボトル400が移動する速度が速すぎ、例えば、サプライボトル400に残ったインク59が飛散したり、サプライボトル400が飛翔してしまったりするおそれがある。突起275は、そのような問題を回避するために設けられている。突起275は、サプライボトル400がタンク側接続部300に接続された状態では、上方から見てサプライボトル400の突出部214と重なるように構成されている。そこで、タンク側接続部300に接続された状態からサプライボトル400のロックを解除すると、サプライボトル400の突出部214は突起275に衝突する。それによりサプライボトル400は突起275からの抵抗を受ける。その結果、サプライボトル400が装着機構192から離脱する速度が低減される。
When the lock is released, the supply bottle 400 receives the urging force of the second urging member 303 via the valve body 310. Therefore, when the lock is released, the supply bottle 400 receives the urging force of the second urging member 303 and is moved in the direction opposite to the insertion direction. The protrusion 275 of the insertion portion 270 is provided to limit the movement of the supply bottle 400. If the protrusion 275 is not provided, the supply bottle 400 moves too fast when the lock is released, for example, the ink 59 remaining in the supply bottle 400 scatters or the supply bottle 400 flies. There is a risk of chilling. The protrusion 275 is provided to avoid such a problem. The protrusion 275 is configured to overlap the protrusion 214 of the supply bottle 400 when viewed from above when the supply bottle 400 is connected to the tank side connection portion 300. Therefore, when the lock of the supply bottle 400 is released from the state of being connected to the tank side connection portion 300, the protruding portion 214 of the supply bottle 400 collides with the protrusion 275. As a result, the supply bottle 400 receives resistance from the protrusion 275. As a result, the speed at which the supply bottle 400 separates from the mounting mechanism 192 is reduced.
サプライボトル400と装着機構192との接続が解除されると、弁体310は再び閉鎖位置Pcに移動する。これにより、インクタンク151との連通が解除される。インク59が光硬化性である場合、光が照射されない状態で保管されることが好ましい。また、乾燥を防ぐため、インク59は、外気と触れない状態で保管されることがなお好ましい。本実施形態に係るプリンタ10は、サプライボトル400が装着機構192に装着されているとき以外は、弁体310がインク通路301と挿入部270との間を閉鎖するように構成されている。そのため、インクタンク151に収容されたインク59に光が照射されること、および外気に触れることを抑制できる。
When the connection between the supply bottle 400 and the mounting mechanism 192 is released, the valve body 310 moves to the closed position Pc again. As a result, the communication with the ink tank 151 is released. When the ink 59 is photocurable, it is preferably stored in a state where it is not irradiated with light. Further, in order to prevent drying, it is still preferable that the ink 59 is stored in a state where it does not come into contact with the outside air. The printer 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the valve body 310 closes between the ink passage 301 and the insertion portion 270 except when the supply bottle 400 is mounted on the mounting mechanism 192. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ink 59 contained in the ink tank 151 from being irradiated with light and being exposed to the outside air.
図14は、インク供給装置70G、70Hに、それぞれサプライボトル400a、400bを装着した状態の右側部19Rの正面図である。図15は、インク供給装置70G、70Hに、それぞれサプライボトル400a、400bを装着した状態のプリンタ10の右側面図である。図14、図15に示すように、プリンタ10は、複数のインク供給装置70G、70Hに対して、複数のサプライボトル400a、400bから同時にインク59を継ぎ足し可能なように構成されている。サプライボトル400a、400bは、サプライボトル400と同形状であり、相互に異なる色材を含んだインク59を収容している。
FIG. 14 is a front view of the right side portion 19R in a state where the supply bottles 400a and 400b are attached to the ink supply devices 70G and 70H, respectively. FIG. 15 is a right side view of the printer 10 in a state where the supply bottles 400a and 400b are attached to the ink supply devices 70G and 70H, respectively. As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the printer 10 is configured so that ink 59 can be simultaneously added to a plurality of ink supply devices 70G and 70H from a plurality of supply bottles 400a and 400b. The supply bottles 400a and 400b have the same shape as the supply bottle 400 and contain ink 59 containing different coloring materials.
図14、図15に示すように、サプライボトル400a、400bは、プリンタ10に装着されたとき、軸線が鉛直方向に沿うように上下方向に沿って延びている。サプライボトル400の上端は、操作パネル19Cよりも下方に位置している。これにより、ユーザは、インク59を継ぎ足している間にも、表示部19Dを確認したり、操作パネル19Cに情報を入力したりすることができる。図14に示すように、隣り合うサプライボトル400a、400bの間には、標準的なユーザの手指が入るように間隔DLが確保されている。間隔DLは、典型的にはサプライボトル400a、400bの直径以下であり、概ね20mm以上、例えば20~50mmであってもよい。これにより、ユーザは、隣り合うインク供給装置70G、70Hで同時にインク59が少なくなった場合に、サプライボトル400a、400bから同時にインク59を継ぎ足すことができる。
As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the supply bottles 400a and 400b are mounted on the printer 10, their axes extend in the vertical direction so as to be in the vertical direction. The upper end of the supply bottle 400 is located below the operation panel 19C. As a result, the user can check the display unit 19D and input information to the operation panel 19C even while the ink 59 is being added. As shown in FIG. 14, an interval DL is secured between adjacent supply bottles 400a and 400b so that a standard user's finger can be inserted. The interval DL is typically not less than or equal to the diameter of the supply bottles 400a and 400b, and may be approximately 20 mm or more, for example 20 to 50 mm. As a result, the user can add ink 59 from the supply bottles 400a and 400b at the same time when the ink 59 is reduced at the same time in the adjacent ink supply devices 70G and 70H.
制御装置80は、フィードモータ(図示せず)と、キャリッジ30のキャリッジモータ16aと、インクヘッド20の圧電素子と、送液ポンプ41のモータ42と、脱気装置43の真空ポンプ44と、圧力調整弁46と、インク量検出部160のセンサ部164と、に通信可能に接続されており、これらの動作を制御する。制御装置80のハードウェア構成は、特に限定されない。制御装置80は、例えば、印刷用データ等を受信するインターフェイス(I/F)と、制御プログラムの命令を実行する中央演算処理装置(CPU:central processing unit)と、CPUが実行するプログラム等を格納したROM(read only memory)と、プログラムを展開するワーキングエリアとして使用されるRAM(random access memory)と、を備えていてもよい。
The control device 80 includes a feed motor (not shown), a carriage motor 16a of the carriage 30, a piezoelectric element of the ink head 20, a motor 42 of the liquid feed pump 41, a vacuum pump 44 of the degassing device 43, and pressure. It is communicably connected to the regulating valve 46 and the sensor unit 164 of the ink amount detecting unit 160, and controls their operations. The hardware configuration of the control device 80 is not particularly limited. The control device 80 stores, for example, an interface (I / F) for receiving print data or the like, a central processing unit (CPU: central processing unit) for executing instructions of a control program, a program executed by the CPU, or the like. It may be provided with a CPU (read only memory) and a RAM (random access memory) used as a working area for deploying a program.
図1に示すように、制御装置80は、印刷制御部81と、判定部82と、通知部83と、を備えている。制御装置80の各部は、ソフトウェアによって構成されていてもよいし、ハードウェアによって構成されていてもよい。制御装置80の各部は、1つまたは複数のプロセッサによって実現されるものであってもよいし、回路に組み込まれるものであってもよい。
As shown in FIG. 1, the control device 80 includes a print control unit 81, a determination unit 82, and a notification unit 83. Each part of the control device 80 may be composed of software or hardware. Each part of the control device 80 may be realized by one or more processors, or may be incorporated in a circuit.
印刷制御部81は、印刷データに基づいて印刷動作を実行する制御部である。印刷制御部81は、フィードモータを制御することで、記録媒体5を前後方向(副走査方向)に搬送する。印刷制御部81は、キャリッジモータ16aを制御することで、キャリッジ30およびインクヘッド20の左右方向(主走査方向)への移動を制御する。印刷制御部81は、インクヘッド20の圧電素子を制御することで、ノズル21からのインク59の吐出を制御する。印刷制御部81は、送液ポンプ41のモータ42を制御することで、インク流路40へのインク59の流通と停止、および送液量を調整する。印刷制御部81は、脱気装置43の真空ポンプ44を制御することで、インク59を脱気する。印刷制御部81は、圧力調整弁46の開閉を制御することで、第6流路40fと第7流路40gとの連通状態を切り換えると共に、インクヘッド20およびインク流路40の圧力を調整する。
The print control unit 81 is a control unit that executes a print operation based on print data. The print control unit 81 conveys the recording medium 5 in the front-rear direction (sub-scanning direction) by controlling the feed motor. The print control unit 81 controls the movement of the carriage 30 and the ink head 20 in the left-right direction (main scanning direction) by controlling the carriage motor 16a. The print control unit 81 controls the ejection of ink 59 from the nozzle 21 by controlling the piezoelectric element of the ink head 20. The print control unit 81 controls the motor 42 of the liquid feed pump 41 to adjust the flow and stop of the ink 59 in the ink flow path 40 and the liquid feed amount. The print control unit 81 degass the ink 59 by controlling the vacuum pump 44 of the degassing device 43. By controlling the opening and closing of the pressure adjusting valve 46, the print control unit 81 switches the communication state between the sixth flow path 40f and the seventh flow path 40g, and adjusts the pressures of the ink head 20 and the ink flow path 40. ..
判定部82は、インク量検出部160のセンサ部164との通信結果に基づいて、インクタンク151内のインク量を判定する制御部である。判定部82は、第1センサS1の発光部および第2センサS2の発光部を制御して、光を照射する。判定部82には、第1センサS1の発光部および第2センサS2の受光部から受光量が入力される。判定部82は、第1センサS1、第2センサS2のそれぞれについて、受光量が予め定められた基準値以下に変化した場合に、センサがUNHIT状態からHIT状態に切り替わったことを検出する。基準値は、予め判定部82に記憶されている。
The determination unit 82 is a control unit that determines the amount of ink in the ink tank 151 based on the communication result of the ink amount detection unit 160 with the sensor unit 164. The determination unit 82 controls the light emitting unit of the first sensor S1 and the light emitting unit of the second sensor S2 to irradiate the light. The light receiving amount is input to the determination unit 82 from the light emitting unit of the first sensor S1 and the light receiving unit of the second sensor S2. The determination unit 82 detects that the sensor has switched from the UNHIT state to the HIT state when the light receiving amount changes to or less than a predetermined reference value for each of the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2. The reference value is stored in the determination unit 82 in advance.
通知部83は、判定部82の判定結果をユーザに通知する制御部である。ユーザへの通知方法は特に限定されない。通知部83は、例えば、プリンタ10の表示部19Dに文字やイラスト等でインクエンド状態であることを表示して、視覚的にユーザに対する通知を行ってもよい。通知部83は、例えば、ブザーやアナウンス等の音声で通知を行ってもよい。通知部83は、ユーザにインク59の補充を促す警告等を行ってもよい。
The notification unit 83 is a control unit that notifies the user of the determination result of the determination unit 82. The method of notifying the user is not particularly limited. For example, the notification unit 83 may display the display unit 19D of the printer 10 with characters, illustrations, or the like to indicate that the ink is in the ink end state, and visually notify the user. The notification unit 83 may give a notification by voice such as a buzzer or an announcement, for example. The notification unit 83 may issue a warning or the like urging the user to replenish the ink 59.
以上のように、プリンタ10では、従来デッドスペースとなっていた空間、例えば本体部12の下側の空間や、配管ボックス部18L、18Rの前方かつプラテン14の側方の空間の少なくとも一部を有効活用して、複数のインク供給装置70A~70Hが配置されている。このため、プリンタ10の省スペース化を図りつつ、大容量のインクタンク151の設置スペースを確保することができる。その結果、プリンタ10のデッドスペースを減らして、プリンタ10の設置面積を小さくすると共に、インクタンク151の大容量化を実現することができる。
As described above, in the printer 10, at least a part of the space that has been a dead space in the past, for example, the space under the main body 12 and the space in front of the piping boxes 18L and 18R and on the side of the platen 14 A plurality of ink supply devices 70A to 70H are arranged in effective use. Therefore, it is possible to secure the installation space of the large-capacity ink tank 151 while saving the space of the printer 10. As a result, the dead space of the printer 10 can be reduced, the installation area of the printer 10 can be reduced, and the capacity of the ink tank 151 can be increased.
また、プリンタ10では、平面視において、蓋体開口部(インク補充口)313の少なくとも一部(例えば全部)が、ケーシング(カバー体)19から露出している。具体的には、本体部12から露出している。これにより、ユーザは、例えばインクタンク151をプリンタ10から取り外したり前方に引き出したりすることなく、インクタンク151にインク59を継ぎ足すことができる。したがって、プリンタ10を使用している最中(例えば、印刷中)であっても、インク59を継ぎ足すことができる。
Further, in the printer 10, at least a part (for example, all) of the lid opening (ink replenishment port) 313 is exposed from the casing (cover body) 19 in a plan view. Specifically, it is exposed from the main body 12. This allows the user to add ink 59 to the ink tank 151 without, for example, removing the ink tank 151 from the printer 10 or pulling it forward. Therefore, the ink 59 can be added even while the printer 10 is being used (for example, during printing).
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、蓋体開口部(インク補充口)313は、インクタンク151の上面に設けられている。これにより、インク貯留室154に貯留可能なインク59の容量を増やすことができ、インクタンク151の大容量化を好適に実現することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the lid opening (ink replenishment port) 313 is provided on the upper surface of the ink tank 151. As a result, the capacity of the ink 59 that can be stored in the ink storage chamber 154 can be increased, and the capacity of the ink tank 151 can be suitably increased.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、平面視において、インクタンク151の少なくとも一部は、ケーシング(カバー体)19よりも前方に位置している。具体的には、本体部12よりも前方に位置している。これにより、ユーザは、プリンタ10の前方から、例えば表示部19Dや印刷の進行状況を確認しながら、インク59を継ぎ足すことができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, at least a part of the ink tank 151 is located in front of the casing (cover body) 19 in a plan view. Specifically, it is located in front of the main body 12. As a result, the user can add ink 59 from the front of the printer 10 while checking, for example, the display unit 19D and the progress of printing.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、平面視において、蓋体開口部(インク補充口)313の全体は、ケーシング(カバー体)19と重ならないように設けられている。具体的には、本体部12と重ならないように設けられている。これにより、ユーザのインク補充時の作業性を向上することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the entire lid opening (ink replenishment port) 313 is provided so as not to overlap the casing (cover body) 19 in a plan view. Specifically, it is provided so as not to overlap with the main body portion 12. This makes it possible to improve the workability of the user when refilling ink.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、蓋体開口部(インク補充口)313は、インクタンク151の前後方向における中心線CLよりも前方に設けられている。これにより、ユーザのインク補充時の作業性を向上することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the lid opening (ink replenishment port) 313 is provided in front of the center line CL in the front-rear direction of the ink tank 151. This makes it possible to improve the workability of the user when refilling ink.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、蓋体開口部(インク補充口)313は、ユーザの立位状態での腰の高さ以上の位置に設けられている。ユーザは腰を曲げて屈んだり、膝を曲げてしゃがんだりすることなく、インク59を補充することができる。したがって、ユーザのインク補充時の作業負荷を軽減することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the lid opening (ink replenishment port) 313 is provided at a position equal to or higher than the waist height in the standing state of the user. The user can replenish the ink 59 without bending and bending his hips or bending his knees and crouching. Therefore, the workload at the time of replenishing the ink of the user can be reduced.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、記録媒体を支持するプラテン14と、一端がインクタンク151に接続され他端がインクヘッド20に接続されたインク流路40と、をさらに備える。ケーシング(カバー体)19は、少なくとも一部がプラテン14の側方に配置され、インク流路40を構成する構成部品の少なくとも一部(例えば、送液ポンプ41、モータ42、脱気装置43、真空ポンプ44のうちの1つまたは2つ以上)を収容する配管ボックス部18L、18Rを備える。これにより、プリンタ10のデッドスペースをさらに削減して、プリンタ10の設置面積をより小さくすることができる。
The printer 10 of the present embodiment further includes a platen 14 that supports the recording medium, and an ink flow path 40 that has one end connected to the ink tank 151 and the other end connected to the ink head 20. At least a part of the casing (cover body) 19 is arranged on the side of the platen 14, and at least a part of the components constituting the ink flow path 40 (for example, the liquid feed pump 41, the motor 42, the degassing device 43, etc.) A piping box portion 18L, 18R for accommodating one or more of the vacuum pumps 44) is provided. As a result, the dead space of the printer 10 can be further reduced, and the installation area of the printer 10 can be made smaller.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、インクタンク151は、配管ボックス部18L、18Rに固定されている。これにより、例えばインクタンク151自体が着脱式あるいは移動式である場合に比べて、インクタンク151とインク流路40との接続不良が生じにくい。このため、安定してインクヘッド20にインク59を供給することができる。
In the printer 10 of this embodiment, the ink tank 151 is fixed to the piping box portions 18L and 18R. As a result, poor connection between the ink tank 151 and the ink flow path 40 is less likely to occur, as compared with the case where the ink tank 151 itself is detachable or movable, for example. Therefore, the ink 59 can be stably supplied to the ink head 20.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、ケーシング(カバー体)19がプラテン14の左側方から右側方まで延びている。具体的には、本体部12がプラテン14の左側方から右側方まで延びている。プラテン14の左側方および右側方には、それぞれインクタンク151が設けられている。これにより、プリンタ10のデッドスペースを有効に活用して、大容量のインクタンク151をプリンタ10にバランスよく配置することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the casing (cover body) 19 extends from the left side to the right side of the platen 14. Specifically, the main body 12 extends from the left side to the right side of the platen 14. Ink tanks 151 are provided on the left side and the right side of the platen 14, respectively. As a result, the dead space of the printer 10 can be effectively utilized, and the large-capacity ink tank 151 can be arranged in the printer 10 in a well-balanced manner.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、インク流路40を構成する構成部品の一部(例えば、圧力調整弁46)は、配管ボックス部18L、18Rよりも前方であって、かつ鉛直方向におけるケーシング(カバー体)19とインクタンク151との間に設けられている。具体的には、本体部12とインクタンク151との間に設けられている。これにより、プリンタ10のデッドスペースを有効に活用することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, a part of the component components (for example, the pressure adjusting valve 46) constituting the ink flow path 40 is a casing (cover) in front of the piping box portions 18L and 18R and in the vertical direction. It is provided between the body) 19 and the ink tank 151. Specifically, it is provided between the main body 12 and the ink tank 151. As a result, the dead space of the printer 10 can be effectively utilized.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、インク流路40は、インクを脱気する脱気装置43を備え、脱気装置43の少なくとも一部が、配管ボックス部18L、18Rの内部に設けられている。これにより、プリンタ10のデッドスペースを有効に活用することができる。脱気装置43は例えば真空ポンプ44を備え、概してサイズが大きくなりがちであるが、上記構成によれば、プリンタ10の設定面積が広がることを抑制することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the ink flow path 40 includes a degassing device 43 for degassing ink, and at least a part of the degassing device 43 is provided inside the piping box portions 18L and 18R. As a result, the dead space of the printer 10 can be effectively utilized. The degassing device 43 includes, for example, a vacuum pump 44, and tends to be generally large in size. However, according to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the set area of the printer 10.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、補充用のインク59が収容されたサプライボトル(補充容器)400が着脱可能に挿入される挿入部270と、蓋体開口部(インク補充口)313に連通され、挿入部270に挿入されたサプライボトル(補充容器)400が接続されるタンク側接続部(接続部)300と、サプライボトル(補充容器)400をタンク側接続部(接続部)300と接続された状態で保持する保持機構280と、をさらに備える。これにより、着脱式のサプライボトル(補充容器)400に収容されたインク59を、簡単にインクタンク151に補充することができる。したがって、インク59をこぼして無駄にしたり、プリンタ10の周囲を汚したりすることが抑えられる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 containing the replenishment ink 59 is connected to the insertion portion 270 into which the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 is detachably inserted and the lid opening (ink replenishment port) 313. The tank side connection part (connection part) 300 to which the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 inserted into the insertion part 270 is connected, and the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 are connected to the tank side connection part (connection part) 300. A holding mechanism 280 for holding in a state is further provided. As a result, the ink 59 contained in the removable supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 can be easily replenished to the ink tank 151. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ink 59 from being spilled and wasted, or to stain the periphery of the printer 10.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、タンク側接続部(接続部)300と蓋体開口部(インク補充口)313とを接続するインク通路301と、サプライボトル(補充容器)400の装着または離脱に対応してタンク側接続部(接続部)300とインク通路301との間を開放または閉鎖する弁体(開閉機構)310と、をさらに備える。これにより、サプライボトル(補充容器)400が装着機構192に装着されたときには、サプライボトル(補充容器)400の内部とインクタンク151のインク貯留室154とを連通させると共に、サプライボトル(補充容器)400が装着機構192に装着されていないときはインク貯留室154のインク59に埃やごみが混入したり光が照射されたりすることを抑制することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the ink passage 301 connecting the tank side connection portion (connection portion) 300 and the lid opening (ink replenishment port) 313 and the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 can be attached or detached. A valve body (opening / closing mechanism) 310 that opens or closes between the tank-side connecting portion (connecting portion) 300 and the ink passage 301 is further provided. As a result, when the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 is mounted on the mounting mechanism 192, the inside of the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 and the ink storage chamber 154 of the ink tank 151 are communicated with each other, and the supply bottle (replenishment container) is connected. When the 400 is not mounted on the mounting mechanism 192, it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from being mixed into the ink 59 of the ink storage chamber 154 and being irradiated with light.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、保持機構280は、ケーシング(カバー体)19の前方に配置されている。具体的には、本体部12および配管ボックス部18L、18Rの前方に配置されている。これにより、ユーザのインク補充時の作業性を向上することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the holding mechanism 280 is arranged in front of the casing (cover body) 19. Specifically, it is arranged in front of the main body portion 12 and the piping box portions 18L and 18R. This makes it possible to improve the workability of the user when refilling ink.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、ケーシング(カバー体)19の前面、具体的には本体部12の前面には、ユーザが印刷に関する情報を入力する操作パネル(入力部)19Cが設けられ、保持機構280は、操作パネル(入力部)19Cの前方に配置されており、保持機構280にサプライボトル(補充容器)400が保持された状態において、サプライボトル(補充容器)400の上端が、操作パネル(入力部)19Cよりも鉛直方向下方に位置するように構成されている。これにより、ユーザは、インク59を継ぎ足している間にも、操作パネル19Cに情報を入力することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, an operation panel (input unit) 19C for the user to input information related to printing is provided on the front surface of the casing (cover body) 19, specifically, the front surface of the main body unit 12, and is a holding mechanism. The 280 is arranged in front of the operation panel (input unit) 19C, and in a state where the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 is held by the holding mechanism 280, the upper end of the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 is the operation panel (replenishment container). Input unit) It is configured to be located below 19C in the vertical direction. As a result, the user can input information to the operation panel 19C even while the ink 59 is being added.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、ケーシング(カバー体)19の前面、具体的には本体部12の前面には、印刷に関する情報が表示される表示部19Dが設けられ、保持機構280は、表示部19Dの前方に配置されており、保持機構280にサプライボトル(補充容器)400が保持された状態において、サプライボトル(補充容器)400の上端が、表示部19Dよりも鉛直方向下方に位置するように構成されている。これにより、ユーザは、インク59を継ぎ足している間にも、表示部19Dを確認することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, a display unit 19D for displaying information related to printing is provided on the front surface of the casing (cover body) 19, specifically, the front surface of the main body unit 12, and the holding mechanism 280 is a display unit. It is arranged in front of the 19D, and when the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 is held by the holding mechanism 280, the upper end of the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 is located vertically below the display unit 19D. It is configured in. As a result, the user can check the display unit 19D even while the ink 59 is being added.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、インクタンク151の容積は、サプライボトル(補充容器)400の容積よりも大きい。これにより、大型のプリンタ10で一度に大量の印刷を行う場合等にも、印刷の途中でインク59を継ぎ足す回数が少なくて済む。また、夜間等に無人で印刷を継続する場合にも、インク切れが起きにくくなる。加えて、インク補充時のユーザの作業負荷を軽減することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the volume of the ink tank 151 is larger than the volume of the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400. As a result, even when a large amount of printing is performed at one time by the large printer 10, the number of times the ink 59 is added during printing can be reduced. In addition, when printing is continued unattended at night or the like, ink is less likely to run out. In addition, the workload of the user at the time of ink replenishment can be reduced.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、保持機構280が複数であり、複数の保持機構280は、左右方向に並設されており、複数の保持機構280にそれぞれサプライボトル(補充容器)400が保持された状態において、隣り合うサプライボトル(補充容器)400の間には、ユーザの手指が入る間隔DLが確保されるように構成されている。これにより、ユーザは、隣り合うインク供給装置70E~70Hで同時にインク59が少なくなった場合に、複数のサプライボトル400から同時にインク59を継ぎ足すことができる。したがって、インク59を効率的に継ぎ足すことができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, there are a plurality of holding mechanisms 280, and the plurality of holding mechanisms 280 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and supply bottles (replenishment containers) 400 are held in each of the plurality of holding mechanisms 280. In the state, the interval DL into which the user's finger enters is secured between the adjacent supply bottles (replenishment containers) 400. As a result, the user can add ink 59 from the plurality of supply bottles 400 at the same time when the ink 59 is reduced at the same time in the adjacent ink supply devices 70E to 70H. Therefore, the ink 59 can be added efficiently.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、サプライボトル(補充容器)400は、インク59が収容される容器本体410と、容器本体410の一端部に形成されたインク注入口421と、を備え、挿入部270は、上方に向かって開口し、上方からサプライボトル(補充容器)400を挿入するように構成されており、保持機構280は、インク注入口421が鉛直方向下方を向いた状態でサプライボトル(補充容器)400を保持するように構成されている。これにより、サプライボトル(補充容器)400のインク59は、自重によって下方(インク貯留室154の側)に移動する。そのため、サプライボトルからインクタンクにインクを移動させるための装置や機構が不要となる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 includes a container main body 410 in which the ink 59 is stored and an ink injection port 421 formed at one end of the container main body 410, and is provided with an insertion portion 270. Is configured to open upward and insert the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 from above, and the holding mechanism 280 is a supply bottle (replenishment) with the ink injection port 421 facing downward in the vertical direction. Container) is configured to hold 400. As a result, the ink 59 of the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 moves downward (on the side of the ink storage chamber 154) due to its own weight. Therefore, a device or mechanism for moving ink from the supply bottle to the ink tank becomes unnecessary.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、サプライボトル(補充容器)400は、挿入部270への挿入方向に向かって狭まるように傾斜した被保持面412aを備え、保持機構280は、被保持面412aと対応するように傾斜した保持面281aを備える。これにより、サプライボトル(補充容器)400を挿入方向に関して安定的に支持することができ、挿入方向に交差する方向に関してもサプライボトル(補充容器)400が倒れにくくなる。したがって、ユーザはインク59を継ぎ足している最中に、サプライボトル(補充容器)400から手を放し、別の作業を行うことができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 includes a held surface 412a inclined so as to narrow in the insertion direction into the insertion portion 270, and the holding mechanism 280 corresponds to the held surface 412a. The holding surface 281a is provided so as to be inclined. As a result, the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 can be stably supported in the insertion direction, and the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 is less likely to fall down in the direction intersecting the insertion direction. Therefore, the user can release the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 and perform another operation while adding the ink 59.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、保持面281aと被保持面412aとが同一の材料、例えば樹脂材料によって構成されている。これにより、例えば保持面281aおよび被保持面412aを硬度の大きく異なる材料(例えば樹脂材料と金属材料)で構成する場合に比べて、保持面281aまたは被保持面412aが、他方によって摩耗することを抑制することができる。また、サプライボトル400を軽量化することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the holding surface 281a and the held surface 412a are made of the same material, for example, a resin material. As a result, the holding surface 281a or the held surface 412a is worn by the other, as compared with the case where the holding surface 281a and the held surface 412a are made of materials having significantly different hardness (for example, a resin material and a metal material). It can be suppressed. In addition, the weight of the supply bottle 400 can be reduced.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、挿入部270へのサプライボトル(補充容器)400の挿入方向が鉛直方向であり、保持機構280は、鉛直方向に延在するようにサプライボトル(補充容器)400を保持するように構成されている。これにより、ユーザは、サプライボトル(補充容器)400の保持機構280から上方に突出した部分(例えば、第1ストレート部411)を把持して、サプライボトル400を装着機構192に容易に装着したり、サプライボトル400を装着機構192から容易に離脱させたりすることができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the insertion direction of the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 into the insertion portion 270 is the vertical direction, and the holding mechanism 280 inserts the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 so as to extend in the vertical direction. It is configured to hold. As a result, the user can easily mount the supply bottle 400 on the mounting mechanism 192 by grasping the portion (for example, the first straight portion 411) protruding upward from the holding mechanism 280 of the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400. , The supply bottle 400 can be easily detached from the mounting mechanism 192.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、保持機構280は、タンク側接続部(接続部)300と接続された状態のサプライボトル(補充容器)400が挿入部270への挿入方向の逆方向へ動くことを規制するロック機構290を備える。これにより、サプライボトル(補充容器)400とタンク側接続部300との接続をより安定させることができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the holding mechanism 280 causes the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 in a state of being connected to the tank side connection portion (connection portion) 300 to move in the direction opposite to the insertion direction into the insertion portion 270. It is provided with a locking mechanism 290 to regulate. Thereby, the connection between the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 and the tank side connection portion 300 can be made more stable.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、インクタンク151およびサプライボトル(補充容器)400のインクと接する部分は、いずれも樹脂材料によって形成されている。インク59が光硬化性インクであり、かつインクタンク151およびサプライボトル(補充容器)400のインクと接する部分が金属製であると、光硬化性インクと金属とが化学反応することがある。これにより、光硬化性インクが硬化することがある。インクタンク151およびサプライボトル(補充容器)400のインクと接する部分が樹脂製であると、光硬化性のインク59の硬化を抑えることができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the portions of the ink tank 151 and the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 in contact with the ink are both formed of a resin material. If the ink 59 is a photocurable ink and the portion of the ink tank 151 and the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 in contact with the ink is made of metal, the photocurable ink and the metal may chemically react with each other. This may cure the photocurable ink. When the portion of the ink tank 151 and the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 in contact with the ink is made of resin, the curing of the photocurable ink 59 can be suppressed.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、インクタンク151は、上方開口部(開口部)152Uと、上方開口部(開口部)152Uの周囲に設けられたフランジ部152Eと、を有するタンク本体(下部材)152と、タンク本体(下部材)152よりも上方に配置され、上方開口部(開口部)152Uを覆う板状部153Bと、蓋体(板状部)153の周囲に設けられたフランジ部153Eと、を有する蓋体(上部材)と、タンク本体(下部材)152のフランジ部152Eと蓋体(上部材)のフランジ部153Eとを結合するフランジ結合部158と、を備える。これにより、比較的簡便かつ低コストで、大容量のインクタンク151を製造することができる。また、構成をシンプルにでき、組み付けに要する工数を削減することができる。加えて、インク漏れのリスクを低減すると共に、インク量検出部160におけるインク量の検出精度を向上することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the ink tank 151 is a tank body (lower member) having an upper opening (opening) 152U and a flange portion 152E provided around the upper opening (opening) 152U. 152, a plate-shaped portion 153B arranged above the tank body (lower member) 152 and covering the upper opening (opening) 152U, and a flange portion 153E provided around the lid (plate-shaped portion) 153. It is provided with a lid body (upper member) having the above, and a flange connecting portion 158 for connecting the flange portion 152E of the tank body (lower member) 152 and the flange portion 153E of the lid body (upper member). As a result, the large-capacity ink tank 151 can be manufactured relatively easily and at low cost. In addition, the configuration can be simplified and the man-hours required for assembly can be reduced. In addition, the risk of ink leakage can be reduced, and the accuracy of detecting the amount of ink in the ink amount detecting unit 160 can be improved.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、インクタンク151が複数であり、複数のインクタンク151は、左右方向に並設されており、隣り合うインクタンク151のフランジ結合部158が、鉛直方向に偏位している。これにより、大容量のインクタンク151を左右方向にコンパクトに配置することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, there are a plurality of ink tanks 151, and the plurality of ink tanks 151 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and the flange coupling portions 158 of the adjacent ink tanks 151 are displaced in the vertical direction. ing. As a result, the large-capacity ink tank 151 can be compactly arranged in the left-right direction.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、平面視において、隣り合うインクタンク151のフランジ結合部158が、重なり幅OLで相互に重なっている。これにより、大容量のインクタンク151を左右方向にコンパクトに配置することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the flange coupling portions 158 of the adjacent ink tanks 151 are overlapped with each other in the overlapping width OL in the plan view. As a result, the large-capacity ink tank 151 can be compactly arranged in the left-right direction.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、インクタンク151は、上面に、インクタンク151の内部と大気とを連通する大気連通部153Aを備え、大気連通部153Aの少なくとも一部は、鉛直方向においてケーシング(カバー体)19との間に大気が流通可能な間隔を確保した状態で、ケーシング(カバー体)19の鉛直方向下方(ここでは真下)に配置されている。具体的には、本体部12との間に大気が流通可能な間隔を確保した状態で、配置されている。ユーザが大気連通部153Aの上にうっかり荷物等を置いたりすると、大気連通部153Aが完全に塞がれてしまったり、樹脂フィルム153Mが破損してしまったりするおそれがある。大気連通部153Aの少なくとも一部をケーシング(カバー体)19、具体的には本体部12の鉛直方向下方に配置することで、大気連通部153Aが非意図的に閉塞されることを防止することができる。また、樹脂フィルム153Mの破損を防止することができる。これにより、想定以上のインク59が揮発して、インク59に保証以上の物性変化が生じることを防止することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the ink tank 151 is provided on the upper surface with an atmospheric communication portion 153A that communicates the inside of the ink tank 151 with the atmosphere, and at least a part of the atmospheric communication portion 153A is a casing (cover) in the vertical direction. It is arranged vertically below (here, directly below) the casing (cover body) 19 in a state where the air can flow between the body) 19 and the casing (cover body) 19. Specifically, it is arranged in a state where an interval at which the atmosphere can flow is secured between the main body portion 12 and the main body portion 12. If the user inadvertently places luggage or the like on the air communication unit 153A, the air communication unit 153A may be completely blocked or the resin film 153M may be damaged. By arranging at least a part of the air communication part 153A vertically below the casing (cover body) 19, specifically, the main body 12, it is possible to prevent the air communication part 153A from being unintentionally blocked. Can be done. Further, it is possible to prevent the resin film 153M from being damaged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ink 59 from volatilizing more than expected and causing a change in the physical properties of the ink 59 beyond the guarantee.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、蓋体開口部(インク補充口)313は、インクタンク151の上面に設けられ、平面視において、蓋体開口部(インク補充口)313の少なくとも一部は、ケーシング(カバー体)19と重ならないように配置されている。具体的には、本体部12と重ならないように設けられている。これにより、ユーザは、インクタンク151のインク59が少なくなったときに、プリンタ10の前方側から、インク59を継ぎ足すことができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the lid opening (ink refilling port) 313 is provided on the upper surface of the ink tank 151, and in a plan view, at least a part of the lid opening (ink refilling port) 313 is a casing. (Cover body) It is arranged so as not to overlap with 19. Specifically, it is provided so as not to overlap with the main body portion 12. As a result, the user can add ink 59 from the front side of the printer 10 when the ink 59 in the ink tank 151 is low.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、複数のインクタンク151は、それぞれ、前方から後方に向かって下方に傾斜するように形成された前壁(タンク傾斜面)152Cを有する。これにより、インク補充部190から補充されたインク59が前壁152Cを伝ってインク貯留室154内を移動しやすくなり、インク59の泡立ちが抑えられる。また、インクタンク151の前壁が垂直であったり、前方に傾斜するように形成されていたりする場合に比べて、ユーザがインク59を継ぎ足す時にプリンタ10に近づいても、ユーザの足がインクタンク151にぶつかりにくくなる。したがって、ユーザのインク補充時の作業性を向上することができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, each of the plurality of ink tanks 151 has a front wall (tank inclined surface) 152C formed so as to incline downward from the front to the rear. As a result, the ink 59 replenished from the ink replenishing unit 190 easily moves in the ink storage chamber 154 along the front wall 152C, and foaming of the ink 59 is suppressed. Further, as compared with the case where the front wall of the ink tank 151 is vertical or is formed so as to be inclined forward, even if the user approaches the printer 10 when adding the ink 59, the user's foot is inked. It becomes difficult to hit the tank 151. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the user when refilling ink.
本実施形態のプリンタ10では、側面視において、プラテン14の前端14tは、複数のインクタンク151の全ての前端70tよりも前方に位置している。これにより、印刷完了後に、記録媒体5がインク供給装置70A~70Hの前方までプラテン14で案内される。そのため、ユーザはプラテン14の両側面に手を挿入して容易に印刷完了後の記録媒体5を取り上げることができる。
In the printer 10 of the present embodiment, the front end 14t of the platen 14 is located in front of all the front ends 70t of the plurality of ink tanks 151 in the side view. As a result, after the printing is completed, the recording medium 5 is guided by the platen 14 to the front of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H. Therefore, the user can easily pick up the recording medium 5 after printing is completed by inserting his / her hands into both side surfaces of the platen 14.
以上、本実施形態に係るプリンタ10について説明した。しかし、本発明に係るインクジェットプリンタは、これに限定されない。本発明は、本明細書に開示されている内容と当該分野における技術常識とに基づいて実施することができる。請求の範囲に記載の技術には、上記に例示した実施形態を様々に変形、変更したものが含まれる。例えば、上記した実施形態の一部を、他の変形態様に置き換えることも可能であり、上記した実施形態に他の変形態様を追加することも可能である。また、上記した実施形態と以下の変形態様とを適宜組み合わせることもできる。また、その技術的特徴が必須なものとして説明されていなければ、適宜削除することも可能である。
The printer 10 according to this embodiment has been described above. However, the inkjet printer according to the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can be carried out based on the contents disclosed in the present specification and common general technical knowledge in the art. The techniques described in the claims include various modifications and modifications of the embodiments illustrated above. For example, it is possible to replace a part of the above-described embodiment with another modification, and it is also possible to add another modification to the above-described embodiment. Further, the above-described embodiment and the following modified modes can be appropriately combined. Further, if the technical feature is not explained as essential, it can be deleted as appropriate.
例えば上記した実施形態では、左右方向において、ケーシング19の左側部19Lに4つのインク供給装置70A~70Dが一列に並び、ケーシング19の右側部19Rに4つのインク供給装置70E~70Hが一列に並んでいた。しかしこれには限定されない。図16は、インクジェットプリンタ500の右側部を拡大した斜視図である。図17は、インクジェットプリンタ500の右側面図の一部である。図16、図17に示すインクジェットプリンタ500では、ケーシング19の右側部19Rに、4つ以上、具体的には8つのインク供給装置70I~70Pが設けられている。インク供給装置70I~70Pの具体的構成は、上記したインク供給装置70A~70Hと同様であってよい。なお、図16、図17には、8つのインク供給装置70I~70Pに、それぞれサプライボトル400を装着した状態を表している。また、図17では、蓋体153の上部に設けられているインク補充部190および大気連通部153Aが、蓋体カバー153Cで覆われている。
For example, in the above-described embodiment, the four ink supply devices 70A to 70D are arranged in a row on the left side portion 19L of the casing 19 and the four ink supply devices 70E to 70H are arranged in a row on the right side portion 19R of the casing 19 in the left-right direction. I was out. However, it is not limited to this. FIG. 16 is an enlarged perspective view of the right side portion of the inkjet printer 500. FIG. 17 is a part of the right side view of the inkjet printer 500. In the inkjet printer 500 shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, four or more, specifically eight, ink supply devices 70I to 70P are provided on the right side portion 19R of the casing 19. The specific configuration of the ink supply devices 70I to 70P may be the same as that of the ink supply devices 70A to 70H described above. 16 and 17 show a state in which the supply bottle 400 is attached to each of the eight ink supply devices 70I to 70P. Further, in FIG. 17, the ink replenishment portion 190 and the air communication portion 153A provided on the upper part of the lid body 153 are covered with the lid body cover 153C.
図16に示すように、8つのインク供給装置70I~70Pは、左右方向に沿って二列に並んでいる。8つのインク供給装置70I~70Pは、前後方向に段違いに配置されている。すなわち、インク供給装置70I~70Lは、インク供給装置70M~70Pよりも前方に配置されている。前方側のインク供給装置70I~70Lは、L字状の支持部材18Mを介して、配管ボックス部18Rに支持されている。前方側のインク供給装置70I~70Lは、左右方向に一直線状に並んでいる。前方側のインク供給装置70I~70Lは、上下方向の位置が揃っている。後方側のインク供給装置70M~70Pは配管ボックス部18Rに直接支持されている。後方側のインク供給装置70M~70Pは、左右方向に一直線状に並んでいる。後方側のインク供給装置70M~70Pは、上下方向の位置が揃っている。インク供給装置70I~70Lは、後方側に位置するインクタンクの一例であり、インク供給装置70M~70Pは、前方側に位置する前記インクタンクの一例である。
As shown in FIG. 16, eight ink supply devices 70I to 70P are arranged in two rows along the left-right direction. The eight ink supply devices 70I to 70P are arranged in a staggered manner in the front-rear direction. That is, the ink supply devices 70I to 70L are arranged in front of the ink supply devices 70M to 70P. The ink supply devices 70I to 70L on the front side are supported by the piping box portion 18R via an L-shaped support member 18M. The ink supply devices 70I to 70L on the front side are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction. The ink supply devices 70I to 70L on the front side are aligned in the vertical direction. The ink supply devices 70M to 70P on the rear side are directly supported by the piping box portion 18R. The ink supply devices 70M to 70P on the rear side are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction. The ink supply devices 70M to 70P on the rear side are aligned in the vertical direction. The ink supply devices 70I to 70L are examples of ink tanks located on the rear side, and the ink supply devices 70M to 70P are examples of the ink tanks located on the front side.
図17に示すように、上下方向において、前方側のインク供給装置70Lの少なくとも一部は、後方側のインク供給装置70Pよりも下方に配置されている。前後方向において、後方側のインク供給装置70Pのインクタンク151の前壁(タンク傾斜面)152Cの少なくとも一部は、前方側のインク供給装置70Lのインクタンク151と重なっている。すなわち、後方側のインク供給装置70Pのインクタンク151の前壁152Cは、上記したインク供給装置70A~70Hと同様に、前方から後方に向かって漸次下方に傾斜するスロープ状である。このため、前壁152Cの前方かつ下方には、デッドスペースとなっている空間部分がある。後方側のインク供給装置70Pのかかる空間部分を有効活用して、前方側のインク供給装置70Lが入れ込まれている。
As shown in FIG. 17, in the vertical direction, at least a part of the ink supply device 70L on the front side is arranged below the ink supply device 70P on the rear side. In the front-rear direction, at least a part of the front wall (tank inclined surface) 152C of the ink tank 151 of the ink supply device 70P on the rear side overlaps with the ink tank 151 of the ink supply device 70L on the front side. That is, the front wall 152C of the ink tank 151 of the ink supply device 70P on the rear side has a slope shape that gradually inclines downward from the front to the rear, similarly to the ink supply devices 70A to 70H described above. Therefore, there is a space portion that is a dead space in front of and below the front wall 152C. The ink supply device 70L on the front side is inserted by effectively utilizing the space portion of the ink supply device 70P on the rear side.
以上のような構成により、ケーシング19の右側部19Rに多くの(例えば4つ以上の)インク供給装置を配置する際にも、前後方向の幅をコンパクトに収めることができ、ユーザの邪魔になりにくい。また、前方側のインク供給装置70I~70Lと後方側のインク供給装置70M~70Pとの高さの差が小さいため、8つのインク供給装置70I~70Pをいずれもインク59の継ぎ足しやすい位置に配置することができる。これにより、ユーザのインク補充時の作業性を維持することができる。
With the above configuration, even when many (for example, four or more) ink supply devices are arranged on the right side portion 19R of the casing 19, the width in the front-rear direction can be compactly accommodated, which is an obstacle to the user. Hateful. Further, since the height difference between the ink supply devices 70I to 70L on the front side and the ink supply devices 70M to 70P on the rear side is small, all eight ink supply devices 70I to 70P are arranged at positions where the ink 59 can be easily added. can do. As a result, the workability of the user when refilling ink can be maintained.
また、図17に示すように、上下方向において、前方側のインク供給装置70Lのインク流出管152Fは、後方側の4つのインク供給装置70Pのインク流出管152Fよりも上方に配置されている。言い換えれば、上下方向において、前方側のインク供給装置70Lのインク流出管152Fの位置と、後方側のインク供給装置70Pのインク流出管152Fの位置とがずれている。これにより、前方側のインク供給装置70I~70Lのインク流路40の配管や配線を、配管ボックス部18R側に良好に取り回すことができる。例えば、第1流路40aを支持部材18Mの内部に通し、配管ボックス部18Rの内部まで延ばすことができる。
Further, as shown in FIG. 17, in the vertical direction, the ink outflow pipe 152F of the ink supply device 70L on the front side is arranged above the ink outflow pipe 152F of the four ink supply devices 70P on the rear side. In other words, in the vertical direction, the position of the ink outflow tube 152F of the ink supply device 70L on the front side and the position of the ink outflow tube 152F of the ink supply device 70P on the rear side are deviated from each other. As a result, the piping and wiring of the ink flow paths 40 of the ink supply devices 70I to 70L on the front side can be satisfactorily routed to the piping box portion 18R side. For example, the first flow path 40a can be passed through the inside of the support member 18M and extended to the inside of the piping box portion 18R.
例えば上記した実施形態では、インク補充部190が装着機構192を備え、サプライボトル400を着脱可能に構成されていた。しかしこれには限定されない。インク補充部190は、上下方向に貫通した貫通孔であり、ユーザがサプライボトル400からインク59を注ぎ入れるように構成されていてもよい。また、インク補充部190は、例えば保持機構280を有しておらず、ユーザがサプライボトル400を手に持った状態のまま保持するように構成されていてもよい。また、インク補充部190は、例えばロック機構290を有しておらず、サプライボトル400が自重だけでインク59の継ぎ足しが開始されるように構成されていてもよい。
For example, in the above embodiment, the ink replenishment unit 190 is provided with a mounting mechanism 192, and the supply bottle 400 is detachably configured. However, it is not limited to this. The ink replenishment unit 190 is a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and may be configured so that the user can pour ink 59 from the supply bottle 400. Further, the ink replenishing unit 190 may not have, for example, a holding mechanism 280, and may be configured to hold the supply bottle 400 in a state where the user holds it in his / her hand. Further, the ink replenishment unit 190 may not have, for example, the lock mechanism 290, and may be configured such that the supply bottle 400 starts the replenishment of the ink 59 only by its own weight.
例えば上記した実施形態では、インクタンク151が、タンク本体(下部材)152と蓋体(上部材)153とから構成され、タンク本体152の全体が蓋体153の全体よりも上方に位置していた。しかしこれには限定されない。インクタンク151は、例えば、次のいずれか:(1)タンク本体152と蓋体153との間に、インクタンク151の一部を構成する部材を設ける;(2)タンク本体152の上方に、インクタンク151の一部を構成する部材を設ける;(3)蓋体153の下方に、インクタンク151の一部を構成する部材を設ける;(4)タンク本体152の下端部に段差が形成されると共に、蓋体153の上端部に段差が形成され、タンク本体152の下端部の一部が、蓋体153の上端部の一部よりも下方に位置している;ように構成されていてもよい。
For example, in the above embodiment, the ink tank 151 is composed of a tank body (lower member) 152 and a lid body (upper member) 153, and the entire tank body 152 is located above the entire lid body 153. It was. However, it is not limited to this. The ink tank 151 is, for example, provided with any of the following: (1) a member forming a part of the ink tank 151 is provided between the tank body 152 and the lid 153; (2) above the tank body 152, A member forming a part of the ink tank 151 is provided; (3) a member forming a part of the ink tank 151 is provided below the lid 153; (4) a step is formed at the lower end of the tank body 152. At the same time, a step is formed at the upper end of the lid 153, and a part of the lower end of the tank body 152 is located below a part of the upper end of the lid 153; May be good.
例えば上記した実施形態では、平面視において、インク流入口153Iおよび蓋体開口部313が、スロープ状の前壁152Cと重なっていた。しかしこれには限定されない。他の実施形態において、インク流入口153Iおよび/または蓋体開口部313は、前壁152Cと重なっていなくてもよい。
For example, in the above-described embodiment, the ink inlet 153I and the lid opening 313 overlap with the slope-shaped front wall 152C in a plan view. However, it is not limited to this. In other embodiments, the ink inlet 153I and / or the lid opening 313 does not have to overlap the front wall 152C.
例えば上記した実施形態では、蓋体153に設けられた大気連通部153Aが、貫通孔153Hと、蛇道153Sと、樹脂フィルム153Mと、を備えるラビリンス構造体であった。しかしこれには限定されない。大気連通部153Aは、例えば、メッシュ状の気液分離フィルタや、遠心式分離器、表面張力式分離器、重力式分離器、コアレッサー等の、従来公知の気液分離器で構成されていてもよい。
For example, in the above embodiment, the atmospheric communication portion 153A provided in the lid 153 is a labyrinth structure including a through hole 153H, a serpentine 153S, and a resin film 153M. However, it is not limited to this. The air communication unit 153A is composed of a conventionally known gas-liquid separator such as a mesh-shaped gas-liquid separator, a centrifugal separator, a surface tension separator, a gravity separator, and a corelesser. May be good.
例えば上記した実施形態では、感圧膜161が、タンク本体152の下壁152Aに配置されていた。しかしこれには限定されない。感圧膜161は、タンク本体152の上下方向に沿って延びる側壁(横壁)の下方部分に配置されていてもよい。この場合、例えば、タンク本体152の側壁に、側方開口部が形成されていて、感圧膜161は、上記側方開口部を塞ぐようにタンク本体152に取り付けられていてもよい。また、付勢部材163は、水平方向に伸縮自在なように、感圧膜161に取り付けられていてもよい。
For example, in the above embodiment, the pressure sensitive film 161 is arranged on the lower wall 152A of the tank body 152. However, it is not limited to this. The pressure-sensitive film 161 may be arranged in a lower portion of a side wall (horizontal wall) extending along the vertical direction of the tank body 152. In this case, for example, a side opening may be formed on the side wall of the tank body 152, and the pressure sensitive film 161 may be attached to the tank body 152 so as to close the side opening. Further, the urging member 163 may be attached to the pressure sensitive film 161 so as to be stretchable in the horizontal direction.
例えば上記した実施形態では、感圧膜161が可撓性フィルムで構成されていた。しかしこれには限定されない。感圧膜161は、可撓性を有していなくてもよい。感圧膜161は、例えば、ゴム製の部材であってもよい。感圧膜161は、例えば、インク貯留室154に近づく方向およびインク貯留室154から遠ざかる方向に伸縮可能な伸縮部材であってもよい。伸縮部材は、例えば、襞状の断面形状を有し、アコーディオン状に伸縮可能に構成されていてもよい。
For example, in the above embodiment, the pressure sensitive film 161 is made of a flexible film. However, it is not limited to this. The pressure sensitive film 161 does not have to have flexibility. The pressure sensitive film 161 may be, for example, a rubber member. The pressure-sensitive film 161 may be, for example, an elastic member that can expand and contract in a direction approaching the ink storage chamber 154 and a direction away from the ink storage chamber 154. The telescopic member may have, for example, a fold-shaped cross-sectional shape and may be configured to be stretchable in an accordion shape.
例えば上記した実施形態では、付勢部材163がコイルばねであった。しかしこれには限定されない。付勢部材163は、例えば、被検出部材162の下方に配置され、所定の磁極を有する第1の磁性体と、上記第1の磁性体と対向する位置に配置され、上記第1の磁性体と反発する磁極を有する第2の磁性体と、を備え、上記第1の磁性体と上記第2の磁性体の間に作用する反力によって、感圧膜161を付勢するように構成されていてもよい。
For example, in the above embodiment, the urging member 163 was a coil spring. However, it is not limited to this. The urging member 163 is arranged below, for example, the member to be detected 162, is arranged at a position facing the first magnetic body having a predetermined magnetic pole and the first magnetic body, and is arranged at a position facing the first magnetic body. It is configured to include a second magnetic material having a magnetic pole that repels the pressure-sensitive film 161 and to urge the pressure-sensitive film 161 by a reaction force acting between the first magnetic material and the second magnetic material. You may be.
例えば上記した実施形態では、センサ部164が第1センサS1および第2センサS2を備えていた。しかしこれには限定されない。センサの個数は、3個以上であってもよい。また、1つのセンサで、複数のインクタンク151の状態を検出可能に構成されていてもよい。また、例えば上記した実施形態では、第1センサS1および第2センサS2がいずれも透過型のフォトセンサであった。しかしこれには限定されない。第1センサS1および第2センサS2は、相互に構成が異なっていてもよい。第1センサS1および/または第2センサS2は、例えば、反射型のフォトセンサであってもよいし、非接触式の位置センサであってもよいし、接触式のスイッチ等であってもよい。
For example, in the above embodiment, the sensor unit 164 includes the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2. However, it is not limited to this. The number of sensors may be three or more. Further, one sensor may be configured to be able to detect the states of a plurality of ink tanks 151. Further, for example, in the above-described embodiment, both the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 are transmissive photosensors. However, it is not limited to this. The first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 may have different configurations from each other. The first sensor S1 and / or the second sensor S2 may be, for example, a reflective photo sensor, a non-contact type position sensor, a contact type switch, or the like. ..
例えば上記した実施形態では、サプライボトル400の挿入部270への挿入方向が、下方であった。しかしこれには限定されない。サプライボトル400の挿入方向は、例えば、水平方向や斜め鉛直方向であってもよい。
For example, in the above embodiment, the insertion direction of the supply bottle 400 into the insertion portion 270 is downward. However, it is not limited to this. The insertion direction of the supply bottle 400 may be, for example, a horizontal direction or an oblique vertical direction.
例えば上記した実施形態では、インクタンク151およびサプライボトル(補充容器)400が、いずれも樹脂製であった。しかしこれには限定されない。インクタンク151およびサプライボトル400の材質はそれぞれ適宜に選択でき、樹脂には限られない。また、サプライボトル400は、例えばプリンタ10が装着機構192を備えていない場合などには、定型性を有していなくてもよい。補充容器は、例えばインクパウチのような袋状であってもよい。
For example, in the above embodiment, the ink tank 151 and the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 are both made of resin. However, it is not limited to this. The materials of the ink tank 151 and the supply bottle 400 can be appropriately selected, and are not limited to resin. Further, the supply bottle 400 does not have to have a fixed shape, for example, when the printer 10 does not have the mounting mechanism 192. The refill container may have a bag shape such as an ink pouch.
例えば上記した実施形態では、サプライボトル(補充容器)400の封止フィルム422とキャップ430とが直接対向し、封止フィルム422とキャップ430との間に隙間が空いていた。しかしこれには限定されない。例えば、封止フィルム422とキャップ430とは、他の部材を介して間接的に対向していてもよい。また、封止フィルム422とキャップ430との間には隙間が空いていなくてもよい。
For example, in the above embodiment, the sealing film 422 of the supply bottle (replenishment container) 400 and the cap 430 face each other directly, and there is a gap between the sealing film 422 and the cap 430. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the sealing film 422 and the cap 430 may indirectly face each other via other members. Further, there may not be a gap between the sealing film 422 and the cap 430.
図18は、サプライボトル600の注入口421の付近を示す縦断面図である。図18に示すように、サプライボトル600は、上記したサプライボトル400と同様に、インク注入口421の形成された容器本体410と、インク注入口421を塞ぐように張られた封止フィルム422と、を有している。サプライボトル600は、さらに、容器本体410の前端部415に取り付けられたキャップ630と、キャップ630と封止フィルム422との間に配置された保護部材640と、を有している。キャップ630は、基部631と、基部から立ち上がった立壁部632と、を有している。保護部材640は、損傷しやすい封止フィルム422を保護する部材である。上下方向において、保護部材640は、基部631の内側の面と封止フィルム422との間に配置されている。保護部材640は、基部631と封止フィルム422とに接触している。封止フィルム422は、保護部材640を介してキャップ630に間接的に対向している。
FIG. 18 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of the injection port 421 of the supply bottle 600. As shown in FIG. 18, the supply bottle 600 includes a container body 410 in which the ink injection port 421 is formed and a sealing film 422 stretched so as to close the ink injection port 421, similarly to the supply bottle 400 described above. ,have. The supply bottle 600 further has a cap 630 attached to the front end 415 of the container body 410 and a protective member 640 arranged between the cap 630 and the sealing film 422. The cap 630 has a base 631 and a standing wall portion 632 that rises from the base. The protective member 640 is a member that protects the fragile sealing film 422. In the vertical direction, the protective member 640 is arranged between the inner surface of the base 631 and the sealing film 422. The protective member 640 is in contact with the base 631 and the sealing film 422. The sealing film 422 indirectly faces the cap 630 via the protective member 640.
保護部材640は、例えばゴム製である。保護部材640は、例えば環状(例えば円環状)である。保護部材640は、封止フィルム422の熱溶着された溶着部Wに沿って配置されているとよい。保護部材640は、封止フィルム422の溶着部Wの周縁を覆うように配置されているとよい。これにより、保護部材640が、封止フィルム422に対する衝撃を緩和する衝撃緩衝部材として機能しうる。すなわち、市場流通時(例えば輸送時)や使用時等に、サプライボトル600を誤って落としてしまうことがありうる。このとき、上記した実施形態のように封止フィルム422とキャップ630との間に隙間が空いていると、キャップ630の側が地面に激突したときに、収容されているインク59の水激作用によって封止フィルム422が鉛直方向下方に変位し、溶着部Wの周縁に大きな負荷がかかる。これにより、溶着部Wが伸びたり剥離したりして封止フィルム422が破損し、インク59が漏れ出すおそれがある。保護部材640が封止フィルム422の溶着部Wの周縁に配置されていることで、保護部材640で衝撃を吸収することができる。これにより、サプライボトル600を落下させた際に封止フィルム422の溶着部Wが破損しにくくなり、インク59が漏れ出すことを抑制することができる。また、封止フィルム422とキャップ630との間に保護部材640が介在していることで、キャップ630の締結時に、キャップ630が封止フィルム422に強い力で押し付けられることを防止することができる。また、キャップ630にバリ等があっても、バリ等が封止フィルム422に直接接触することが防止できる。
The protective member 640 is made of rubber, for example. The protective member 640 is, for example, an annular shape (for example, an annular shape). The protective member 640 is preferably arranged along the heat-welded welded portion W of the sealing film 422. The protective member 640 is preferably arranged so as to cover the peripheral edge of the welded portion W of the sealing film 422. As a result, the protective member 640 can function as a shock absorbing member that cushions the impact on the sealing film 422. That is, the supply bottle 600 may be accidentally dropped during market distribution (for example, during transportation) or during use. At this time, if there is a gap between the sealing film 422 and the cap 630 as in the above embodiment, when the side of the cap 630 collides with the ground, the water hammer action of the contained ink 59 causes the ink 59 to be contained. The sealing film 422 is displaced downward in the vertical direction, and a large load is applied to the peripheral edge of the welded portion W. As a result, the welded portion W may be stretched or peeled off, the sealing film 422 may be damaged, and the ink 59 may leak out. Since the protective member 640 is arranged on the peripheral edge of the welded portion W of the sealing film 422, the protective member 640 can absorb the impact. As a result, when the supply bottle 600 is dropped, the welded portion W of the sealing film 422 is less likely to be damaged, and the ink 59 can be prevented from leaking out. Further, since the protective member 640 is interposed between the sealing film 422 and the cap 630, it is possible to prevent the cap 630 from being pressed against the sealing film 422 with a strong force when the cap 630 is fastened. .. Further, even if the cap 630 has burrs or the like, it is possible to prevent the burrs or the like from coming into direct contact with the sealing film 422.
例えば上記した実施形態では、保持機構280が、傾斜した保持面281aとロック機構290とを含んでいた。しかしこれには限定されない。保持機構は、例えば、サプライボトルを把持するような機構でもよい。また、保持機構は、装着機構の一部でなくてもよく、保持機構の一部または全部は装着機構の外側に設けられていてもよい。
For example, in the above embodiment, the holding mechanism 280 includes an inclined holding surface 281a and a locking mechanism 290. However, it is not limited to this. The holding mechanism may be, for example, a mechanism for gripping the supply bottle. Further, the holding mechanism does not have to be a part of the mounting mechanism, and a part or all of the holding mechanism may be provided outside the mounting mechanism.
例えば上記した実施形態では、保持面281aおよび被保持面412aは円錐面に構成され、側面視において直線の形状を有していたが、これには限定されない。保持面281aおよび被保持面412aは、例えば、側面視において曲線の形状を有していてもよいし、側面視において段差を有していてもよい。
For example, in the above-described embodiment, the holding surface 281a and the held surface 412a are formed as a conical surface and have a linear shape in a side view, but the present invention is not limited to this. The holding surface 281a and the held surface 412a may have a curved shape in the side view, or may have a step in the side view, for example.
例えば上記した実施形態では、キャリッジ30が左右方向に移動し、記録媒体5が前後方向に移動するように構成されていたが、これには限定されない。キャリッジ30と記録媒体5との移動は相対的なものであり、そのどちらが左右方向または前後方向に移動してもよい。例えば、記録媒体5は移動不能に配置され、キャリッジ30が走査方向および前後方向の両方向に移動可能なように構成されていてもよい。また、キャリッジ30および記録媒体5のいずれもが両方向に移動可能なように構成されていてもよい。また、プリンタ10の構成は特に限定されない。プリンタ10は、例えばフラットベッドタイプのプリンタであってもよい。プリンタ10は、紫外線を照射する照射装置を備えていてもよいし、記録媒体5をカットするカッティングヘッドを備えていてもよい。
For example, in the above-described embodiment, the carriage 30 is configured to move in the left-right direction, and the recording medium 5 is configured to move in the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. The movement of the carriage 30 and the recording medium 5 is relative, and either of them may move in the left-right direction or the front-back direction. For example, the recording medium 5 may be arranged immovably, and the carriage 30 may be configured to be movable in both the scanning direction and the front-rear direction. Further, both the carriage 30 and the recording medium 5 may be configured to be movable in both directions. Further, the configuration of the printer 10 is not particularly limited. The printer 10 may be, for example, a flatbed type printer. The printer 10 may include an irradiation device that irradiates ultraviolet rays, or may include a cutting head that cuts the recording medium 5.
10 プリンタ(インクジェットプリンタ)
18L、18R 配管ボックス部
19 ケーシング(カバー体)
20 インクヘッド
40 インク流路
151 インクタンク
152 タンク本体(下部材)
153 蓋体(上部材)
160 インク量検出部
170 インク供給装置
190 インク補充部
260 装着機構
270 挿入部
280 保持機構
290 ロック機構
310 弁体
313 蓋体開口部
400 サプライボトル(補充容器)
421 インク注入口 10 printer (inkjet printer)
18L, 18R Pipingbox part 19 Casing (cover body)
20Ink head 40 Ink flow path 151 Ink tank 152 Tank body (lower member)
153 Lid body (upper member)
160 Ink amount detection unit 170Ink supply device 190 Ink replenishment unit 260 Mounting mechanism 270 Insertion unit 280 Holding mechanism 290 Locking mechanism 310 Valve body 313 Lid opening 400 Supply bottle (replenishment container)
421 Ink inlet
18L、18R 配管ボックス部
19 ケーシング(カバー体)
20 インクヘッド
40 インク流路
151 インクタンク
152 タンク本体(下部材)
153 蓋体(上部材)
160 インク量検出部
170 インク供給装置
190 インク補充部
260 装着機構
270 挿入部
280 保持機構
290 ロック機構
310 弁体
313 蓋体開口部
400 サプライボトル(補充容器)
421 インク注入口 10 printer (inkjet printer)
18L, 18R Piping
20
153 Lid body (upper member)
160 Ink amount detection unit 170
421 Ink inlet
Claims (33)
- 記録媒体に向かってインクを吐出するインクヘッドと、
左右方向に延び、前記インクヘッドを覆うカバー体と、
インクを補充するインク補充口を有し、前記インクヘッドに供給する前記インクを貯留するインクタンクと、
を備え、
前記インクタンクの少なくとも一部は、前記カバー体の鉛直方向下方に配置されており、
平面視において、前記インク補充口の少なくとも一部は、前記カバー体と重ならないように設けられている、
インクジェットプリンタ。 An ink head that ejects ink toward the recording medium,
A cover body that extends in the left-right direction and covers the ink head,
An ink tank having an ink replenishment port for replenishing ink and storing the ink supplied to the ink head, and an ink tank.
With
At least a part of the ink tank is arranged vertically below the cover body.
In a plan view, at least a part of the ink replenishment port is provided so as not to overlap the cover body.
Inkjet printer. - 前記インク補充口は、前記インクタンクの上面に設けられている、
請求項1に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The ink replenishment port is provided on the upper surface of the ink tank.
The inkjet printer according to claim 1. - 平面視において、前記インクタンクの少なくとも一部は、前記カバー体よりも前方に位置している、
請求項1または2に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 In a plan view, at least a part of the ink tank is located in front of the cover body.
The inkjet printer according to claim 1 or 2. - 平面視において、前記インク補充口の全体は、前記カバー体と重ならないように設けられている、
請求項1から3のいずれか一項に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 In a plan view, the entire ink replenishment port is provided so as not to overlap the cover body.
The inkjet printer according to any one of claims 1 to 3. - 前記インク補充口は、前記インクタンクの前後方向における中心線よりも前方に設けられている、
請求項1から4のいずれか一項に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The ink replenishment port is provided in front of the center line in the front-rear direction of the ink tank.
The inkjet printer according to any one of claims 1 to 4. - 前記インク補充口は、ユーザの立位状態での腰の高さ以上の位置に設けられている、
請求項1から5のいずれか一項に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The ink replenishment port is provided at a position equal to or higher than the waist height in the standing position of the user.
The inkjet printer according to any one of claims 1 to 5. - 記録媒体を支持するプラテンと、
一端が前記インクタンクに接続され他端が前記インクヘッドに接続されたインク流路と、をさらに備え、
前記カバー体は、少なくとも一部が前記プラテンの側方に配置され、前記インク流路を構成する構成部品の少なくとも一部を収容する配管ボックス部を備える、
請求項1から6のいずれか一項に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 Platens that support recording media and
An ink flow path having one end connected to the ink tank and the other end connected to the ink head is further provided.
The cover body includes a piping box portion in which at least a part thereof is arranged on the side surface of the platen and a part of the components constituting the ink flow path is housed.
The inkjet printer according to any one of claims 1 to 6. - 前記インクタンクは、前記配管ボックス部に固定されている、
請求項7に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The ink tank is fixed to the piping box portion.
The inkjet printer according to claim 7. - 前記カバー体が前記プラテンの左側方から右側方まで延びており、
前記プラテンの左側方および右側方にそれぞれ前記インクタンクが設けられている、
請求項7または8に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The cover body extends from the left side to the right side of the platen.
The ink tanks are provided on the left side and the right side of the platen, respectively.
The inkjet printer according to claim 7 or 8. - 前記構成部品の一部は、前記配管ボックス部よりも前方であって、かつ鉛直方向における前記カバー体と前記インクタンクとの間に設けられている、
請求項7から9のいずれか一項に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 A part of the component parts is provided in front of the piping box portion and between the cover body and the ink tank in the vertical direction.
The inkjet printer according to any one of claims 7 to 9. - 前記インク流路は、前記インクを脱気する脱気装置を備え、
前記脱気装置の少なくとも一部が、前記配管ボックス部の内部に設けられている、
請求項7から10のいずれか一項に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The ink flow path includes a degassing device for degassing the ink.
At least a part of the degassing device is provided inside the piping box portion.
The inkjet printer according to any one of claims 7 to 10. - 補充用のインクが収容された補充容器が着脱可能に挿入される挿入部と、
前記インク補充口に連通され、前記挿入部に挿入された前記補充容器が接続される接続部と、
前記補充容器を前記接続部と接続された状態で保持する保持機構と、
をさらに備える、
請求項1から11のいずれか一項に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 An insertion part in which a refill container containing refill ink is detachably inserted, and
A connection portion that communicates with the ink replenishment port and is connected to the refill container inserted into the insertion portion.
A holding mechanism that holds the replenishment container in a state of being connected to the connection portion,
Further prepare,
The inkjet printer according to any one of claims 1 to 11. - 前記接続部と前記インク補充口とを接続するインク通路と、
前記補充容器の装着または離脱に対応して前記接続部と前記インク通路との間を開放または閉鎖する開閉機構と、
をさらに備える、
請求項12に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 An ink passage connecting the connection portion and the ink replenishment port,
An opening / closing mechanism that opens or closes between the connection portion and the ink passage in response to the attachment / detachment of the replenishment container.
Further prepare,
The inkjet printer according to claim 12. - 前記保持機構は、前記カバー体の前方に配置されている、
請求項12または13に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The holding mechanism is arranged in front of the cover body.
The inkjet printer according to claim 12 or 13. - 前記カバー体の前面には、ユーザが印刷に関する情報を入力する入力部が設けられ、
前記保持機構は、前記入力部の前方に配置されており、
前記保持機構に前記補充容器が保持された状態において、前記補充容器の上端が、前記入力部よりも鉛直方向下方に位置するように構成されている、
請求項14に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 An input unit for inputting information related to printing by a user is provided on the front surface of the cover body.
The holding mechanism is arranged in front of the input unit.
In a state where the replenishment container is held by the holding mechanism, the upper end of the replenishment container is configured to be located vertically below the input portion.
The inkjet printer according to claim 14. - 前記カバー体の前面には、印刷に関する情報が表示される表示部が設けられ、
前記保持機構は、前記表示部の前方に配置されており、
前記保持機構に前記補充容器が保持された状態において、前記補充容器の上端が、前記表示部よりも鉛直方向下方に位置するように構成されている、
請求項14または15に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 A display unit for displaying information related to printing is provided on the front surface of the cover body.
The holding mechanism is arranged in front of the display unit, and is arranged in front of the display unit.
In a state where the replenishment container is held by the holding mechanism, the upper end of the replenishment container is configured to be located vertically below the display unit.
The inkjet printer according to claim 14 or 15. - 前記インクタンクの容積は、前記補充容器の容積よりも大きい、
請求項12から16のいずれか一項に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The volume of the ink tank is larger than the volume of the refill container.
The inkjet printer according to any one of claims 12 to 16. - 前記保持機構が複数であり、複数の前記保持機構は、前記左右方向に並設されており、
複数の前記保持機構にそれぞれ前記補充容器が保持された状態において、隣り合う前記補充容器の間には、ユーザの手指が入る間隔が確保されるように構成されている、
請求項12から17のいずれか一項に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 There are a plurality of the holding mechanisms, and the plurality of holding mechanisms are arranged side by side in the left-right direction.
In a state where the replenishment container is held by each of the plurality of holding mechanisms, a space for inserting the user's finger is secured between the adjacent replenishment containers.
The inkjet printer according to any one of claims 12 to 17. - 前記補充容器は、前記インクが収容される容器本体と、前記容器本体の一端部に形成されたインク注入口と、を備え、
前記挿入部は、上方に向かって開口し、上方から前記補充容器を挿入するように構成されており、
前記保持機構は、前記インク注入口が鉛直方向下方を向いた状態で前記補充容器を保持するように構成されている、
請求項12から18のいずれか一項に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The replenishment container includes a container body in which the ink is stored and an ink injection port formed at one end of the container body.
The insertion portion is configured to open upward and insert the replenishment container from above.
The holding mechanism is configured to hold the refill container with the ink injection port facing downward in the vertical direction.
The inkjet printer according to any one of claims 12 to 18. - 前記補充容器は、前記挿入部への挿入方向に向かって狭まるように傾斜した被保持面を備え、
前記保持機構は、前記被保持面と対応するように傾斜した保持面を備える、
請求項12から19のいずれか一項に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The replenishment container includes a held surface that is inclined so as to be narrowed in the direction of insertion into the insertion portion.
The holding mechanism includes a holding surface that is inclined so as to correspond to the held surface.
The inkjet printer according to any one of claims 12 to 19. - 前記保持面と前記被保持面とが、同一の材料によって構成されている、
請求項20に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The holding surface and the held surface are made of the same material.
The inkjet printer according to claim 20. - 前記挿入部への前記補充容器の挿入方向が鉛直方向であり、
前記保持機構は、鉛直方向に延在するように前記補充容器を保持するように構成されている、
請求項12から21のいずれか一項に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The insertion direction of the replenishment container into the insertion portion is the vertical direction.
The holding mechanism is configured to hold the refill container so as to extend vertically.
The inkjet printer according to any one of claims 12 to 21. - 前記保持機構は、前記接続部と接続された状態の前記補充容器が前記挿入部への挿入方向の逆方向へ動くことを規制するロック機構を備える、
請求項12から22のいずれか一項に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The holding mechanism includes a locking mechanism that regulates the replenishment container connected to the connecting portion from moving in the direction opposite to the insertion direction into the inserting portion.
The inkjet printer according to any one of claims 12 to 22. - 前記インクタンクおよび前記補充容器のインクと接する部分は、いずれも樹脂材料によって形成されている、
請求項23に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 Both the ink tank and the portion of the refill container in contact with the ink are made of a resin material.
The inkjet printer according to claim 23. - 前記インクタンクは、
開口部と、開口部の周囲に設けられた第1フランジ部と、を有する下部材と、
前記下部材よりも上方に配置され、前記開口部を覆う板状部と、前記板状部の周囲に設けられた第2フランジ部と、を有する上部材と、
前記下部材の前記第1フランジ部と前記上部材の前記第2フランジ部とを結合するフランジ結合部と、
を備える、
請求項1から24のいずれか一項に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The ink tank
A lower member having an opening and a first flange portion provided around the opening,
An upper member having a plate-shaped portion arranged above the lower member and covering the opening, and a second flange portion provided around the plate-shaped portion.
A flange coupling portion that connects the first flange portion of the lower member and the second flange portion of the upper member,
To prepare
The inkjet printer according to any one of claims 1 to 24. - 前記インクタンクが複数であり、複数の前記インクタンクは、前記左右方向に並設されており、
隣り合う前記インクタンクの前記フランジ結合部が、鉛直方向に偏位している、
請求項25に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 There are a plurality of the ink tanks, and the plurality of the ink tanks are arranged side by side in the left-right direction.
The flange joint of the adjacent ink tanks is displaced in the vertical direction.
The inkjet printer according to claim 25. - 平面視において、隣り合う前記インクタンクの前記フランジ結合部が、相互に少なくとも一部重なっている、
請求項26に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 In a plan view, the flange joints of adjacent ink tanks overlap each other at least in part.
The inkjet printer according to claim 26. - 前記インクタンクは、上面に、前記インクタンクの内部と大気とを連通する大気連通部を備え、
前記大気連通部の少なくとも一部は、鉛直方向において前記カバー体との間に大気が流通可能な間隔を確保した状態で、前記カバー体の鉛直方向下方に配置されている、
請求項1から27のいずれか一項に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The ink tank is provided with an atmospheric communication portion that communicates the inside of the ink tank with the atmosphere on the upper surface thereof.
At least a part of the air communication portion is arranged below the cover body in the vertical direction in a state where an air can flow between the cover body and the cover body in the vertical direction.
The inkjet printer according to any one of claims 1 to 27. - 記録媒体を支持するプラテンと、
前記記録媒体に向かってインクを吐出するインクヘッドと、
左右方向に延び、前記インクヘッドを覆うカバー体と、
前記カバー体の前方かつ前記プラテンの側方に設けられ、インクを補充するインク補充口を有し、前記インクヘッドに供給する前記インクを貯留する複数のインクタンクと、
を備え、
複数の前記インクタンクは、それぞれ平面視において長辺と短辺とを有する矩形状であり、前記短辺が前記左右方向に沿って配置されている、
インクジェットプリンタ。 Platens that support recording media and
An ink head that ejects ink toward the recording medium and
A cover body that extends in the left-right direction and covers the ink head,
A plurality of ink tanks provided in front of the cover body and on the side of the platen, having an ink replenishment port for replenishing ink, and storing the ink supplied to the ink head.
With
Each of the plurality of ink tanks has a rectangular shape having a long side and a short side in a plan view, and the short sides are arranged along the left-right direction.
Inkjet printer. - 前記インク補充口は、前記インクタンクの上面に設けられ、平面視において、前記インク補充口の少なくとも一部は、前記カバー体と重ならないように配置されている、
請求項29に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The ink replenishment port is provided on the upper surface of the ink tank, and at least a part of the ink replenishment port is arranged so as not to overlap the cover body in a plan view.
The inkjet printer according to claim 29. - 複数の前記インクタンクの前壁は、それぞれ、前方から後方に向かって下方に傾斜するように形成されたタンク傾斜面を有する、
請求項29または30に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 Each of the front walls of the plurality of ink tanks has a tank inclined surface formed so as to incline downward from the front to the rear.
The inkjet printer according to claim 29 or 30. - 側面視において、前記プラテンの前端は、複数の前記インクタンクの全ての前端よりも前方に位置している、
請求項29から31のいずれか一項に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 In side view, the front edge of the platen is located in front of all the front edges of the plurality of ink tanks.
The inkjet printer according to any one of claims 29 to 31. - 複数の前記インクタンクは、前後方向に並設されており、
平面視において、後方側に位置する前記インクタンクの前記タンク傾斜面の少なくとも一部が、前方側に位置する前記インクタンクと重なっている、
請求項31に記載のインクジェットプリンタ。 The plurality of ink tanks are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction.
In a plan view, at least a part of the tank inclined surface of the ink tank located on the rear side overlaps with the ink tank located on the front side.
The inkjet printer according to claim 31.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2021567502A JP7387761B2 (en) | 2019-12-26 | 2020-12-22 | inkjet printer |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2019-237201 | 2019-12-26 | ||
JP2019237201 | 2019-12-26 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2021132283A1 true WO2021132283A1 (en) | 2021-07-01 |
Family
ID=76575952
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2020/048046 WO2021132283A1 (en) | 2019-12-26 | 2020-12-22 | Inkjet printer |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JP7387761B2 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2021132283A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2023102662A1 (en) * | 2021-12-10 | 2023-06-15 | Maplejet Limited | System for delivering ink to a printhead |
Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH1148491A (en) * | 1997-08-01 | 1999-02-23 | Seiko Epson Corp | Ink jet recorder |
CN104553340A (en) * | 2015-01-30 | 2015-04-29 | 杭州御澜科技有限公司 | Automatic constant ink supply system and constant ink supply method thereof |
JP2016147504A (en) * | 2016-05-25 | 2016-08-18 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Liquid storage container |
JP2018008510A (en) * | 2016-06-29 | 2018-01-18 | キヤノン株式会社 | Liquid supply mechanism, liquid discharge device, and liquid supply method |
JP2018140604A (en) * | 2017-02-28 | 2018-09-13 | キヤノン株式会社 | Inkjet recording device |
JP2019085112A (en) * | 2017-11-01 | 2019-06-06 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Ink storage bottle |
Family Cites Families (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2000043293A (en) | 1998-07-31 | 2000-02-15 | Canon Inc | Method and apparatus for forming image |
JP6070090B2 (en) | 2012-11-12 | 2017-02-01 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Liquid ejector |
JP6926750B2 (en) | 2017-07-12 | 2021-08-25 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Liquid storage container |
JP2020006631A (en) | 2018-07-11 | 2020-01-16 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Printer |
JP1632295S (en) | 2018-08-27 | 2019-05-27 | ||
WO2020129981A1 (en) | 2018-12-17 | 2020-06-25 | ローランドディー.ジー.株式会社 | Inkjet printer and ink supply device |
-
2020
- 2020-12-22 WO PCT/JP2020/048046 patent/WO2021132283A1/en active Application Filing
- 2020-12-22 JP JP2021567502A patent/JP7387761B2/en active Active
Patent Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH1148491A (en) * | 1997-08-01 | 1999-02-23 | Seiko Epson Corp | Ink jet recorder |
CN104553340A (en) * | 2015-01-30 | 2015-04-29 | 杭州御澜科技有限公司 | Automatic constant ink supply system and constant ink supply method thereof |
JP2016147504A (en) * | 2016-05-25 | 2016-08-18 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Liquid storage container |
JP2018008510A (en) * | 2016-06-29 | 2018-01-18 | キヤノン株式会社 | Liquid supply mechanism, liquid discharge device, and liquid supply method |
JP2018140604A (en) * | 2017-02-28 | 2018-09-13 | キヤノン株式会社 | Inkjet recording device |
JP2019085112A (en) * | 2017-11-01 | 2019-06-06 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Ink storage bottle |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2023102662A1 (en) * | 2021-12-10 | 2023-06-15 | Maplejet Limited | System for delivering ink to a printhead |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JPWO2021132283A1 (en) | 2021-07-01 |
JP7387761B2 (en) | 2023-11-28 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US12128693B2 (en) | Liquid discharge apparatus | |
US20210237456A1 (en) | Ink refill container and ink refill system | |
US7210771B2 (en) | Ink delivery system with print cartridge, container and reservoir apparatus and method | |
US11667123B2 (en) | Ink refill container and ink refill system | |
US10479093B2 (en) | Inkjet printer | |
JP6553796B2 (en) | Inkjet printer | |
JP5370403B2 (en) | Inkjet recording device | |
US8974038B2 (en) | Liquid holding container and liquid consuming apparatus | |
US9469119B2 (en) | Liquid cartridge | |
EP1704054A1 (en) | Replaceable ink container for inkjet printer | |
US7165833B2 (en) | Ink container installation and alignment feature | |
WO2021132283A1 (en) | Inkjet printer | |
JP2018030292A (en) | Liquid storage body and liquid jet device | |
JP7138725B2 (en) | Inkjet printer and ink supply device | |
JP6119338B2 (en) | Image recording device | |
WO2021125281A1 (en) | Inkjet printer | |
US7762654B2 (en) | Liquid container | |
JP6999636B2 (en) | Ink supply system and inkjet printer | |
JP2016190334A (en) | Printer | |
JP7463208B2 (en) | Liquid recovery device and liquid recovery and filling system | |
US11833824B2 (en) | Liquid storing container and printing apparatus | |
JP7043455B2 (en) | Inkjet printers and liquid feeders | |
JP6296377B2 (en) | Liquid cartridge | |
JP2023004089A (en) | inkjet printer | |
JP6187098B2 (en) | Printing fluid cartridge |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 20906111 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2021567502 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 20906111 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |